Project Methodology For Ceer Cars Factory Project

Project Construction Methodology
CEER
CONSTRUCTION OF VEHICLE PROTOTYPE WORKSHOP
AL FAWZAN INDUSTRIAL CITY, RIYADH
Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

Commercial Registration - 1010136286
P.O. Box: 571, Riyadh 11391, KSA
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
Email: sauditech@sauditech.com.sa
www.saudi-technical.com
1
GENRAL SITE LAYOUT

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
2

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
3
Subject: Project Construction Methodology

Saudi Technical Limited
Prepared By Reviewed By Verified By Date
Revision 00
Quality Manager Construction Manager Project Manager Status
Client/Consultant
Reviewed By Verified By Approved By
Quality Representative Project Engineer Project Manager

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
4
Table of Contents
References………………………………………………….
Introduction…………………………………………………
Objectives…………………………………………………..
Project Components………………………………………...
Responsibilities……………………………………………..
Work Procedure…………………………………………….
General Safety Requirements……………………………….
Staff organization chart…….……………………………….
Manpower Histogram……...………………………………..
Projects Milestones & Constrains……...……………….…..
Scope of MEP Work ……………….…….…….…...………
Installation Execution Methodologies…….…….…...………

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
5
❖ X-1: - Method Statement for civil works:

❖ X-2: - Method Statement for Black steel pipe installation
❖ X-3: - Method Statement for Installation of PVC Conduits in concrete slab & concrete walls
❖ X-4: - Method Statement for G.I & PVC Conduit on Surface
❖ X-5: - Method Statement for Cable tray & Ladders)
❖ X-6: - Method Statement for Cable Trunking System
❖ X-7: - Method Statement for Earthing System:
❖ X-8: - Method Statement for Light Protection System:
❖ X-9: - Method Statement for Pulling & Testing of Electrical Wires Conduits and Trunking:
❖ X-10: - Method Statement for Commissioning Management:
❖ X-11: - Method Statement for Bus Bar Trunking System
❖ X-12: - Method Statement for MV Transformer:
❖ X-13: - Method Statement for LV switchboards:
❖ X-14: - Method Statement for Mechanical (HVAC) Installation:
❖ X-15: - Method Statement for Installation and insulation of Ducting & Accessories
❖ X-16: - Method Statement for Installation of Fan Coil Unit (FCU):
❖ X-17: - Method Statement for Installation of Fans
❖ X-18: - Method Statement for HVAC Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
❖ X-19: - Method Statement for Method Statement Concealed Drainage Piping:
❖ X-20: - Method Statement for Installation of Above Ground Drainage Piping:
❖ X-21: - Method Statement for Domestic Water (Hot & Cold) Supply Piping
❖ X-22: - Method Statement for Installation of Water Heaters:
❖ X-23: - Method Statement for Domestic Water Supply Pumps:
❖ X-24: - Method Statement for Installation of Sanitary Fixtures:
❖ X-25: - Method Statement for Fire Fighting Installation:
❖ X-26: - Method Statement for firefighting sprinklers system

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
6
❖ X-27: - Method Statement for Fire Hose Cabinets:

❖ X-28: - Method Statement for Hydro-Static Testing of Sprinklers:
❖ X-29: - Method Statement for Installation of Fire Alarm System:
❖ X-30: - Method Statement for Installation of Zone Control Valve Assembly:
❖ X-31: - Method Statement for Installation of Pressure Reducing Valve Station:
❖ X-32: - Method of Statement for installation of Compressed Air System:
❖ X-33: - Method of Statement for Installation of Fire Suppression Novec system 1230:
❖ X-34: - Method of Statement for Finishing, Protection & Cleaning work:
Project Control Methodology ……...…….…….…......……………
Project Planning Schedule…… ………………………………. ….
Progress Measurement Procedure……………….………………….
Progress Reporting………………………….………………………
Procurement Plan…………………...…….…….…...…….….….….
Mobilization Plan and Project site preparation….…………....…….
Design Management plan…………………………………….…......
Procedure………………………………………….…………....……
Training Plan……………………………………….………….…….
Environment Plan……………………………………….……………

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
7
1. References:
• References & Applicable codes and standards

The Contractor and manufacturer shall comply with all relevant pats of the following codes
and standards, where applicable:
1- Project Specification Division
2- IEC International Electro-Technical Commission.
3- DIN 1999 and EN858 Standard Oil /Water separator.
4- ANSI American National Standards Institute.
5- SEC-ERB Saudi Electricity Company - Eastern Region Branch.
6- SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
7- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
8- NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
9- NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
10- UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
11- EHS Environmental Health and safety.
12- CSA Canadian Standard Association

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
8
13- COCHH Control of substance Hazardous to health regulation
14- CIBSE Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
15- CDM The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
16- BSRIA The Building Services Research and Information Association
17- BS British Standard
18- AWWA American Water Works Association
19- ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
20- ASPE American Institute Plumbing Engineers
21- ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
22- ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers.
23- SECO Saudi Electrical Company.
24- SASO Saudi Arabian Standard Organization.
25- AWS Structure Welding Code.
26- EJMA Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association.
27- NETA International Electrical Testing Association.
28- IET Institution of Engineering and Technology.
29- BASEC British Approvals Service for Electric Cables.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
9
30- ICEL The Industry Committee for Emergency Lighting.
31- ICC International Code Council.
32- IBC International Building Code.
33- ISO International Organization for Standardization.
34- IET Institution of Engineering and Technology.
35- AMCD Applicable Municipality Civil Defense.
➢ CSI Format for Construction Specifications
Division 01 — General Requirements
Facility Construction Subgroup
• Division 02 — Existing Conditions

• Division 03 — Concrete
• Division 04 — Masonry
• Division 05 — Metals
• Division 06 — Wood, Plastics, and Composites
• Division 07 — Thermal and Moisture Protection
• Division 08 — Openings
• Division 09 — Finishes
• Division 10 — Specialties
• Division 11 — Equipment
• Division 12 — Furnishings
• Division 13 — Special Construction
• Division 14 — Conveying Equipment

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
10
ability Services Subgroup:

• Division 21 — Fire Suppression
• Division 22 — Plumbing
• Division 23 — Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Division 25 — Integrated Automation
• Division 26 — Electrical
• Division 27 — Communications
• Division 28 — Electronic Safety and Security
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup:
• Division 31 — Earthwork
• Division 32 — Exterior Improvements
• Division 33 — Utilities
• Division 34 — Transportation
• Division 35 — Waterway and Marine Construction
Process Equipment Subgroup:
• Division 40 — Process Interconnections

• Division 41 — Material Processing and Handling Equipment
• Division 42 — Process Heating, Cooling, and Drying Equipment
• Division 43 — Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification and Storage Equipment
• Division 44 — Pollution and Waste Control Equipment
• Division 45 — Industry-Specific Manufacturing Equipment
• Division 46 — Water and Wastewater Equipment
• Division 48 — Electrical Power Generation
➢ ASTM International standards.
➢ IATA Standards.
➢ ICAO Standard.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
11
❖ Introduction:
I. Project Information:
CEER Prototype Workshop facility is intended for the final assembly and static testing of pre-
production engineering development electric vehicles and sub systems. Due to the nature of the
business, the facility needs to maintain a high degree of flexibility to adapt to fluid changes to the
programmed and production development process.
Additionally, due to the highly confidential nature of the work within the facility, internal and
external security is paramount.
CEER have taken the lease on newly constructed facility. However significant amount of work is
required to finalize the facility in order that it meets the functional requirements of CEER.
We request you to define and quote a proposal to provide construction services to support the final
stage development of the CEER Prototype Workshop in Riyadh.
II. OBJECTIVE:
As part of CEER vision, it has been approved for the set up and development of a vehicle prototyping
facility for the assembly of pre-production engineering development fleet and special vehicles. The
facility will also include a rapid prototyping workshop.
It is envisaged that the facility will be a state of the art, world class workshop using advanced
prototyping technologies to manufacture both prototype parts, systems, and vehicles.
III. Project component:

The Project Scope comprises of Infrastructure, MEP, Civil & Finishing works for the
below systems and eliminate any interruption with CEER- construction of prototype
workshop project operation and maintenance.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
12
CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORK
Division 01: General Requirements

Division 02: Earth works
Division 03: Plain and reinforced concrete
Division 04: Masonry works
Division 05: Metals works
Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 08: Doors and windows
Division 09: Finishes works
Division 10: Special works
TOTAL CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORK
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL WORK
Division 15: Equipment

Division 15: Fire Suppression
Division 15: Plumbing
Division 15: HVAC
Division 16: Electrical Works
Division 16: Communications
Division 16: Electronic Safety and Security
TOTAL ELECTRO-MECHANICAL WORK

SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE WORK
Division 17: Earthwork
Division 17: Exterior Improvement
Division 17 - Utilities
Daywork Schedule
❖ Earth Work:
• Site Survey.
• Geotechnical Survey and soil investigation.
• Preparation of excavated surface
• Design and construction methodology Approvals taking in consideration all
Safety precautions related to site work, Risk studies/ assessment (SIL: technical
safety & Risk Management), Emergency shut down and isolation system….

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
13
• Back Filling before any hard scape works

• Asphalting works and walk ways
• Road marking
• Signage works
• Testing and commissioning
• Project handing over.
❖ Concrete and civil works:
• Site Survey.
• Geotechnical Survey and soil investigation.
• Preparation of excavated surface
• Back Filling before structure and compaction
• Form work
• Rebar works
• Concrete pouring
• Concrete finishing and testing and commissioning
• Concrete finishing and testing and commissioning
❖ Fire Water System:
• Site Survey.
• Geotechnical Survey.
• Exploratory Excavation Survey.
• Excavation and sand bedding for the Pipe routing.
• Lay down and Installation of new piping network

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
14
• Construction of manholes and valve chambers with the installation of valves and
fire hydrants and accessories.
• Connect the new system with CEER- construction of prototype workshop
project Facilities.
• Testing and commissioning.
❖ HVAC System:
• Site Survey.
• Exploratory routing Survey.
• Installation of the Ducting network.
• Installation of Dessert cooler,Package unit & split unit.
• Construction of dampers and fittings with the installation of accessories.
• Ducting works
• Equipment installation works
• Project handing over

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
15
❖ Water supply System:
• Site Survey.
• Excavation and sand bedding for the new Pipe routing.
• Lay down and Installation of the piping network.
• Construction of manholes and valve chambers with the installation of valves and
accessories.
project Facilities.
❖ Finishing works:
• Site Survey.
• Block walls work
• Masonry works
• Steel works
• False ceiling works
• Plaster works
• Painting works

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
16
❖ Drainage System:
• Site Survey.
• Excavation and sand bedding for the new Pipe routing.
• Lay down and Installation of the piping network.
• Construction of manholes with all the accessories.
project Facilities.
❖ Electrical installations System:
• Site Survey.
• Excavation and sand bedding for the underground electrical works.
• Installation for the underground and aboveground electrical works.
project Facilities.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
17
➢ RESPONSIBILITIES:
1) Project Manager
Has the overall authority and responsibility for all aspects of the project and shall be
responsible for the overall implementation of this work procedure hand in hand with the
Contractor’s Safety and Quality Procedures.
2) The QA/QC department
• Shall be responsible for conducting surveillance and all inspection activities defined
herein and efficient recording of the results as required together with ensuring the
proper Quality procedures by planning analyzing, develop, conduct and monitor,
testing and inspection of material, documents, design and construction as per bellow
requirement:
• Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
• Submit, in format acceptable to the Engineer, a quality-control plan within (30) days
of Commencement Date and not less than 10 days prior to preconstruction conference.
Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be
used to carry out Contractor’s quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities.
Coordinate with Contractor’s construction schedule.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
18
• Prepare and submit a Project Program of work as per the IFC drawings and
Procurement schedule along with all site precautions and requirements, and update the
schedule in case of any delay or modifications.
• The Contractor remains responsible for the quality control and quality assurance
system employed to ensure the performance and quality attainment of all materials,
equipment, plant, furnishing and fittings installed under the Contract Scope and
integrated performance of the systems, equipment and plant once commissioned. The
Engineers approval of the Project Specific QA/QC Plan shall not relieve the Contractor
of any Contractual obligations.
• All quality precautions together with Product test, field quality test, testing agency.
• Ensure that all project construction is well experienced and educated to ensure that no
interruption will appear on the project because of selected employee.
• Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor’s other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
• Requirements for Contractor to provide their formalized quality- assurance and control
service are not limited by provisions of this Section.
• Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section, refer to
applicable sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
• Quality assurance and control plan of Sub-Contractors, Suppliers, Manufactures,
Fabricators, Installers, etc., shall be provided and submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer for approval where the specific requirement of these entities are not covered
by the Contractor’s overall QA/QC Plan.
• Ensure that Mockup will be executed as per requirement taking in consideration
the all required notification, supervisory, approvals...

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
19
3) The site QA/ QC Inspectors
• Shall carry out the planned inspections; surveillance and release hold points by signing
various quality records as proof of inspection conforming to specifications.
• Shall Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the
Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements
• The site QC Inspector shall accompany the CEER representative to carry out routine
inspections and release hold points by signing and obtaining the CEER representative
approval signatures on the various Quality Records as proof of inspection conforming
to specifications. The site QC Inspector shall ensure that all other discipline activities
that require inspection within the MEP construction program have been inspected and
approved.
• Shall Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of
the Works to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Works and completed
construction comply with requirements
• Provide sample Work Method Statements and associated Inspection and Test Plans to
denote/descript/agreed standard of documentation to be exchanged before work
action commencement, with the Engineer
4) Procurement and Logistic
• Shall be systematic coordination of all aspects of the procurement process including

bids, price negotiations, assuring proper quantities and specifications, shipping and
delivery. The goal is to obtain materials, services or products at the best possible cost

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
20
which meet the needs and time constraints of the organization taking in consideration
the following project requirement:
• Contractor shall procure and supply all materials other than Company supplied
materials, required for permanent installation of pipeline and piping system in sequence
and at appropriate time (Procurement plan shall be submitted prior to work start). All
equipment, materials, components etc. shall be suitable for the intended service.
• Any procurement of materials shall be ensured to be locally Saudi Arabian products, if
they meet the Design and Contract requirements. Products, not locally manufactured,
may be replaced by foreign products, subject to CEER approval.
• Contractor shall obtain CEER prior approval for his proposed vendor and the products.
Equipment/ material offered shall be field proven. Material requires specialized
maintenance or operation shall be avoided, as far as possible.
5) Site Engineers:
• Shall be responsible for the proper execution of the works and the strict observance of
all safety precautions required by STL project safety plan and where applicable the
manufacturer’s safety indication sheets.
• Will ensure that all the works are performed safely as per latest Approved drawings
& specifications.
• Has to coordinate and work with CEER to plan and schedule all field activities.
Schedule a kick-off meeting one week in advance prior to the execution.
• Organize resources to perform Installation construction activities as per project
specification, in compliance with quality, schedule & safety requirements.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
21
6) Health & Safety Engineers:
• Safety engineers ensure the well-being of people and property. These professionals
combine knowledge of an engineering discipline, as well as health or safety regulations
related to their discipline to keep work environments, building and people safe from
harm. The work of safety engineers helps their employer.
• Monitor and track safety systems by using computer systems and spreadsheets.
• Prepare future safety plans based on past experiences and facts, submitted to Client
engineer for approvals.
• Ensure that all safety regulation is well maintained and updated as per sire and CEER
requirements.
• Coordination of constriction activities.
• Provide health and safety measures in a working environment.
• Support staff with the identification of environmental aspects and determining the
project objectives and target.
• Evaluate the probable physical and chemical hazards and take essential steps to
minimize them.
• Ensure that any diverted routes and unserviceable are lighted and marked as per
regulations.
• Ensure that all operation is furnish, erect and maintain temporary closed markings and
associated lighting and markers as per civil regulations rules and specifications.
• Maintain constant communications with Traffic Control.
• Continuously inspect the markers and lights, to determine whether they are in
compliance with the instructions.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
22
• Ensure that all project vehicle and equipment are following the regulations from adding
the obstruction lights, yellow light (360deg) interruption together with flags attached
on the top of each vehicle.
• Coordinating all safety matters in the Operations Areas and near Imaginary Surfaces.
• Ensure that all operation area is completely marked and lighted with normal light and
(360Deg) obstruction lights, and lights shall be kept continuously in operation, during
all days between sunrise and sunset for the markers and between sunset and sunrise
for the lights.
• Ensure that all Contractor is controlling his people and operation from interrupt the any
other work and entering any restricted area.
• Keep the daily, weekly, and monthly coordination / Meetings with CEER
operation people to ensure the smooth construction and project.
7) MATERIAL CONTROL:
The site QC Inspector shall carry out the inspection of the materials when the material
arrives in the warehouse. The QC Inspector shall ensure that the material conforms to
the project specifications, Purchase order and relevant standards. The site QC Inspector
shall ensure all the relevant documentation is available and correct as per specifications
taking in consideration the following requirement and procedures...
• All required test and inspections, Manufacturer's Field Services, Manufacturer's
Technical Services.
• Retesting/Re-inspecting: Provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-
inspecting, for construction that replaced Works that failed to comply with the Contract
Documents.
• Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified
personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
23
• Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
• Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -
control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing
and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. A sequence plan of
activities for specific material’s application or works is required and will be submitted,
by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval.
• Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of
Contractor’s quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with
Contractor’s construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
• Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by
authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Employer.
• Conducted by a qualified third party CEER approved testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
24
IV. WORK PROCEDURES:

During execution, the following work procedures shall be observed:
- Receiving ...
- Handling…
- Storing…
- All materials & accessories must be unloaded at Project lay down area under
controlled conditions. Ensuring the safety of all workers and preventing any
damages to the equipment, materials & accessories.
- Ensure that All materials and equipment are handled in accordance with
project specification or manufacturer’s recommendations.
V. GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
- Approved and valid “Work Permit” shall be available at the working area.
- Ensure all the workers involved in the job shall accomplish the Client Safety
Orientation with their cards are permitted at the job site.
- Working clearance shall be maintained while working near the existing
electrical sources.
- Safety Tool Box Talk / Meeting shall be conducted by the construction supervisor
with participation of the field safety officer at site to discuss the job-related
hazards and its preventive measures based on the activity to be done.
- Route / Road access shall be well maintained compacted to prevent vehicle stuck
up or tilt in.
- First Aid Kit with certified First Aider shall be provided at site.
- All the employees shall be aware of plant evacuation plan, route and assembly points
inside the plant.
- Proper and well-maintained working area shall be considered during and after the work
execution to prevent occupational injuries and environmental impact to the
surrounding.
- Crane or Boom Truck to load and unload transformers to its Storage yard if the
foundation is not ready in order to be installed in its final location.
- Experienced personnel must operate the test equipment. Persons not involved

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
25
in the test or inspection are not allowed in the immediate area of the tested system,
only one person should be in charge and everyone else must follow his instructions.
- Ensure to implement all project safety precautions as per CEER requirements and as
mentioned in the safety officer scope.
- Submit a safety policy Plan signed by the Contractor’s head of company declaring that
occupational health and safety shall be given the highest practicable priority in all
aspects of the Contract and in the discharge of their Contractual obligations. It shall
also clearly state that the Contractor’s Representative shall be directly accountable in all
matters of safety at the Site.
- Submit an organization chart identifying all full-time safety personnel and all Site staff
with particular responsibilities for safety under the Contract and the S SSP. Chart shall
indicate seniority and show reporting lines. In particular, the direct relationship between
Safety Manager and Contractor’s Representative shall be clearly shown. A safety
responsibility statement for each position shown on the chart shall be appended to the
chart.
- Prepare a radio or other communication facilities necessary to enable Safety Manager

and the Contractor’s key staff to communicate efficiently and effectively on safety
matters with the Contractor’s personnel at all Site workplaces and with Engineer’s staff.
- Contractor shall ensure that specialist health and safety procedures proposed by sub-
Contractors of all levels will be reviewed and assimilated into the Contractor’s safety
plan.
- Submit an emergency procedure that detail the organization of rescue and dam age
limitation teams to deal with emergency situations on Site such as, but not limited to:
seismic activity, fire, loss of power, flooding, or the evacuation of a seriously injured
person from a remote or difficult Site location, etc. The emergency procedures shall
specify the equipment, its location and the frequency of practice drills. The Contractor
shall also detail how information on such services and arrangements will be made
known to those at work on the Site.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
26
- Arrangements for training the Contractor’s entire Site staff to enable them to p properly
undertake their health and safety responsibilities. The Contractor shall keep records of
such training for health and safety audit purposes. Upon completion of their training,
the Contractor’s Site staff shall sign a copy of their assigned safety responsibilities
statement which shall also be kept by the Contract or for audit purposes.
- Arrangements for the induction and job specific health and safety training of all workers
including those of sub-Contractors at all levels. The proposals shall include the
syllabus, frequency, and application of such training courses. Such training shall be
conducted by suitably qualified persons and repeated at intervals of six months.
- Arrangements for the induction and job specific health and safety training of all workers
including those of sub-Contractors at all levels. The proposals shall include the
syllabus, frequency, and application of such training courses. Such training shall be
conducted by suitably qualified persons and repeated at intervals of six months.
- Arrangements which allow the Contractor to positively identify each individua l who
has successfully completed safety training. Those who cannot be identified positively
shall not be allowed to work on Site.
- Arrangements to ensure that, at least once every week, all workers shall receive, and
participate in, a toolbox talk with their immediate supervisor. Records of this activity
shall be kept for audit purposes. The topic of these talks shall be decided at the Site
safety meeting. Guidance notes and advice on how to prese nt the talks shall be prepared
by the Contractor’s Safety Manager and issued to those giving the talk. The names of
those attending the toolbox talk shall be noted on the toolbox talk form and initialed by
all attending.
- Submit a Details of the quantity and specification of all necessary safe condition
monitoring equipment which shall include as a minimum, but is not be limited

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
27
to, sound level meters and appropriate gas monitors.
- Inspect, tested, and maintains for all project facilities such as scaffolds, guardrails,
working platforms, ladders and other means of access, lifting appliances, lighting,
signing and guarding equipment. Maintenance and calibration records for all of the
aforementioned equipment shall be kept for audit purposes. The Contractor shall ensure
that all the inspections and verifications are undertaken by qualified and competent
persons.
- Submit a detailed plan showing how we will attend the protection for authorized
visitors.
- Submit a detailed check list the proposed first aid provisions including medical
personnel and facilities appropriate to Site conditions. This shall include the provision
for on-Site clinic equipped with resuscitation equipment and trained medical officer/s,
fully equipped on-Site ambulance and other ancillary medical items.
- Details of how where and by whom auditable health and safety related records shall be
kept and maintained. In addition to these records, the Safety Manager should keep a
safety diary to record all safety-related activities and events on a daily basis. The diary
shall be made available to Engineer’s staff on request.
- Details of the Contractor’s arrangements for Site safety inspections to be conducted by

the Contractor’s Representative. These inspections shall take place at least weekly by
the Safety Manager and daily by the supporting safety staff. Reports of these inspections
shall include the actions taken to resolve problems or shortcomings discovered during
the inspection shall be made available for audit purposes.
- A comprehensive health and safety inspection checklist for the use of the Contractor’s
Site staff when inspecting the Site. The checklist shall indicate the standard to be
achieved on each particular aspect of health and safety and be com piled in such a way
that will allow the inspector to easily record actual finding
Critical substandard items shall be rectified on the spot and signed off as

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
28
such non-critical substandard items that are not rectified on the spot shall be brou ght to
the attention of the appropriate manager via the sign off portion of the c hecklist for
subsequent rectification. When completed the checklist shall be ke pt for audit purposes.
- Details of the Contractor’s internal safety audit scheme to be implemented reg arding
the safety management system and the physical Site conditions. The au dits shall be
performed, against the conditions specified in the SSSP at least ev ery three months.
The audit shall include the works of sub-Contractors of all le vels. The documentation
generated by the audit process, including score sheets
, shall be made available to Engineer for audit purposes.
- Detailed procedures covering all health and safety aspects of the Contract are included,
but not limited to, the following list when applicable. The Contractor is advised that, in
order to facilitate efficient document and standards review, they shall consult with
Engineer’s safety staff and use Engineer’s construction health and safety manual for
guidance and assistance when formulating these procedures for inclusion in the SSSP.
- The Contractor shall establish site safety meetings chaired by the Contractor’s
Representative. Attendance shall include the Contractor’s Safety Manager and
appropriate senior construction personnel. Attendance shall also include senior
representatives of each of the currently active sub-Contractors. These meetings shall be
held at least once each month and be scheduled to precede Engineer’s safety
management committee meeting. All such meetings and the agenda shall l be notified
in advance to Engineer who may attend in person or send a representative at their
discretion. Minutes of meetings shall be kept for audit purpose s and forwarded to
Engineer for discussion.
- Engineer shall establish a safety management committee to formally review the safety
management performance of the Contractor and to monitor the implementation and
sufficiency of the safety plan. Engineer, or their nominee, shall ac t as chairman of this
committee with members of Engineer’s staff attending as

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
29
appropriate. Mandatory attendance from the Contractor shall include the Contractor’s
Representative, the Safety Manager, and key staff as appropriate. Representatives from
third parties, including statutory bodies, may be invited as necessary by Engineer. The
committee shall meet at least once per month. The Contractor shall act without delay
upon such decisions or recommendations as may be made by the committee on matters
of health and safety.
- THE FOLLOWING MONITORING ARRANGEMENTS MUST BE

IMPLEMENTED AND ADHERED TO BY THE CONTRACTOR:
-
Monitoring Arrangement Frequency Objective
Contractor’s site inspections (Jointly with the Weekly Physical review of Site conditions and
Engineer) application of approved method
statements.
HSE Risk Review Meeting Monthly To review recent past performance for
(Jointly with the Engineer and success or failure and where necessary to
Contractor) adapt procedures. To plan for future
activities and prepare for known risk
Safety Manager’s inspection and report Daily elements.
To review compliance with: Statutory
(Jointly with the Engineer) requirements; HSE plan; Method
statements; and Training requirements
Environmental Noise & Dust Monitoring While works are ongoing as Compliance with Saudi Arabia legislation
needed or international standards (OSHA)
Health, Safety Environment and Security Monthly To validate compliance by Contractor
Procedures Audit (Jointly with Engineer and with Engineer’s KPI’s.
Contractor)
Contractor Risk Assessment and Safe Before each trade commences on Site Ensure Contractor is proposing to use safe
Systems of Work review or new work areas within the Site. working procedures prior to implementation
and/or to verify work areas are set up for
Works to commence.
obligations. To clarify site HSE organization and
arrangements.
Accident Analysis Monthly To ensure Contractor identifies trends in performance or
system failures in order to take corrective action.
Fire and Emergency Audit Quarterly To validate the Fire and Emergency plan
Labor Office Injury and Disease Quarterly Statutory requirement.

report
Sub-Contractor Pre-start meeting Before each trade commences on To ensure Sub-Contractors
Site. understand their Contractual and
statutory HSE

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
30

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
31
I. Staff organization Chart:

P.O. Box: 571, Riyadh 11391, KSA Phone:
+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
32
II. Man Power Histogram

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
33
III. MANPOWER STAFF LIST

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
34
IV. MANPOWER DEPLOYMENT LIST

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
35
V. PROJECT SCHEDULE

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
36

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
37

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
38
VI. Projects milestones & constrains

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
39
1- SCOPE OF MEP WORKS
This Scope of Works must be read in conjunction with the Drawings and the BOQ. For pricing,
drawings have
precedence to all other documents. Study the drawings in detail and make sure that you can
construct the
intended components as per the drawings.
The Bill of Quantities (BOQ) is intended to help to expedite the pricing of the construction
nevertheless the tenderer is responsible for meeting the drawings intentions.
Works to be completed
1. General (Workshops 1 to 4)
1.1. Demolishing Works (Refer to Demolishing Drawing 2.2.1)
• Windows as specified in the drawings on the admin buildings on the internal side will be closed
• Window on the first floor for the open office will be opened on the existing shell of the
workshop
• Access Doors as specified in the drawings linking buildings 3 & 4
• Remove walls on the parking area between the buildings (4 locations)
• Make necessary changes on the pavements to ensure smooth movements
1.2. General Areas
• Flooring material epoxy – anti scratch as indicated in the drawings

• Lights, switches, plugs, air-condition, and firefighting as per specific drawings
• CCTV around the premises as per specific drawing
• All gates and doors according to specific drawings
• Steel staircases for administration buildings second floor and observation desk to be designed
and priced by the contractor. Design to be approved by the Engineer
• Finishing works second floor offices, standard as existing 1st floor. Walls to be masonry as first
floor and roof as sandwich panels

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
40
2. Workshop - 1
2.1. Additional Toilet Block
All toilets will be constructed by mean of cement board, finishing, fixtures, plumbing, electrical as
per the drawings
2.2. Different Laboratories/Production Rooms
All production areas will be constructed by sandwich panel's walls, ceiling, and flooring will be of
epoxy of anti-scratch as indicated in the drawings. All necessary MEP systems, see the drawings
2.2.1. LV LAB CAR
• Room size: 18 x 14.9 x 4 m

• Wall material: sandwich panel
• Roof material: sandwich panel
• Doors as specified in the drawings
• Windows as specified in the drawings
2.2.2. THERMAL SYSTEM TEST BENCH
• Room size: 20 x 5 x 4 m

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
41
2.3. HV LAB CONTROL ROOM
2.2.4. HV HIL TEST BED
• Room size: 4.95 x 18 x 6 m

2.2.5. BATTERY CLIMATIC CHAMBER
• Room size: 4.9 x 18 x 6 m

2.2.6. CLIMATIC AWD VEHICLE TEST BED
• Room size: 9.95 x 17.95 x 6 m


+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
42

2.2.7. 24 CHANNEL ROAD SIMULATOR
• Room size: 20 x 19.5 x 8 m; South wall only 3 m high

• Excavation works
• Roller Shutter: H - 3 m, L - 4 m
2.2.8. MAST
• Room size: 20 x 7.5 x 8 m; North wall only 3m high

2.2.9. MULTI PURPOSE TEST RIG (CHS, D&C)
• Room size: 20 x 22.835 x 6 m


+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
43
2.2.10. COMPRESSOR ROOM
2.2.11. CHARGING LAB
2.2.12. IT

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
44
2.2.13. PASSIVE SAFETY AND STORAGE ROOM
2.2.14. NVH TEST ROOM COMPONENT TEST
• Room size: 18.5 x 12 x 4 m

2.2.15. NVH DESKTOP SIMULATOR
• Room size: a x b x c
2.2.16. MATERIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL LAB

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
45

• Lights, switches, plugs, air-condition, and firefighting as per specific drawings.
3. Workshop - 2
3.1. Open Area (North)

3.1.1. Additional Toilet Block
All toilets will be constructed by mean of cement board, finishing, fixtures, plumbing, electrical as per
the drawings.
3.1.2. IT
3.1.3. OPEN AREA

• Lights, switches, plugs, Desert Cooling, and firefighting as per specific drawings
3.2. Different laboratories/Production Rooms

3.2.1. DIMENSIONAL ASSESSMENT
• Room size: 14 x 15.305 x 4 m

• Roller Shutter

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
46

3.2.2. CLAY CUTTING MACHINE
3.2.3. TOOL ROOM
• Room size: a x b x c
• Wall material: Bottom have single steel skin, top half wire mesh
• Flooring material epoxy – anti scratch as indicated in the drawings.
• Roller Shutter:
3.2.4. FIXTURE STORE
• Room size: 12.5 x 5 m
• Wall material: Bottom have single steel skin, top half wire mesh
• Flooring material epoxy – anti scratch as indicated in the drawings.
3.2.5. PAINT AREA (will be delivered by third party, tie-in points for utilities are the responsibility of
the contractor)
• Room size: 16 x11.8 m

3.2.6. RAW MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES
• Room size: 12.6 x 5 m


+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
47
• Lights, switches, plugs, air condition and firefighting as per specific drawings
3.3. Different Storage Areas

3.3.1. TOOL STORES
• Room size: 6,125 x 8,25 x 4

• Lights, switches, plugs, air condition and firefighting as per specific drawings
4. Workshop -3

All toilets will be constructed by mean of cement board, finishing, fixtures, plumbing, electrical as per
the drawings.

All production areas will be constructed by sandwich panel's walls, ceiling, and flooring will be of
epoxy of anti-scratch as indicated in the drawings. All necessary MEP systems, see the drawings
4.2.1. TYRE ASSY

• Room size: 10 x 10 m

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
48
4.2.3. MULY ZONE
• Room size: not specified

• 5 x in-ground-2-poster-ramps
• 1 x 4-poster-ramp
4.2.4. EE ROOM
• Room size: 10.125 x 8.25 x 4 m

4.2.5. CHARGING ZONE 1
• Room size: Not specified

4.2.6. IT

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
49

4.2.7. CHARGING ZONE 2
• Room size: Not specified

4.2.8. AW RAW MATERIAL
• Room size: 12 x 7.125 x 8 m

4.2.9. HV CONNECTION AND COMMISSION
• Room size: 18,5 x 24.145 x 6 m

4.2.10. BATTERY ASSEMBLY ROOM
• Room size: 40.6 x 16.125 x 6 m + 13.4 x 5.275 x 6 m


+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
50

• Roller Shutter: H - 3 m, L - 4 m. Plus emergency shutter through the façade: H - 3 m, L - 4 m
4.2.11. ADDITIVE MFG
• Room size: 37 x 12.925 x 8 m + 18.795 x 5.4 x 8 m

• Lights, switches, plugs, air-condition and firefighting as per specific drawings, full climate
• Controlled
5. Workshop -4
All toilets will be constructed by mean of cement board, finishing, fixtures, plumbing, electrical
as per the drawings.
• All production areas will be constructed by sandwich panel's walls, ceiling, and flooring will be of
epoxy of
• anti-scratch as Indicated in the drawings. All necessary MEP systems, see the drawings

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
51

5.2.2. PRODUCTION HALL – FACTORY
• Room size: See drawings

• Flooring material epoxy – anti scratch as indicated in the drawings. Setting out of lines in
• different colors as instructed by the Engineer.
• Roller Shutter:
5.2.3. CAR STORAGE
• Room size: As per drawings (Minimum 26 Cars)

• Bottoms have single steel skin, top half wire mesh to the South.
5.2.4. OFFICES
• Room size: 10.5 x 14.259 x 4 m

• IT Cabinet, South-West corner of the offices
5.2.5. MANAGER OFFICE

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
52

5.2.6. MEETING ROOM
• Lights, switches, plugs, air condition, and firefighting as per specific drawings
5.2.7. MAIN STORE
• Room size: As per drawings

• Lights, switches and plugs, air condition and firefighting as per specific drawings
• 6. Landscaping
• 6.1. Test Road
For the Prototype Workshop, we request you to define a solution and quote a proposal for a
suitable shake down track build & commissioning along the side of the Prototype Shop where the
quality and performance of a vehicle can be tested once the vehicles are fully commissioned. This
track is required for early identification and containment of build issues as well as system
performance.

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
53
Total length of test surface -100 m

Track 60% surface area cover: Asphalt surface with > 0.85 mu (Coefficient of Friction)
CCTV Camera: 2 (Two)
Automatic check post quantity with wide: 1 / 3 m wide stopper
Walkie-Talkie: 2 (Radio Based)
Test Track Surface Description
S. No Track Description Track Picture Specification

Concrete/Asph
1 Heave Track alt Length -
10 m Width -
2.5 m
Continues Sine

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
54
2 Twist Track Concrete/Asph

alt Length -
10 m Width -
2.5 m
Alternate sine
3 Gradient Track Gradient 20% (11.98
deg)
Concrete/Aspha
lt
4 Cobblestone Track
Irregular shape of cobble
stone Length - 10 m
Width - 2.5 m
Irregular shape of
5 Belgium Pave
Belgium rectangular
black bricks
50mm
6 /7 Steel Round Cleats Length -
20mm
10 m
Fastened on surface Width -
of Asphalt Road 2.5 m
t
t
t
t

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
55
6.2. Car Parking

Street line marking as indicated on Drawings.
6.3. Guard Houses
To be refurbished as necessary, CCTV and Fire panels as indicated in the drawings for firefighting and
CCTV systems.
6.4. To provide banner to the existing external fence as visual protection to the facility, the outside
pedestrian cannot see
through the banner such as Sunny Glade 6 feet x 50 feet Privacy Screen Fence Heavy Duty Fencing Mesh
Shade Net Cover for Wall Garden Yard Backyard
2- RESPONSIBILITIES: -
2.1 Project Manager:

Has the overall authority and responsibility for all aspects of the project and shall be responsible for the overall
implementation of this work procedure hand in hand with the contractor’s Safety and Quality Procedures.
2.2 The QC department:

Shall be responsible for conducting surveillance and all inspection activities defined herein and efficient recording of the
results as required.
2.3 The site QC Inspector:

Shall carry out the planned inspections; surveillance and release hold points by signing various quality records as proof of
inspection conforming to specifications. The site QC Inspector shall accompany the RC representative to carry out routine
inspections and release hold points by signing and obtaining the RC representative approval signatures on the various
Quality Records as proof of inspection conforming to specifications. The site QC Inspector shall ensure that all other
discipline activities that require inspection within the MEP construction program have been inspected and approved.

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
56
2.4 Procurement and Logistic:
Shall be systematic coordination of all aspects of the procurement process including bids, price negotiations, assuring proper
quantities and specifications, shipping and delivery. The goal is to obtain materials, services or products at the best possible
cost which meet the needs and time constraints of the organization.
2.5 Site Engineers:
Shall be responsible for the proper execution of the works and the strict observance of all safety precautions required by
project safety plan and where applicable the manufacturer’s safety indication sheets.
Will ensure that all the works are performed safely as per latest Approved drawings
& Specifications.
Has to coordinate and work with RC to plan and schedule all field activities.
Schedule a kick-off meeting one week in advance prior to the execution.
Organize resources to perform Installation construction activities as per project specification, in compliance with quality,
schedule & safety requirements.
2.6 Health & Safety Engineers:
Safety engineers ensure the well-being of people and property. These professionals combine knowledge of an engineering
discipline, as well as health or safety regulations related to their discipline to keep work environments, building and people
safe from harm. The work of safety engineers helps their employer.
Monitor and track safety systems by using computer systems and spreadsheets.
Prepare future safety plans based on past experiences and facts.
Provide health and safety measures in a working environment.
Support staff with the identification of environmental aspects and determining the project objectives and target.
Evaluate the probable physical and chemical hazards and take essential steps to minimize them.
3- MATERIAL CONTROL:
The site QC Inspector shall carry out the inspection of the materials when the material arrives in the warehouse.
The QC Inspector shall ensure that the material conforms to the project specifications, Purchase order and
relevant standards. The site QC Inspector shall ensure all the relevant documentation is available and correct as
per specifications.
4- WORK PROCEDURES:
• During execution, the following work procedures shall be observed:
• Receiving ...
• Handling…
• Storing…
• All materials & accessories must be unloaded at Project lay down area under controlled conditions.
Ensuring the safety of all workers and preventing any damages to the equipment, materials & accessories.

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
57
• Ensure that all materials and equipment are handled in accordance with project specification or
manufacturer’s recommendations.
5- GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
• Approved and valid “Work Permit” shall be available at the working area.
• Ensure all the workers involved in the job shall accomplish the Client Safety Orientation with
their cards are permitted at the job site.
• Working clearance shall be maintained while working near the existing electrical sources.
• Safety Tool Box Talk / Meeting shall be conducted by the construction supervisor with
participation of the field safety officer at site to discuss the job-related hazards and its
preventive measures based on the activity to be done.
• Route / Road access shall be well maintained compacted to prevent vehicle stuck up or tilt in.
• First Aid Kit with certified First Aider shall be provided at site.
• All the employees shall be aware of plant evacuation plan, route and assembly points inside the plant.
• Proper and well-maintained working area shall be considered during and after the work execution to
prevent occupational injuries and environmental impact to the surrounding.
• Crane or Boom Truck to load and Unload transformers to its Storage yard if the foundation is not ready in
order to be installed in its final location.
• Experienced personnel must operate the test equipment. Persons not involved in the test or inspection are not
allowed in the immediate area of the tested system. Only one person should be in charge and everyone else must
follow his/her instructions.
6- MEP ACTIVITY LIST
This covers all the MEP activities in detail, describing 1st 2nd & final fix. Each activity has been given an individual
code number.
This code number can be used as a basic reference code while preparing the MEP Program. The first two digit of activity
code is representing the system:
KY : Project Milestones
PL : Plumbing System
FF : Fire Fighting System
AC : HVAC System
EL : Electrical System

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
58
Each service has separate activity lists i.e., plumbing, firefighting, electrical, HVAC.
In the last column you will find the relevant method statement reference no. for the particular activity.
Refer these method statements to know more detail about the activity installation procedures, quality
of work, safety requirement implementation and resources (material, equipment & personnel).
PROJECT MILESTONES REQUIREMENTS
Type Code Description
KY-01 Temporary Power Availability
KY-02 Drainage Connection
KY-03 Water Availability
KY-04 Civil Defense Inspection
KY-05 Authority Inspection (Electrical)
KY-06 Permanent Power Availability

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
59
PLUMBING SYSTEM
Underground PL-01 Underground Piping

Embedded in PL-02 Putting sleeves in concrete slab
Concrete PL-03 Embedded pipe in concrete slab
PL-04 Cutting & chasing in block walls
1st Fix
PL-05 Putting Pipes (water supply I drainage) in block walls
PL-06 Horizontal Drainage Piping
PL-07 Horizontal Water Supply Piping
PL-08 Drainage Pipe Water Leakage Testing
PL-09 Water Supply Water Leakage Testing
PL-10 Vertical (Riser) Drainage Piping
2nd Fix PL-11 Vertical (Riser) Water Supply Piping
PL-12 Floor Drain (Trap) Fixing
PL-13 Water Heater Installation
PL-14 Water Transfer Pump Installation & Piping
PL-15 Water Booster Pump Installation & Piping
PL-16 Erection of Water Tank & Connections
PL-17 Sanitary Ware Installation
Final Fix PL-18 Sanitary Fixture Fixing
PL-19 Water Meter Fixing
PL-20 Pre commission water transfer & Booster pumps
PL-21 Pre commission floor water heaters
Testing & Pre- PL-22 Water Tank fill-up
Commissioning
PL-23 Flushing & checking leaks in WS pipes
PL-24 Flushing & checking leaks in drainage pipes
PL-25 Simultaneous flow test on drainage risers
PL-26 Test and commission water transfer & booster pumps
Commissioning PL-27 Commissioning water supply PRV's
& Handover PL-28 Commissioning floor water heaters

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
60
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

1st Fix FF-01 Fire Fighting Hangers & Supports
FF-02 Fire Fighting Piping
FF-03 Fire Fighting Pipe Riser

2nd Fix
FF-04 Fire Fighting Pipe Testing
FF-05 Fire Fighting Accessories Fixing
FF-07 Fire Pump Set Pipe Connections

FF-08 Sprinkler Fixing
Final Fix FF-09 Fire Hose Cabinet Fixing
FF-10 Fire Hose Reel Fixing
FF-11 Fire Extinguisher Fixing

FF-12 Fire Blanket Fixing
Testing & FF-13 Pressurize Fire Fighting pipes

Pre-
Commissionin FF-14 Flushing & Refilling of Fire Fighting Pipes
g
FF-15 Commissioning Fire Fighting PRV's
Commissioning
& Handover FF-16 Commissioning of FHC's
FF-17 Commissioning of Sprinklers

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
61
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC)

AC-01 Duct hangers & supports
1st Fix
AC-02 Equipment’s Hangers & Supports
AC-03 Ducting Supply, return, Fresh & Exhaust
2nd Fix AC-04 Volume, Fire & Smoke Damper Fixing
AC-05 Duct Risers
AC-06 Duct Insulation
AC-07 Dessert cooler Installation
AC-08 Pipe Insulation
AC-09 Package unit installation
AC-10 Dessert Cooler unit Installation
AC-11 FCU & split unit Installation
AC-12 Duct Connection to FCU
AC-13 Pipe Connection to FCU
AC-14 Bends, Droppers & Mouth Piece
AC-16 Smoke fans Installation
AC-17 Exhaust Fan Installation
AC-18 Toilets Exhaust Fan Fixing
Final Fix AC-19 Ceiling Diffuser Fixing
AC-20 Grille & Linear Fixing
AC-21 Thermostat Fixing
AC-22 Pre- c o m m i s s i o n i n g FCU’s
AC-23 Cleaning of all filters
AC-24 Pre-commissioning pressurization fans
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC Cont...)

AC-25 Prelim. Adjusting and balancing of valves
AC-26 Test and commission Dessert cooler's
AC-27 Test and commission floor FCU's
AC-28 FCU air balancing
AC-29 Air balancing supply & return grilles

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
62
AC-30 Balancing air from pressurization fans

AC-31 Air balancing of FCU's
AC-32 Main System Valves adjustment
AC-33 Test and commission Split unit’s
AC-34 Test and commission Dessert cooler's
AC-35 Test and commission floor FCU's
Commissioning AC-36 FCU air balancing
& Handover AC-37 Air balancing supply & return grilles
AC-38 Balancing air from package units
AC-39 Main System Valves adjustment
MECHANICAL FLOOR I ROOF ACTIVITIES
Sr. No. Activity Description
1 Dessert coolers Installation
2 FCU's Installation
3 Package unit installation
4 Split unit installation
5 Smoke extract Fan Installation
6 Exhaust Fan Installation
7 MCC Installation
8 Pump Installation
9 Water Tank Installation

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
63
LIST OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES ELECTRICAL
Circuit continuity test by bus riser
2 Continuity test LV wiring
3 Insulation resistance test (cabling)
4 Pre-commissioning ELV fixtures
5 Final test and commissioning bus risers
Test and commission variable frequency drive

6
7 Lighting protection earth resistance test
8 Floor MOB, SMOB, MCC panel commissioning
9 Test and commission light fixtures
10 Test and commission ELV final fixtures

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
64
LIST OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES

PLUMBING
1 Pre-commission submersible pumps
2 Pre-commission floor water heaters
3 Water Tank fillip
4 Flushing & checking leaks in WS pipes

Flushing & checking leaks in drainage pipes
5
6 Simultaneous flow test on drainage risers
7 Test and commission water submersible pumps
8 Commissioning water supply PRV’s
9 Commissioning floor water heaters
10 Commissioning of sanitary ware
LIST OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES FIRE

FIGHTING
1 Pressurize Fire Fighting pipes
2 Flushing & Refilling of Fire Fighting Pipes
3 Commissioning of Fire Fighting PRV's
4 Commissioning of Fire Fighting Pump's
5 Commissioning of FHC's
6 Commissioning of Sprinklers

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
65
LIST OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES HVAC

1 Pre- c o m m i s s i o n i n g FCU's
2 Pre- c o m m i s s i o n i n g Dessert Cooler's
3 Pre-commissioning Exhaust fans

4 Prelim. Adjusting and balancing of valves
5 Test and commission FCU's
6 Test and commission Dessert Cooler's
7 Test and commission Smoke Extract & Exhaust fans

8 Test and commission Exhaust fans 's
9 Test and commission Package Unit's

10 FCU's air balancing
11 Toilet exhaust air balancing
12 Air balancing supply & return grilles
13 Main System Valves adjustment

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
66
7- MEP ACTIVITY FLOW DIAGRAM
The main concept of develop the activity flow diagram to highlight the sequence of MEP activities installation in
multistory buildings & towers. This flow diagram is very useful while preparing construction schedule.
The activity flow diagram deals only to get the idea of MEP activity overall system. For more detail i.e., MEP
interface with civil activity and production rate refer the relevant section.
The flow diagram includes all drawing & material submittal and approval as well as material procurement and
delivery sequence.
Third party involvement i.e., authority requirement, inspection and approval also include in the flow diagram.
List of Figures:
Figure 3-1 HVAC Activity Flow Diagram
Figure 3-2 Electrical Activity Flow Diagram
Figure 3-3 Plumbing Activity Flow Diagram
Figure 3-4 Fire Fighting Activity Flow

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
67

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
68

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
69

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
70

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
71
8- MEP AND CIVIL INTERFACE – GRAPHICAL
For better project monitoring and control it's very necessary to prepare the detailed program.
To prepare the construction program without detailed MEP activity is not a good practice
because lots of or we can say all civil finishing activities are directly related to MEP activities.
For example, without completing the high-level piping & equipment installation civil contractor
can't start their false ceiling work.
By the help of MEP and civil interface chart planning engineer can prepare the detailed
integrated construction program in the initial stage for easy monitoring and controlling the
project. Each service has separate chart and in the graphical mode for easy understanding.
This covers all MEP activity linked with the other civil activities, their relationship and their
sequences in an engineering detailed manner. By the help of this activity relationship, we
can prepare more realistic construction program and track progress easily.
The MEP and civil interface chart have been made after several discussions with HEE
Professional staff and the MEP sub-contractors.

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
72

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
73

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
74
9- MEP AND CIVIL INTERFACE – TABULAR
For better project monitoring and control it's very necessary to prepare the detailed program. To prepare the
construction program without detailed MEP activity is not a good practice because lots of or we can say all civil
finishing activities are directly related to MEP activities. For example, without completing the high-level piping &
equipment installation civil contractor can't start their false ceiling work.
By the help of MEP and civil interface chart planning engineer can prepare the detailed integrated construction
program in the initial stage for easy monitoring and controlling the project. Each service has separate chart and in
the graphical mode for easy understanding.
This covers all MEP activity linked with the other civil activities, their relationship and their sequences in an
engineering detailed manner. By the help of this activity relationship, we can prepare more realistic construction
program and track progress easily.
The MEP and civil interface chart have been made after several discussions with HEE Professional staff and the
MEP sub-contractors.
Typical Program Relationships - MEP WORK
Predecessors Successors
Lag Main Activity Lag
Activity Link Link Activity
Min. Avg. Max. Min. Avg. Max.
KEY ACTIVITIES
Circuit Continuity Test FS 0 0 0 Temporary Power Availability FS 0 0 0 Testing & Pre-Commissioning
Sanitary Fixture Fixing FS 0 0 0 Drainage Connection FS 0 0 0 Testing & Pre-Commissioning
Sanitary Fixture Fixing FS 0 0 0 Water Availability FS 0 0 0 Testing & Pre-Commissioning
Testing & Pre-Commissioning FS 0 0 0 Civil Defense Inspection FS 0 0 0 Handover of MEP Works
Bus bar Installation FS 0 0 0 Authority Inspection (Electrical) FS 14 21 30 Permanent Power Availability
FS 0 0 0 Permanent Power Availability FS 0 0 0 Commissioning & Hand Over
PLUMBING
Backfilling FS 0 0 0 Underground Piping FS 0 0 0 Grade Slab
Verticals SS 1 2 4 Putting sleeves in concrete FF 1 2 3 Beams & Slab
Verticals SS 1 2 4 Embedded pipe in concrete FF 1 2 3 Beams & Slab
Bock walls SS 2 3 4 Cutting & chasing in block walls SS 1 1 1 Putting Pipes (water supply / drainage) in block walls
Cutting & chasing in block walls SS 1 1 1 Putting Pipes (water supply / drainage) in block walls FF 1 2 3 Plaster
Beams & Slab FS 14 18 21

Horizontal Drainage Piping FS 0 0 0 Drainage Pipe Water Leakage Testing
Block Wall SS 2 4 FS
Beams & Slab FS 14 18 21

Horizontal Water Supply Piping FS 0 0 0 Water Supply Water Leakage Testing
Horizontal Drainage Piping FS 0 0 0 Drainage Pipe Water Leakage Testing FS 0 0 0 False Ceiling Grid Works
Horizontal Water Supply Piping FS 0 0 0 Water Supply Water Leakage Testing FS 0 0 0 False Ceiling Grid Works
Temporary Closing of Shaft from Top FS 0 0 0 Vertical (Riser) Drainage Piping FS 0 0 0 Closing of Shaft
Temporary Closing of Shaft from Top FS 0 0 0 Vertical (Riser) Water Supply Piping FS 0 0 0 Closing of Shaft
Floor Screed SS 2 4 FS Floor Drain (Trap) Fixing FF 1 2 4 Floor Tiling
Wall Tiling FS 0 0 0 Water Heater Installation FF 1 1 2 False Ceiling Grid Works

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
75
Wall Tiling FS 0 0 0 Shower Tray Installation FF 1 2 2 Doors & Ironmongery
Sewage Lift Pump Installation & Piping FS 0 0 0 Water submersible Pump Installation & Piping FS 0 0 0 Water Booster Pump Installation & Piping
Water Transfer Pump Installation & Piping FS 0 0 0 Water submersible Pump Installation & Piping FS 0 0 0 Erection of Water Tank & Connections
Water Booster Pump Installation & Piping FS 0 0 0 Erection of Water Tank & Connections FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Floor Tiling SS 2 3 FS Sanitary Ware Installation SS 0 1 1 Sanitary Fixture Fixing
Sanitary Ware Installation SS 0 1 1 Sanitary Fixture Fixing FF 1 2 2 Doors & Ironmongery
Doors & Ironmongery FS 0 0 0 Water Meter Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
As Mentioned above FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning FS 0 0 0 Final Testing & Commissioning
Preliminary Testing & Commissioning FS 0 0 0 Final Testing & Commissioning FS 0 0 0 Handover of MEP Works
Final Testing & Commissioning FS 0 0 0 Handover of MEP Works
FIRE FIGHTING
Beams & Slab FS 14 18 21 Fire Fighting Hangers & Supports FS 0 0 0 Fire Fighting Piping
Fire Fighting Hangers & Supports FS 0 0 0 FS 0 0 0 Fire Fighting Pipe Testing

Fire Fighting Piping
Temporary Closing of Shaft from Top FS 0 0 0 Fire Fighting Pipe Riser FS 0 0 0 Closing of Shaft
Fire Fighting Piping FS 0 0 0 Fire Fighting Pipe Testing FS 0 0 0 False Ceiling Grid Works
Fire Fighting Pipe Testing FS 0 0 0 Fire Fighting Accessories Fixing FS 0 0 0 Sprinkler Fixing
Fire Fighting Piping (Last Floor) FS 0 0 0 Fire Pump Set Installation FS 0 0 0 Fire Pump Set Pipe Connections
Fire Pump Set Installation FS 0 0 0 Fire Pump Set Pipe Connections FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
False Ceiling SS 2 4 FS Sprinkler Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Doors & Ironmongery FS 0 0 0 Fire Hose Cabinet Fixing FS 0 0 0 Fire Hose Reel Fixing
Fire Hose Cabinet Fixing FS 0 0 0 Fire Hose Reel Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Paint Final Coat FS 0 0 0 Fire Extinguisher Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Paint Final Coat FS 0 0 0 Fire Blanket Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Main Activity
Lag Lag
HVAC
Beams & Slab FS 14 18 21 Duct hangers & supports FS 0 0 0 Ducting Supply, return, Fresh & Exhaust
Beams & Slab FS 14 18 21 Pipe Hangers & Supports FS 0 0 0 Piping
Duct hangers & supports FS 0 0 0 Ducting Supply, return, Fresh & Exhaust FF 1 2 2 Volume, Fire & Smoke Damper Fixing
Ducting Supply, return, Fresh & Exhaust FF 1 2 2 Volume, Fire & Smoke Damper Fixing FF 1 2 2 Duct Insulation
Temporary Closing of Shaft from Top FS 0 0 0 Duct Risers FS 0 0 0 Closing of Shaft
Volume, Fire & Smoke Damper Fixing FF 0 0 0 Duct Insulation FS 0 0 0 FCU Installation
pipe Insulation FS 0 0 0 FCU Installation FF 1 1 2 False Ceiling Grid Works
False Ceiling Grid Works FS 0 0 0 Bends, Droppers & Mouth Piece FS 0 0 0 MEP Clearance for False Ceiling Closure
Bends, Droppers & Mouth Piece FS 0 0 0 MEP Clearance for False Ceiling Closure FS 0 0 0 False Ceiling Work
Smoke extract Fan Installation FS 0 0 0 Exhaust Fan Installation FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
76
FCU Installation FS 0 0 0 Expansion Tank & Pressure Unit Installation FS 0 0 0 Package unit installation
Doors & Ironmongery FS 0 0 0 Exhaust Fan Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Bends, Droppers & Mouth Piece FS 0 0 0 Ceiling Diffuser Fixing FS 0 0 0 Grille & Linear Fixing
Ceiling Diffuser Fixing FS 0 0 0 Grille & Linear Fixing FS 0 0 0 Thermostat Fixing
Grille & Linear Fixing FS 0 0 0 Thermostat Fixing FS 0 0 0 Preliminary Testing & Commissioning
Main Activity
Lag Lag
ELECTRICAL
Verticals SS 1 2 4 Embedded Conduits in Concrete FS 0 0 0 Grade Slab
Block Wall SS 2 3 4 Marking on Block walls SS 1 2 2 Cutting & chasing in block walls
Marking on Block walls SS 1 2 2 Cutting & chasing in block walls SS 1 2 2 Fix Conduits, GI Boxes in Block Walls
Cutting & chasing in block walls SS 1 2 2 Fix Conduits, GI Boxes in Block Walls FF 1 2 2 Plaster
Plaster FS 0 0 0 G.I. & PVC Surface Conduiting FF 2 4 4 False Ceiling Work
Cutting & chasing in block walls SS 1 2 3 Installation of Distribution Boards SS 1 2 2 Installation of Sub-Main Boards
Installation of Distribution Boards SS 1 2 2 Installation of Sub-Main Boards FF 1 2 2 Plaster
Paint Initial Coat FS 0 0 0 Installation of Main LV Panel FF 0 0 0 Doors & Ironmongery
Block Wall SS 4 6 FS Erect Cable Trays FF 0 1 1 Plaster
Plaster FS 0 0 0 Cable Trucking FS 0 0 0 Earthing System
Cable Trucking FS 0 0 0 Earthing System FS 0 0 0 LV Cabling
Earthing System FS 0 0 0 LV Cabling FS 0 0 0 ELV Cabling
LV Cabling FS 0 0 0 ELV Cabling FS 0 0 0 Main LV Cable Termination
ELV Cabling FS 0 0 0 Main LV Cable Termination FS 0 0 0 Sub main Cable Termination
Main LV Cable Termination FS 0 0 0 Sub main Cable Termination FS 0 0 0 Wiring for Lighting & Small Power
Sub main Cable Termination FS 0 0 0 Wiring for Lighting & Small Power FS 0 0 0 Wiring for ELV System
Wiring for Lighting & Small Power FS 0 0 0 Wiring for ELV System FS 0 0 0 Wiring for Fire Fighting System
Wiring for ELV System FS 0 0 0 Wiring for Fire Fighting System FS 0 0 0 Circuit Continuity Test
Wiring for Fire Fighting System FS 0 0 0 Circuit Continuity Test FS 0 0 0 Ceiling Rose & Flexible Drops
Circuit Continuity Test FS 0 0 0 Ceiling Rose & Flexible Drops FF 3 4 6 False Ceiling Work
Ceiling Rose & Flexible Drops FS 0 0 0 Distribution Boards Dressing FF 0 1 1 Paint Final Coat

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
77
LV Cabling (Last Floor) FS 0 0 0 Bus bar Installation SS 0 0 0 Lightning Protection System
Bus bar Installation SS 0 0 0 Lightning Protection System FS 0 0 0 Transformer Installation
Lightning Protection System FS 0 0 0 Transformer Installation FS 0 0 0 Generator Installation
Transformer Installation FS 0 0 0 Generator Installation FS 0 0 0 ATS Panel Installation
Generator Installation FS 0 0 0 ATS Panel Installation FS 0 0 0 LV Cabling from Transformer to LV Panel
ATS Panel Installation FS 0 0 0 LV Cabling from Transformer to LV Panel FF 1 2 2 Paint Final Coat
Doors & Ironmongery FS 0 0 0 Fixing Fire Alarm & Light Fittings FS 0 0 0 Fixing Switches, Sockets & Accessories
Fixing Fire Alarm & Light Fittings FS 0 0 0 Fixing Switches, Sockets & Accessories FF 1 2 2 Paint Final Coat
10- MEP ACTIVITY PRODUCTION RATE

The production rate should be the planned average daily production rate based on available resource and the
environment within which the work will be performed. The production rate includes not only the productive time
associated with a particular activity but also idle and non-productive time associated with the movement and setup
of equipment, break times, expected equipment downtime for maintenance and repair, and other expected
downtime. When estimating a production rate, resource availability and other factors affecting productive need to
be considered.
This section covers the manpower requirement to complete each activity and the time required to complete. This
production rate has been prepared by MEP Planning Engineer after detailed discussion with professional MEP
contractors. This will help Planning Engineer to calculate the activity durations in a professional manner.
The production rate given in this section, on the other hand, is not a constant and can be affected by a number of
factors both within and beyond the contractor's control

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
78
PRODUCTION RATE FOR MEP ACTIVITY MECHANICAL

Manpower Requirement Per Group Total
Qty./day Qty./hr
Description Unit Manpower
(Average) (Average)
Per Group
PL PF PW DM IN EL HL
FIRE FIGHTING PIPES
25mm diameter black seamless steel pipe with threaded fittings m 30 3.75 1 1 2
65mm diameter black seamless steel pipe with grooved-end m 20 2.5 1 1 2
HOT AND COLD-WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPES
20mm diameter PPR pipes include fittings m 30 4.5 1 1 2
63mm diameter PPR pipes include fittings m 20 3 1 2 3
SANITARY PIPES
40mm diameter UPVC pipes with elastomer joint socket include fittings m 36 4.5 1 1 2
110mm diameter UPVC pipes with elastomer joint socket include fittings m 24 3 1 2 3
125mm diameter UPVC pipes with elastomer joint socket include fittings m 24 3 1 2 3
25mm diameter UPVC condensate pipes with insulation m 30 3.75 1 1 1 3

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
79
PRODUCTION RATE FOR MEP ACTIVITY MECHANICAL

Manpower Requirement Per Group Total Manpower
Qty./day Qty./hr
Description Unit Per Group
(Average) (Average)
PL PF PW DM IN EL HL
PLUMBING EQUI PMENT
Water distribution pumps installation (one set) nos 1 0.125 2 2 4
Electric water heater installation nos 2 0.25 1 2 3
nos 1 0.125 1 2 3
Shower tray installation
nos 1 0.125 1 1 2
Water closet installation
nos 1 0.13 1 1 2
Bidet installation
nos 1 0.13 1 1 2
Wash basin installation
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Fire water pumps installation nos 1 0.13 2 2 4
Fire hose cabinet installation nos 1 0.13 2 2 4
Sprinkler fixing nos 30 3.75 1 1 2
HVAC EQUIPMENT
Fan coil unit (FCU) installation nos 4 0.50 2 2 4
Dessert Cooler installation nos 1 0.13 4 4 8
Package unit installation nos 1 0.13 4 4 8
Split unit installation nos 2 0.25 3 3 6
DUCTING
Duct installation sq. ft 60 7.50 1 1 2
Duct insulation sq. ft 60 7.50 1 1 2
Duct connection to FCU nos 4 0.50 1 1 2
Duct connection to Package Unit nos 1 0.13 4 4 8
11- PREFACE OF THE FIRST EDITION
This overall methodology for Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing (MEP) installation in buildings, towers & villas
are including in method statement. This method statement is intended to reflect our understanding of the
requirements of the project and the general construction sequences that we will follow. It will provide
information of reference documents and equipment required in installation stage.
This MEP method statement has been prepared by HEE professionals and got the approval from the Engineers
& the Clients in our previously executed projects. With the help of this method statement, it's easy to plan the
activity in more professional, technical and smooth manner to maintain the quality of work, safety requirements
implementation and time completion.

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
80
Each method statement is given unique code number for easy identification i.e.
MS - EL – 01
- MS: Serial Number.

- EL: Type of Work.
- 01: Code for Method Statement.
* EL Electrical
AC Mechanical - HVAC
PL Plumbing
FF Fire Fighting
This Part-II is divided into four sections
Section 9 Method Statement for Electrical Installation.

Section 10 Method Statement for Mechanical (HYAC).
Section 11 Method Statement for Plumbing Install.

Section 12 Method Statement for Fire Fighting Installation

+966 11 2065474 Fax: +966 11 2605473
81
❖ INSTALLATION EXECUTION METHODOLOGY
X.1. Method Statement for Civil works
1. Introduction
The Purpose of this Construction Method Statement (CMS) is to set out how our
company intends to execute the work with maintaining quality, time and safety.
The CMS will set the process of construction (i.e., order, sequence, manpower and logistic
support).
References
Drawings and Details
Contract General and Special Conditions
Codes and specifications: ACI 530 and Saudi Standards
Tools, Equipment’s & Manpower
- Hand tool, wheel barrows

- Cement mixer, grinder, Block cutter/splitter
- All terrain forklift, Electric Hoist, laser level (if required)
- Scaffolding
- Project Manager, Project Engineer, Site Engineer, Surveyor & Assistant, Skilled/unskilled labors, Foreman, Equipment
operator
Safety
- TPS Section: Site Safety and Security
- CSM Construction Safety Manual
- Proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) must be worn by all teams involved in the scope.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
82
- All works shall comply with safety procedure or instruction as set out in project safety plan and municipality
rules and regulation. All safety recommendations as advised by the approved contractor.
- Always use taglines with the precast element while lifting to keep the load steady.
- There should always be a Site Engineer/Engineers present on Job Site Prior to start of work up to the end of
the shift.
Work Preparation
1. All drawings will be studied and understood before works commence
2. Clean site location where activities will be done
Precautions
1. Lines and levels to be set out by the subcontractor surveying team based on the initial benchmark provided
by STL.
2. Masonry/Block works, wall ties, damp proof membranes, cavity details will be in accordance with
Architectural and/or engineer’s drawings.
3. Masonry/Blocks and Mortar will be supplied to the Block layers by experienced workers (Hod carriers) the
materials will be positioned in a manner to reduce the manual handling requirements.
4. Mortar will be used in accordance with the design specifications.
5. Mortar will be mixed on site and measured to ensure consistency.
6. Scaffolding will be used where required for the duration of installation, these will be checked before, during
and after use.
7. A telescopic forklift (if required) will be used to transport and place materials onto loading platforms.
8. Line and level will be continually checked during works.
9. All surplus/broken materials will be removed from the working areas to ensure continual housekeeping as
part of our safe system on work.
Work Procedure
1. Marking layout will be made in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint.
2. Layout area shall be cleaned prior to installation.
3. Block shall be wetted prior to using.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
83
4. In case of hollow block wall, the block shall be filled to full height with the specified grout filler
5. In case of solid block wall (where defined in drawings), solid blocks shall be used
6. The used mortar will be in accordance with specified premix material.
7. Ladders shall be laid at every 2nd course or where the shop drawings indication
8. GI corrugated angles 30x50x200x1.5mm shall be used on both sides every 3rd course
9. Galvanized angle bead 50x50mm shall be used at all edges of walls
10. Galvanized angle shall be used @1.2m interval on each face (staggered) with the structural concrete slab.
11. Filler board shall be used on the facing of block with reinforced concrete columns and slabs.
12. Fire Stopper (sealant) shall be used on top of wall edges, or where exposed with a size of 2cmx2cm.
13. 10mm vertical reinforcement steel bar shall be planted in every other cell per block (40cm interval). Depth
of steel bar shall be planted in a minimum if 10cm of the reinforced slab. Approved epoxy resin adhesive
shall be used with every plantation.
14. The maximum height of masonry work shall be up to the tie beam per day
15. Where doors are indicated, the tie beam shall be on the level of the lintel unless otherwise indicated by the
shop drawings or the consultant request.
16. Supply and install stiffener columns at 4-meter interval or as per drawing. Stiffener column thickness as per
applied block wall thickness and 20cm width.
17. Supply and install intermediate beams at 4-meter interval or as per drawing. Intermediate beam thickness
as per applied block wall thickness and 20cm width.
Responsibilities
1. The Project Manager must mobilize the required materials, equipment and manpower to do the job as
required, and will monitor activities. He must take note of existing shortfall and problems and discuss the
same with Baumert Project Manager. Corrective solutions must be identified and applied to compensate for
the shortfalls.
2. The Project Engineer ensures on-site availability of all the required manpower and equipment. Oversees his
on-site team, including the site engineers, surveyors, and foremen. Provide his site team with final drawings
for execution. Deals with the supplier of the ready-mix regarding concrete quantity and delivery. Monitors
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
84
casting operations, ensures the preparation of the curing process, ensures that the safety requirements are
met on site.
3. The Site Engineer will be in charge for the supervision and implementation of all activities as required in the
specifications and drawing, especially in giving orders to site foreman. Site engineer is also in charge for the
preparation and filing of reports. He/she shall always be available on the premises.
4. The Site Foreman shall be in charge for the supervisions and implementation of various steps in works, as
instructed by the Site Engineer. The Site Foreman shall also keep record of all work schedules, work
production and daily safety issues.
5. It is the Site Engineer’s duty to make sure all workers are properly oriented, and inspected for proper safely
gear worn. It is their duty to be present at all times during the work in progress. He shall also ensure that all
necessary safety and protective equipment are provided along with properly trained and qualified
personnel.
6. It is the Mason & Laborers’ duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety
rules. They must also perform the work as described in the method statement procedure
2. Site Set Up
On taking possession of the site, the first activity to be carried out will be to set up the
onsite offices and welfare facilities. A hoarding will be erected around the site as per the
Construction Site Layout. This will ensure that the site is fully secure prior to commencing
works.
3. Sequence of Work
3.1. Survey and Setting Out
3.1.1. Before work starts survey, department will establish baselines and
benchmarks from which co-ordinates and elevations will be taken to set out
the foundation works by using total station machine and levels.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
85
1. SITE SURVEYING & GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION WORKS

1.1 SITE SURVEYING
A. Scope
This covers the various steps in Site Surveying and Geotechnical Investigations for the project site.
B. References
Contract-General & Special Conditions
Drawings – Project Specifications – Shop Drawings
Code and Standards a specified in the General Scope of Work
a. Tools, Equipment, & Man power

- Survey Equipment: (Global Positioning System (GPS)-Total Station)
- Tripods, Ranging Poles, Ranging Rods
- Measuring Tapes, Levels, Plumb lines
- Lead Surveyor, Rodman, Chainman
C. Safety
1. TPS Section: Site Safety and Security
2. CSM Construction Safety Manual
3. Safety Hazard and Precautions
4. Traffic: Set out warning signs, plastic glass range flagging and/or barricades as necessary.
5. Electrical Lines: Use only wood or fiber glass range poles or rods when working near electrical lines.
6. Surveyors and chainman or all workers involved should wear reflective jackets and other proper safety
gears.
7. All instruments, tripods, carrying cases, surveying tools will be fitted with stripes of highly reflective adhesive
tape.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
86
D. Prior Activities
1. Establishing the control point consists of scouting existing reference points on site which are already
referenced to existing control points defined and indicated by the Engineer.
2. The control points will be protected by concrete surround and by warning tape to secure the perimeter.
3. Location of bench marks are checked jointly with the SACC and/or consultant surveyors and level in the
drawings are verified accordingly.
E. Procedures
1. For ease of reference in daily activities temporary bench marks are established and protected on site. A duly
signed layout drawing showing the location and co-ordinates will be submitted to the Engineer for future
records.
2. At the beginning, setting out of lines will be carried out to check all possible obstructions prior to
commencement of construction. (Ground level are also recorded and records will be jointly signed with the
SACC and/or consultant for future reference.)
3. The setting out for the Main Secondary Turning points will be carries out by surveyors then it will be checked
by the Engineer’s Surveyors. A traverse drawing showing the actual location and coordinates of the T.P.’s
(where applicable), as well as the offsets from permanent services will be produced and duly signed by both
parties.
4. Shop Drawings and IFCs will then be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for agreement and approval.
Any details needed will be prepared by the technical office and submitted for approval. (IFCs will be the
basis for all the construction activities. Any amendments must be recorded and monitored. Care should be
taken to and only the latest revisions should be used during execution).
5. For every particular item of work such as pipeline excavation, laying, leveling, manhole location setting out,
invert level, stubs level, cover level… etc. survey checking out is a must to eliminate any possible discrepancy.
6. Surveying during the execution will be carried out by qualified surveyors along with experienced chainmen.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
87
7. Good survey instruments are used such as Total Station, Digital Theodolite and high accurate level
instruments. In addition to various surveying tools and equipment. All survey instruments and equipment
should be calibrated.
8. In the cases of Network lines and associated structure every step will be checked.
9. Surveying records will be kept up to date as they will form the basis for measurements sheets and as-built
records of the works done on site.
10. Any changes will have to be shown on the final drawings.
F. Responsibilities
1. It is the Project Manager’s duty to ensure that all necessary safety and protective equipment are provided
along with properly trained and qualified personnel.
2. It is the Site Supervisor’s duty to organize the work in safe manner and to ensure that safety and protective
equipment are being properly utilized. He must also assure the method statement procedure is followed
and must observe any hold-points and notify the SACC and/or consultant for inspection.
3. It is the worker’s duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety rules. They
must also perform the work as described in the method statement procedure.
4. The Site Engineer’s duty to ensure that all necessary safety and protective equipment are provided along
with properly trained and qualified personnel. He will also coordinate to ensure that the necessary
resourced to implement the approved method statement have been allocated to the task.
5. The Site Engineer will ensure that the site preparation activities are conducted according to the approved
method statement.
6. The Material Engineer will ensure that the materials being used are in accordance to the project
specifications and the approved method statement.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
88
3.2. Geotechnical Investigations

1. GENERAL
The Field work of the Geotechnical Investigation for this project will mainly consist of drilling of _____
boreholes of _____m depth. The Standard Penetration Test (SPT) will be carried out at _____cm interval up to
_____m depth, and thereafter at _____m depth.
2. RESONSIBILITIES
Accredited Testing Agency ensures complete compliance of the equipment to acceptable standards for the
field investigation works. This responsibility is delegated to various members of operational personnel for
performing the quality control. Typically, for project duties of these staff members will include, but not limited
to those given in the following sections.
Geotechnical Engineer
A person having an extensive experience of geotechnical investigation will be assigned for the project. He will
be supervising and providing guidance to the project from inception to the completion stage.
The preliminary estimate of the number of various field and laboratory tests will be made by the soil expert.
His continuous supervision during the investigations will ensure to optimize the type and number of tests that
will be actually performed. A similar exercise will be done for the laboratory testing of the soil/rock samples
recovered in the field investigation.
Field Geologist
He will be responsible in supervising the efficient performance of the field operations. His main duties will
include the following:
1. To execute all field operations with the help of field technician and helpers according to the required scope
of work.
2. The ensure that all field testing is conducted efficiently and properly according to the applicable standards
3. To ascertain that the filed test equipment is properly maintained and calibrated.
4. To ensure proper sampling of soil/rock according to the relevant standards.
5. To identify and classify the soil/rock on site and to present the field information in the form of field logs.
6. To arrange the proper sealing, packing and handling of the samples retrieved from the site.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
89
7. To arrange transportation of all samples to the nearest laboratory for necessary instructions to the drillers,
helper and technician working on site.
Drilling Superintendent
Prior to mobilization, the drilling superintendent will ensure all the equipment are properly functioning. He will
inspect the engines, pumps, drilling fluid and spares.
The staff responsible to him are:
1. The Drillers
2. Assistant drillers
3. Helpers
3. DRILLING OF BOREHOLES
The methodology for field investigations will follow the applicable codes and standards. Most of the field
investigations will be performed in accordance with the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
standards.
Drilling operation in soil will normally proceed with hollow stem auguring or rotary wash boring techniques using
truck mounted rigs. Exploration of the site to determine the sub-surface condition shall be made in accordance
the recommendation of ASTM D420. Representative thin-walled tube samples will be obtained in accordance
with ASTM D1587 for cohesive soils, whenever encountered. Standard Penetration Tests(SPT) will be performed
at specified depth intervals, in accordance with ASTM D1586.
All samples retrieved from the drilling operation will be classified on site by our qualified geologist in accordance
with ASTM D2488. Representative portions of each sample will be sealed and packed with proper identification
of the samples will then be sent to our laboratory for necessary testing.
Upon encountering the rock, coring will be carried out in accordance with ASTM D2113. Rock coring will be
performed continuously at appropriate core run intervals. It will be carried out with, double tube core barrel
equipped with diamond/carbide steel bit. For each core run, the rock recovery and RQD will be noted in order
to identify the rock quality and continuity.
Groundwater levels will be measured at each borehole, whenever encountered.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
90
All the field information will be recorded in the form of field bore logs by our geologist on site and will be
send to the Q.C. Engineer for review and preparation of laboratory testing program in the light of field
investigation.
4. FIELD TESTS
Field tests such as Standard Penetration Tests (SPT), groundwater measurement, visual inspection and other
required tests will be performed by experienced personnel and in accordance with the applicable standards.
The data of all the Field Tests will be recorded by the respective field inspectors and technician and submit to
the Q.C. Engineer for review.
a. Laboratory Testing
1. GENERAL
General laboratory testing of soil and rocks samples collected in the field will be carried out in order to determine
the type of strata, strength, and deformation properties.
2. RESONSIBILITIES
An Accredited Testing Agency ensures complete compliance with its Quality Control System and related
procedures as outlined herein. It will be the responsibility of various authorized members of Accredited Testing
Agency (TA) to represent and act on its behalf for implementing this Quality Control System. The duties of
various staff are outlined in the following sections
Q.C. Engineer (Laboratory Operation)
He will be responsible for efficient operations of the material testing laboratory. He will prepare the entire
laboratory testing program according to the project requirement, and will take necessary measures for
maintaining the laboratory equipment and calibration of such equipment.
He will also be responsible for the guidance and supervision of the following staff:
1. Laboratory Engineers and Technicians
2. Equipment Maintenance Man
3. Materials, Equipment and Consumables

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
91
Senior Laboratory Technician

He will be directly responsible to laboratory supervisor.
His main duties will include the following:
1. To make sure that the technicians under him perform the allocated duties diligently and as per procedures
set out by the supervisors.
2. To prepare a comprehensive report of the work performed under his supervision and to ensure that the
testing is done as directed by the supervisors.
3. Liaison between Client and the Accredited Testing Agency (TA) in the laboratory.
2. SHOP DRAWING, BBS, REPORTS, etc.

a. Scope
This covers the various how preparation of shop drawing and reports be done and handled in the Technical
Office Department
b. References
IFC Drawings
Any guides to be able to prepare the Shop Drawings. Etc.
c. Tools, Equipment’s & Manpower

- Computers and Laptops installed with needed software for the project.
- Printers and plotters for output
- Technical Office management, Technical Engineer and Staff
d. Safety
- Proper work environment of a Technical Office
- All wiring for computers be checked and properly installed

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
92
e. Prior Activities
1. Review tender drawings, IFCs and other documents
2. Review changes to be applied in the Shop drawings and/ or reports etc.
f. Procedures
1. Work environment should be checked before starting work.
2. Shop Drawing is prepared with the appropriate Technical Engineer to the discipline.
3. Bar Bending Schedule (BBS) should be prepared by an Engineer who understands detailing well.
4. Reports and other Technical Office related work should be properly organized with the right staff working
on it.
5. Final outputs are properly organized and cataloged prior to submission of the documents for approval.
6. Any changes or revisions will have to be applied and revision of plans is necessary and resubmission of work
for approval.
g. Responsibilities
1. It’s the Technical Manager’s duty to review all the final documents, any errors should be corrected before
submission. He is responsible in managing the work load of all Technical Office Engineers and Staffs.
2. It’s the Technical Engineers duties to review all tender drawing that will be used in preparing Shop Drawing.
It is his responsibility to check for errors and apply company standards for a good output of his work.
3. It’s the Technical Staff duties to assist the Manage and technical Engineer on what they want for help
4. Bar Bending Schedule (BBS) should be prepared by an Engineer who understands detailing well.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
93
3. EXCAVATION WORKS & BACKFILLING WORKS

a. Scope
This method statement describes a proper work procedure to be carried out during the excavation stage as per
specification and contract drawings.
b. References
Excavation Plans, Site Layout
Specifications for Excavations and Earthworks

- Excavator, Pay Loader, trucks
- Shovel, Survey Instruments, Meter Tape
- Site Engineer, Laborers, Heavy Equipment operators, Survey Team
d. Safety
- All works shall comply with safety procedures or instructions as set out in project safety plan and municipality
rules and regulations
- A well-trained operator or banks man must be engaged to control or operate heavy equipment machine or
vehicles
the shift.
- As per SACC and/or consultant standards safety must be properly observed “Safety Is #1 Priority”
-
-

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
94
b. Site Preparation
1. Construction Team would conduct an investigation and acquire information about site services might have
been paced/embedded below the ground. Services, wherever found shall be rerouted and protected to a
place where it will not affect the site activates.
2. Surveyor shall conduct the site survey to mark/ stake-out the lines and levels of the objective excavation for
foundations as per indicated in the approved drawings.
c. Excavation
1. The area to be excavated shall be properly marked and cleared before starting the activity.
2. The depth of excavation shall be periodically checked by the surveyor to avoid over excavation. The bank of
excavation area shall be sloped and shall be maintained to avoid a collapse of the bank into the excavated
area.
3. All excavated materials shall be kept in an assigned and approved location.
4. For all excavation activities, adequate safety barriers, signboards, advance warning signs should be placed.
5. For foundation, as soon as the excavation reaches the required depth/elevation the surface shall be leveled
and shall be compacted to 95% of maximum dry density.
6. Before the compaction starts, make sure that the excavated level is free from standing water or excessive
moisture content.
7. Inspection should be conducted during compaction for checking and approval of the engineer on site.
8. The compaction test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before proceeding to the
succeeding work.
d. Backfilling
1. After Completion of the compaction under blinding, concrete foundation. Backfilling shall commence using
similar excavation materials. Care must be taken to removed unnecessary materials.
2. Prior to backfilling, the compacted surface shall be checked and approved by the Site Engineer.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
95
3. The thickness of backfill shall be in accordance with the specified date in the plans or stated in the
specification unless otherwise noted onsite by the Engineer.
4. The sub-grade once approved, the excavation materials or any material source approved by the Engineer
shall be placed in layers not more than 200mm thick
5. Before the compaction starts, make sure that the excavated level is free from standing water or excessive
moisture content.
6. Inspection should be conducted during compaction for checking and approval of the engineer on site.
7. The compaction test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before proceeding to the
succeeding work.
e. Benching and Battering

1. A simple way of controlling the risk of ground collapse is to bench or batter the excavation walls. Al
excavated slope will be safe when the ground is stable that is the slope does not flatten when left for a
considerable period, there is no movement of material down the slope and the toe of the slope remains in
the same place.
2. Create a series of steps in the vertical wall of an excavation to reduce the wall height and ensure stability.
(See Figure 1)
3. Excavate the sides of an excavation to form one or more horizontal levels or steps with vertical surfaces
between level.
Figure 1: BENCHING
d < 20’

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
96
4. Sloping the wall of an excavation to an angle as per specifications to ensure stability (See Figure 2). Battering
prevents ground collapse by cutting the excavated face back to a safe slope. Battering should commence
from the bottom of the excavation and in some cases, it may be appropriate to combine both methods on
excavation (See Figure 3)
Figure 2: BATTERING
d < 20’
Figure 2: COMBINED BENCHING & BATTERING
d < 20’
AS PER PIP CV502100 4.3.2.5. & 29 CFR 1926 OSHA(Subpart P)
f. Responsibilities
personnel.
2. It is the duty of the Site Engineer to supervise the work and ensure all specification and activities are
properly done as per layout and other items is concerned. It is his responsibility to make sure the site
activities are conducted according to the approved method statement
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
97
3. It is the duties and responsibilities of the Survey Team to make sure locations and marks are accurately
placed as per approve drawing. And to make sure the levels are properly checked.
4. It is the responsibility of the Heavy Equipment Operators to properly and SAFELY work on their assigned
job. They have to be more careful of their surroundings to avoid any unnecessary incidents.
4: -FORMWORKS AND SHORING

a. FORMWORKS
a. Scope
This covers the various steps in the installation of formworks for the project
b. References
Technical Specifications
Drawings – Project Specifications – Shop Drawings
Code and Standards a specified in the General Scope of Work
c. Tools, Equipment, & Man power

- Ties and Braces, Blade, Measuring tape, Hacksaw, Hammer
- Skilled labor, unskilled labor
a. Safety
1. TPS Section: Site Safety and Security
2. CSM Construction Safety Manual
3. Safety Hazard and Precautions
- When erecting, altering and dismantling formworks there should be inadequate free fall distance underneath
the working area.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
98
- Stripping of formworks for structural elements like cantilever beam/ slabs shall be done only after
mobilization of full restraining forces.
- Adequate fire-fighting facilities/ fire extinguisher to be fixed in carpentry yard or the likes.
- Appropriate PPE worn at all times and checked by Safety Supervisor
- Where necessary, formwork shall be arranged so that the soffit form is properly supported on props and can
only be retained in position for such period as may be required by curing conditions.
- Close watch shall be maintained to check for settlement of formwork during concreting. any settlement of
formwork during concreting shall be promptly rectified.
d. Prior Activities
1. All work from Excavation should already have been done before starting formwork activities.
2. Formwork plans/drawing shall be reviewed before commencing.
e. Procedures
1. Material for Formwork
- Propping and Centering: All propping and centering shall be either of steel tubes with extension pieces or
built up sections of rolled steel.
2. Centering/Staging
- Staging shall be as designed with the required extension pieces as approved by Engineer-in-Charge to ensure
proper slopes, as per design for slabs/beams etc. and as per levels as shown in drawing. All the staging to be
either of tubular steel structure with adequate bracing as approved or made of built up structural sections
made from rolled structural steel sections.
- Centering and shuttering of any upper floor being cast shall be suitably supported on the floor and roof floor
already cast.
3. Shuttering

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
99
- Shuttering used shall be of sufficient stiffness to avoid excessive deflection and joints shall be tightly butted
to avoid leakage of slurry. If required, rubberized lining/tape of material as approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge shall be provided in the joints.
- The shuttering shall also be properly repaired before use and properly cleaned to avoid strains. Honey
combing, seepage of slurry through joints etc.
- Runner Joists: MS Channel or any other suitable section of the required size shall be used as runners.
- Assembly of beam head over props, beam head is an adopter that fits snugly on the head plate of props to
provide wider support under beam bottoms.
- Formworks shall be properly designed for self-weight. Weight reinforcement. Weight of fresh concrete, and
in addition the various live loads likely to be imposed during the construction process (Such as workmen,
materials and equipment). In case the height of centering exceeds 3.5m. the prop may be provided in multi-
stages.
4. Erection of Formwork (Centering and shuttering)
- Any member which is to remain in position after the general dismantling is done should be clearly marked.
- Material used should be checked to ensure that wrong /rejected item won’t be used.
- Bracing, strut, and tie shall be installed along with the progress of form work to ensure strength and stability
of form work at intermediate stage. Steel sections (especially deep sections) shall be adequately restrained
against tilting, overturning. Formworks shall be restrained against horizontal loads. All the securing devices
and bracing shall be tightened.
- When adjustable steel props are used. They should be undamaged and not visibly bent.
- Have means for centralizing beams placed in the foreheads, screw adjustment of adjustable propose shall
not be over extended.
- Double wedges shall be provided for adjustment of the required position wherever any settlement/elastic
shorting of props occur. Wedges should be used at the bottom end of single prop. Wedges shall not be too
steep and one of the pair should be tightened/clamped down after adjustment to prevent shifting.
- No matter shall be eccentric upon vertical member, the number of nuts and bolts shall be adequate.
- All provisions of the design and/or drawings shall be complied with Cantilever support shall be adequate.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
100
- Props shall be directly under one another in multistage constructions as far as possible.
- Support shall be adequate and in plumb within the specified tolerances.
5. Inspection of Formwork
The completed formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-charge before the
reinforcement bars are placed in position.
- Proper formwork shall be adopted for concreting so as to avoid honey combing, blow holes, grout loss, stains
or discoloration of concrete etc. Proper and accurate alignment and profile of finished concrete surface will
be ensured by proper design and erection of formwork which will be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
- Shuttering surface before concreting should be free from any defect/deposit and fully cleaned so as to give
perfectly straight and smooth concrete surface. Shuttering surface shall ne therefore checked for any damage
to its surface and excessive roughness before use.
6. Removal of Formwork
- The formwork shall be removed as to not cause any damage to the concrete. Centering shall be gradually and
uniformly lowered in such a manner as to permit the concrete from taking any stresses due to its own weight
uniformly and gradually to avoid any shock or vibration.
f. Responsibilities
personnel.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
101
3. It is the worker’s duty to properly wear the personal protective equipment (PPE) provided and obey all
safety rules. They must also perform the work as described in the method statement procedure.
method statement.
5: -REINFORCED CONCRETE FOUNDATION BUILDING

a. Scope
This method statement covers the various stages in constructing reinforced concrete foundation for all the
buildings
b. References
Contract General and special conditions
Foundation plans and details drawings
Codes and specifications

- Concrete Vibrator, Dumper, Hand tools, Survey Equipment’s, Cable avoidance tools
- Site Manager, Site Supervisor, Site Engineer, Workers, Machine operators, Material Engineer, Surveyor
d. Safety
- There should always be a Site Engineer/Engineers present on Job Site Prior to start of work up to the end of the
shift.
- Banksman present during concrete pouring works
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
102
- Warning sign should be placed

- Goggles and gloves MUST be worn during concreting operations
- Risk Assessment for concrete work to be carried out before commencing work.
e. Previous Activities
1. Review plans needed for the activity
2. Proper safety guideline inducted by Site Engineer before commencing
3. Final check of formworks and shuttering
4. Blinding concrete done
f. Procedures
1. Lay out foundation reinforcements as per detailed drawing and specifications. Following approved Bar
Bending Schedule (BBS) with the supervisions of the engineers all foundation reinforcement will be laid out.
2. Level for all top of foundation should be marked and surveyed accurately as per the levels indicated in the
approved drawings.
3. Concrete will be discharged directly from the truck mixer or stationary mixer whichever is used.
4. The concrete will be vibrated and levels constantly checked to ensure correct level attained.
5. The concrete will be either tamped or worked with a wood float or any machine used for leveling concrete
surfaces.
6. Post pour checks to be carried out to ensure line and level are within the contract tolerances.
g. Responsibilities
1. It is the Project Manager’s duty to ensure that all necessary safety and protective equipment are provided
along with properly trained and qualified personnel.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
103
personnel.
method statement. And responsible for instructing Site foremen to follow the proper construction process.
7. It is the responsibility of the Heavy Equipment/Machine Operators to properly and SAFELY work on their
assigned job. They have to be more careful of their surroundings to avoid any unnecessary incidents.
6:-CURING WORKS
i. Scope
This method statement covers the various types of curing done in a construction use the appropriate method
for the scope of the project
ii. References
Refer to ACI 305R, ACI 308R, and ASTM C309 standards and specifications

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
104
b. Tools, Equipment’s & Manpower

- Hand tools, hammers/mallets
- Curing Materials
- Site Supervisor, Site Engineer, Workers, Equipment operators
c. Safety
the shift.
-
d. Previous Activities
1. All concreting works
e. Procedures
1. Structural concrete shall be continuously water cured in accordance with recommendations of ACI 305R,
ACI 308R and as modified below.
NOTE:
TO AVOID SELF-DESICCATION OF THE CONCRETE MIX, ONLY WATER CURING METHOD SHALL BE USED
TO CURE THE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. PLEASE REFER TO SECTION 1.3.2 OF ACI 308R.
2. Maximum total dissolved solids in water used for curing shall not exceed 1000 part per million.
3. Water curing shall be continuous until the compressive strength has reached 70% of the specified strength,
but not less than what is specified in Table 1 below.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
105
4. The saturated burlaps shall be covered with a plasticized sheet vapor barrier, minimum 0.15mm in thickness
and shall be kept in contact with the concrete surface at all times.
5. Curing Compound shall be in accordance with ASTM c309 or equivalent and verified by independent lab on
monthly basis.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
106
f. Responsibilities
personnel.
method statement. And responsible for instructing Site foremen to follow the proper construction process.
6. It is the responsibility of the Machine Operators to properly and SAFELY work on their assigned job. They
have to be more careful of their surroundings to avoid any unnecessary incidents.
7: -RC COLUMN COLUMNS, WALLS, FLOOR & ROOF SLAB, AND BEAMS
CONCRETE WORKS - DGR
a. Scope
This method statement is to describe all the Concreting works done above ground. Work shall be carried out as
per the drawing and project specification.
b. References
Codes and specifications: Concrete Works

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
107

- Total station, Level Machine
- Water Tanker, Concrete trucks
- Concrete pumps, Concrete Vibrators
- Project Manager, Project Engineer, Site Engineer, Surveyor and Assistant, Skilled/unskilled labors, Foreman,
Equipment operator, Carpenters Steel Fixers
d. Safety
- Provide lighting when working at night
the shift.
e. Work Preparation
1. Prior to the commencement of the works, confirm and establish all reference points and levels.
2. Locate, confirm and protect control points to starting the site works.
f. Procedures
1. Before placing concrete, all dirt, debris and other foreign matter shall be removed.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
108
2. Before concrete placing commences, all wedges and other adjusting devices shall be secured against
movement during concrete placing
3. Before placing concrete, make sure all the reinforcement is ready, cover blocks provided, all MEP
installations completed (if any) and all necessary approvals have been taken.
4. Cover to Reinforcement
Refer to the General Notes for covers of every member.
5. Construction Joint
The construction joints will be provided in those positions where they are shown on the drawings. Whenever
concrete is to be bonded to other concrete that has hardened, before deposition of further concrete, the
contact surface shall be clean, hard and sound.
6. Concrete Placement Procedures:
- The concrete shall conform to all requirement as per approved code and specifications. Structural use of the
concrete.
- No concrete shall be placed in the permanent works until the SACC AND/OR CONSULTANT has approved the
materials.
- No concrete shall be placed in any part of the permanent structure until the SACC AND/OR CONSULTANT’s
consent has been given in writing.
- The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall be placed so as to avoid
segregation of concrete and displacement of the reinforcement, other embedded items or formwork.
- Maximum free fall height/free drop height shall be minimized to 1.5m to avoid segregation.
- The concrete will be placed into layers not more than 500mm. or agreed by the SACC AND/OR CONSULTANT.
- The layers shall not be placed so that they form featheredges nor shall they be placed on a previous layer
that has taken its initial set. In order to comply with this requirement, a layer will be started before
completion of the preceding layer.
- The vibrators shall be operated at a regular interval to produce dense, compact and homogeneous concrete
surface. The size of the vibrating pokers will be decided considering the layout of reinforcements and will
ensure consistent mass is obtained without segregation.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
109
- During concrete placement operations it will be ensured that ambient temperature is ≤ 42°c while concrete
temperature ≤ 30°c.
7. Independent Testing Laboratory ITL Testing
- At arrival of concrete at site, the ITL will do all necessary site checks of concrete i.e. temperature, slump, air
content and etc. as per delivery note & specified testing frequency as per specification.
- ITL will take the cubes for 7- & 28-days’ compressive strength and durability as specified.
8. Protection of Fresh Concrete
- Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rainfall and water running over the surface until it is
sufficiently hard to resist damage.
- No traffic shall be allowed on any concrete surface until it is sufficiently hard to resist damage by such traffic.
- Freshly placed concrete shall not be subjected to any structural loading until it has attained at least its
nominal strength as specified.
9. Curing
- Concrete shall be thoroughly wetted as soon as the forms are first loosened and shall be kept wet during the
removal operation and until the curing media is applied.
- The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is hard enough to resist damage from the process.
- Curing shall be continued for as long as may be necessary to achieved its objective but in any case, for at least
seven days or until the concrete is covered by the later construction, whichever is the shorter period.
10. Removal of formworks
- The SACC AND/OR CONSULTANT shall be notified in writing before the removal of formwork.
- No formwork shall be removed until the concrete has gained sufficient strength as specified.
- The period on the time elapsing between the placing of concrete and removal of forms shall be approved by
the SACC AND/OR CONSULTANT after consideration of loads likely to be imposed on the concrete.
- Formworks shall be carefully removed, without shock or disturbance to concrete.
- As soon as the formwork has been removed, bolt holes in concrete faces, other than construction joints,
which are not required for subsequent operations shall be filled.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
110
g. Responsibilities
same with the Project Manager. Corrective solutions must be identified and applied to compensate for the
shortfalls.
met on site.
preparation and filing of reports.
4. The Site Foreman shall be in charge for the supervisions and implementation of various steps in shoring
works, as instructed by the Site Engineer. The Site Foreman shall also keep record of all work schedules,
work production and daily safety issues.
personnel.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
111
8: -CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL WORKS

a. Scope
This method statement is to describe how corrosion protection will be done on any steel works on the project.
b. References
Specifications

- Wire Brushes, soft Brushes, Air compressor
- Stirring rod, Paint Brush, Paint rollers, Spray Paint Equipment
- Project Manager, Project Engineer, Site Engineer, Painter, Skilled/unskilled labors, Foreman, Equipment
operator
d. Safety
- All workers shall provide with PPE (Personal Protective Equipment) and shall be worn every time they are
entering the site.
- Safety induction to be conducted to all new workers that involved to this activity and safety tool box meeting
shall be conducted every day to remind the workers about concerning the safety.
- All workers shall fully support and actively participate in all safety related activities and comply with all
practicable safety measures.
- All workers shall be advised to report any accident or injury to supervisor and proper treatment to be
obtained.
- Rubber glove, mask and safety glasses should always be worn during welding works in progress.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
112
- The site shall be kept clear of unnecessary obstruction.

- First aid kit boxes will be provided at site office.
the shift.
e. Surface Preparation
1. Remove flakes and other surface defects (if any as required)
2. All rough weld, burrs, weld spatter, weld sears, indentations and other sharp projection is any on the
fabrications shall be ground smooth prior to further preparation (as required).
3. Sand Blasting the entire area using copper slag if required.
4. Blow down with compressed air to remove all the dust and particles from prepared surface and to make the
surface free of dust.
5. Take record of achieved surface standards.
f. Procedures
1. Coating (Site Painting)
- Assuming all Supplier shop work have been done and materials are delivered to site.
- Perform all necessary tests, weather condition monitoring to ensure the climate is suitable for coating.
- Perform tests for RH, Steel temperature to ensure the compatibility of coating.
- Check for the DFT of the existing coating.
- Hand sanding/light manual abrading on the existing coating
- Blow down with compressed air/dry wipe to remove dust and to make the surface clean and ready to receive
the final coat
- Necessary touch-up if the existing coating is found to be defective.
- Apply the top coat using airless spray equipment.
- Allow for full cure as recommended by the material manufacturer.
- Testing and recording.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
113
g. Responsibilities
shortfalls.
met on site.
personnel.
6. It is the Painter & Workers duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety
rules. They must also perform the work as described in the method statement procedure.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
114
9: -CHAINLINK LINK STEEL FENCES AND GATE WHERE REQUIRED

A. Scope
This method statement is to describe all Chain-link fences and gates done in the project.
B. References
C. Tools, Equipment’s & Manpower

- Mobile Crane, Forklift (If required)
- Welding equipment’s, Hammers
- Site Supervisor, Site Engineer, Foreman, welders, and laborers
D. Safety
entering the site.
obtained.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
115
the shift.
E. Work Preparation
F. Procedures
1. GENERAL
- The fence shall be constructed in accordance with the details on the plans and as specified herein using new
materials, and all work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Consultant.
- Prior to the beginning of the work or upon the request of the Consultant, the Contractor shall locate the
position of the work by establishing and marking the fence line. The finished fence shall be plumb, taut, true
to line and ground contour, and complete in every detail.
- There are five (5) basic steps involved in installing the fence and each of those steps has several different,
equally effective options. There are:
- Deciding how many wires need and then marking how high up and far apart they need to be placed on the
ends and corners.
- Insulating the wires from the end and corner posts.
- Stretching the wire.
- Connecting the wire.
- Installing the in-line strainers, tension spring and then tightening the wire.
- For handrail, all workmanship shall be of first-class quality in every respect, the greatest accuracy being
observed to ensure that all parts will fit together properly on erection. Erection procedure shall be in
accordance with approved proposal (mock-up). During erection care shall be taken to avoid any shock,
dynamic or vibration loading of the members. All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates or
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
116
corresponding plates, and drilled, except in plates or under, when they may be punched. Holes should be
cleaned or burrs or rough edges and counter-sunk where required. The surface area must be cleaned before
proceed the work.
1.1 CHAIN LINK FENCE
1.2 Clearing Fence Lines
- The site of the fence shall be sufficiently cleared of obstructions, and surface irregularities shall be graded so
that the fence will confirm to the general contour of the ground. The fence line shall be cleared on each side
of the fence centerline. This clearing shall consist of rocks or other obstructions that will interfere with proper
construction of fence.
1.3 Installing Posts
- The contractor shall fill, cut or trench where necessary to produce a smooth and uniform ground surface so
the bottom of the fabrics not less than 300mm or more than 900mm above the finished ground line. All posts
shall be set plumb, true to line and grade. Terminal posts, defined as end, corner, pull or gate posts, shall be
set in concrete. The concrete footing shall be uniform thickness around the post. Distance of post shall
according to the construction drawing and/or approved mock-up.
1.4 Bracing
- All corner, end, pull, and gate posts shall be braced as shown on the drawings. Pull posts shall be used at
sharp breaks in vertical grade or as directed by the Consultant.
1.5 Installing Fabric
- Fabric shall be securely attached to end, corner, gate and pull posts in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. All fabrics shall be taut before attaching to line posts or tension wire. High and size for
the fabric should follow as per construction drawing.
1.6 2.5 Stretching Chain Link Fabric
- After rolling out the chain link and weaving the rolls together, ‘hook-up’ one end. Make sure the nuts are on
the inside of the fence so they cannot be removed from outside the enclosure.
- Pull the chain link tight by hand to the other end.
- Stretch the fence using stretch tools. Do not over tighten.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
117
- ‘Dress’ the fabric as tighten it. ‘Dressing’ involves straightening the fabric diamonds so they run true.
- Hand stretch the small section of chain link left between the come-a-long and terminal post by hand. Slide
the tension bar into the mesh and make the last hook-up. Once all bolts are in place, remove the stretching
tools.
2.6 Fencing Kerb
- The contractor shall erect the formwork after the installation of chain link pole and the fabric. The height of
kerb shall be 150mm. The concreting work shall be carried out after the formwork erected with G20 concrete.
G. Responsibilities
shortfalls.
met on site.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
118
personnel.
6. It is the Worker’s duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety rules. They
10: -DRY WALLS
PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES/ APPROVALS
1. Submission of samples and data sheets of required gypsum boards, systems and components, cement board,
insulation, and other framing materials for approval.
2. Submission of shop drawings detailing sections of different types of partitions, lining and ceiling with junction
details, floor and soffit fixing detail etc. for approval.
3. Submission of Method Statement, work schedule, and inspection plan.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
1. Ensure all required document and material approvals have been obtained.
2. Inspect and ascertain conformance of existing base structures and preceding trade works done by others.
3. Ensure materials have been obtained from approved suppliers.
4. Ensure MEP coordination function takes place and all relevant personnel are aware of requirements prior to
commencing of work in each work zone.
5. Ensure all constraints on operations have been identified and precautions are taken.
6. Arrange all necessary personnel, equipment and services as required for the works and ensure adequate
water, lighting, power and access arrangements are in place.
7. Where further information/ clarification in respect of Contract drawings are required the matter shall be referred
to the Engineer by means of a request for information. (RFI)
8. Implement Employee induction procedures and Toolbox Talks for ongoing risk assessment and identification
of hazards.
9. Erect scaffolding in accordance with approved safety procedures.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
119
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Dry Walls and lining material (gypsum boards, cement boards, insulation and framing components) accompanied
by delivery notes, to be delivered to site palletized, and stored in fully enclosed, conditioned space, protected
against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other
causes as per the site conditions and laydown area.
WORK EXECUTION
LAYOUT MARKING OR SETTING OUT
Surveyors will carry out layout marking as per approved drawing in concurrence with the schedule of work. The
layout would be marked with chalk line on the floor. These lines will get transferred to the slab with the help of
Laser/plumb to maintain the verticality of partition. Once the setting out is completed the end points will be marked
with permanent markers. The type of partition as per wall key will be marked alongside the marking, for easy
reference. The level and line for setting out would be taken from the authenticated benchmark and grid lines given
by the Main Contractor at site. The layout will be cross-checked by Site Supervisor before proceeding with
installation.
FRAME WORK FOR PARTITIONS AND LINING
Top tracks will be fixed onto the soffit as per the particular wall type. The tracks will be fixed securely with wall plug
& self-taping screws, at a maximum spacing of 600mm center in staggered manner. The floor tracks will also be
fixed in the same manner with same hardware. The studs will be installed as per approved shop drawing between
the top and bottom tracks.
All hangers are fixed to the soffit of slab with the help of anchor nails at a maximum spacing of 1200 mm Centre
to centre. After hangers are fixed then the wall angles are fixed to the walls at the perimeter of ceiling area. Then
the main channels are fixed to these hangers also at a maximum spacing of 1200 mm Centre to Centre with the
help of channel screws. After fixing main channels then the furring channels (Hat Sections) are fixed to the bottom
of main channels in perpendicular direction at a maximum spacing of 600 mm Centre to Centre with the help of
channel screws.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
120
BOARDING FOR PARTITIONS
Boards will be installed along the stud direction with plaster board screws at 3000mm C/C distance in the middle-
and 200-mm c/c at ends. The screw heads will be driven 2-3mm from the external face to allow for the filling of
screw heads. After frame work and one side boarding is done, an inspection request (IR) will be raised to get
frame work approval & MEP clearance. The other side boarding will be commenced only upon receipt of written
approval for framework & MEP Clearance.
BOARDING FOR CEILINGS
After receiving approval from contractor/consultant for framing and the clearance from MEP contractor to board
then the boarding will be done. Boards will be installed with plaster board screws at 300mm C/C distance in the
middle- and 200-mm c/c at ends. The screw heads will be driven 2-3mm from the external face to allow for the
filling of screw heads.
INSULATION
The approved insulation material will be inserted inside the partition as per the wall key reference. Adhesive/pin
will be used to hold the insulation from slipping off from its position.
DOOR / WINDOW OPENINGS
For doors and window openings, as per the approved drawing and door opening schedule, frame work would be
done as shown in the shop drawing details.
CLEANING & HANDING OVER
When all the activities are completed, the area will be thoroughly cleaned. The area will then be inspected by the
site team. An inspection request will be raised (IR) to facilitate Main Contractor’s & Consultant’s inspection.
INSPECTIONS
Stage 1 inspection will be done when the framing of partition is done and one side boarding is completed, ready
for MEP to start their works.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
121
Stage 2 inspection will be done when the MEP have completed their part of the works and the insulation is fixed
and the partition is ready to receive the second side boarding.
Stage 3 and final inspection is done after the partition is boarded and the joints treated to receive the skim
coat/following trade works. Extent of area for one inspection may be divided into floor or zone or one
typical apartment/typical floor.
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND TOOLS
MATERIALS TO BE USED
A schedule of materials will be produced once a vendor is approved. Refer to the commercial offer.
EQUIPMENT & TOOLS
• Screw Machine
• Drill Machine
• Carpenter’s Saw
• Hand Cutter
• Chalk Line
• Hacksaw Frame set
• Plumb
• Measuring Tape
• Spirit level
• Scrapper 8”
• Scrapper 4”
• Scrapper 24”

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
122
11: -WET AREAS WATERPROOFING WORKS
WORK PREPERATION
▪ Materials shall be stored in a cool & dry place and avoid putting in direct sun light
▪ Materials shall be placed in a way to avoid the direct contact with ground soil.
▪ Materials shall not be exposed to fire or naked flames under any circumstance.
▪ Material Safety Data Sheet shall be followed for safety and handling recommendations.
▪ Material may store for 12 months from the date of manufacturing in a fresh and dry area in unopened original
packaging.
▪ Only a limited required quantity of Waterproof materials shall be brought to the site.
WORK PROCEDURE
SURFACE PREPARATION BEFORE WATERPROOFING:
▪ Surface preparation is the most important for liquid applied polyurethane waterproofing membrane before
application.
▪ The concrete surface shall be clean and free from contamination such as dust, oil, grease, organic growth, and
release agents etc.
▪ All loosely adhering particles such as rust, mortar, and cement laitance shall be removed.
▪ The surface would be cleaned by wire/stiff brushing and finally soft brushing or compressed air.
▪ The surface should be clear from standing water.
▪ Maximum up to 5% moisture contents are acceptable in the substrate.
▪ Pipes/sleeves, conduits, drains or any other penetrations shall be in place and protected with cement sand
mortar, prior to the application, chamfer shall be made on corners.
▪ All cracks and joints shall be sealed as per manufacturer recommendations, at least two days before
application.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
123
▪ The surface shall be prepared in such a way to allow mechanical key and to achieve maximum adhesion of the
coating to the substrate.
▪ Application of waterproofing system shall be done by experienced personnel and as per manufacturer
recommendations.
PRIME COATING:
▪ The concrete age should be at least 28 days to start waterproofing

▪ Screed is primed with Bituminous paint
▪ Bituminous coat shall be applied with brush or roller in a continuous uniform coating. Allow drying time for
minimum 3 hours to proceed for next coat.
APPLICATION OF THE MEMBRANE:
▪ The application of waterproofing membrane shall be done under competent personnel’s supervision and as
per manufacturer’s recommendations.
▪ Once prime coat is cured membrane torching shall be started.
▪ The membrane shall be rolled one next to each other and aligned.
▪ After aligning the membrane shall be rolled again and start torching.
▪ 100mm overlap shall be provided with another roll and torching should be repeated.
▪ Once the man torching is finished all overlaps shall be sealed thoroughly.
▪ The end lap shall be of minimum 150mm and staggered.
▪ The membrane will reach 5 cm above all protruding pipes and the membrane is wrapped around the pipes to
ensure all being watertight.
▪ After finishing the membrane protection, the area should be flooded 50mm below the protrusions and should
be kept flooded for 24 hours.
▪ After finishing the test and draining the membrane geotextile membrane is installed as a separation layer
before doing the screed.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
124
3.3. Plain Cement Concrete
After taking approval for related material and drawings, we will start the works as per
following:
3.3.1. Covering the soil by approved plastic sheet.
3.3.2. Casting the blinding Concrete under the raft foundation and pits.
3.4. Start applying the water proofing system.
4. Mat/Raft Foundation
4.1.1. The setting out for perimeter of mat foundation has to be carried out by surveyor
using the total station.
4.1.2. Formwork will be placed around the perimeter of the foundation by using plywood
materials with proper supported.
4.1.3. The surface of protection concrete should be cleaned before start of rebar
installation.
4.1.4. Installation of bottom and top layer of steel reinforcement for mat foundation
including the extra bars for walls and columns.
4.1.5. The bottom and top layer of Reinforcement steel should be inspected by consultant
before start of installing starter bars for RC walls and columns.
4.1.6. Demarcation of lines for Columns, RC walls and shear walls as per the approved
layout drawings.
4.1.7. Installation of start bars walls and columns.
4.1.8. Final inspection for mat foundation.
4.1.9. The concrete will be placed to correct level by use of a concrete pump.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
125
4.1.10. The concrete will be vibrated, levelled, and proper finishing.
4.2. Reinforcement Concrete Walls:
4.2.1. Demarcation of lines for Columns, RC walls and shear walls as per the approved
layout drawings.
4.2.2. One side of the formwork will be assembled, fixed and supported by scaffoldings.
4.2.3. Rebar installation for RC walls.

4.2.4. After rebar installation completed and inspect by consultant, the closing of second
shutter will be started.
4.2.5. The formwork will be propped and tied with through tie equipment.
4.2.6. Be certain that all wall ties are in place and secured.
4.2.7. The formwork will be aligned with suitable adjustable props.
4.2.8. The working and walkway platform systems must be fixed properly, as per
specifications and all applicable safety regulations.
4.2.9. Access to the working platform will be by ladder securely fixed to the platform.
4.2.10. Wall alignment and plumb inspection should be done by consultant.
4.211.The concrete will be placed to correct level by use of a concrete pump.
4.2.12The concrete will be vibrated and levelled properly.
4.3. Reinforced Concrete Slab and Drop Beams:
4.3.1. The leveling of slab should be done by surveyor using level instrument.
4.3.2. The Slab scaffolding system will be used under slab and beams

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
126
4.3.3. The formworks of drop beams will be started first, then the formwork of
slab.
4.3.4. After completed the formwork for beams and slab, the leveling inspect
should be done by consultant.
4.3.5. The rebar installation for drop beams should be done according to
approved drawing.
4.3.6. The rebar installation for slab mesh should be done according to approved
drawing.
4.3.7. Shutters will be placed around the perimeter of the slab.
4.3.8. Steel reinforcement inspect should be done by consultant.
4.3.9. The concrete will be placed to correct level by use of a concrete pump.
4.3.10. The concrete will be vibrated, leveled and finished properly.
The above method for constructing columns, walls, beams and slabs will be
adopted throughout the whole RC construction for structural elements.
Construction Activates
• Mobilization and site survey

• Soil investigation report
• Injection for cavities
• Excavation
• Compaction
• Backfilling
• Anti-Termite
• Waterproofing
• Foundations
• Retaining walls, columns and column necks
• Backfilling under slab on grade
• Slab on grade
• Columns and walls.
• Roof slab
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
127
Equipment’s
Company will be equipped in order to achieve high level of performance within a specific
time frame, and without neglecting a high-level quality of works. The following equipment’s
shall be provided:
• Excavators: 4 Nos.
• Dump Truck: 8 Nos.
• Mobile crane: 3 Nos.
• JCB: 2 Nos.
• Roller compacter (5 Ton): 1 No.
• Forklift: 1 No.
• Dyna: 2 No.
• Air compressor: 2 Nos.
• Tower lights: 6 Nos.
• Generators: 4 Nos.
• Concrete vibrators: 8 Nos.
• Welding Machine: 1 Nos.
• Bobcat: 3 Nos.
• Pickup: 2 Nos.
• Total station machine for surveying: 1 Nos.
• Steel bending machine: 3 Nos.
• Steel Cutting machine: 3 Nos.
• Small tools such as: Grinders, jack saws, circular saws, etc...
• Troweling machine: 3 Nos.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
128
X.2-: Black steel pipe Installation Procedure:
1: -Introduction:
The scope of this method is to define the procedure and inspection to be followed during installation
of Black Steel pipes at CEER- construction of prototype workshop project. This Procedure
shall insure that the installation either above ground or underground activities relevant to this
method statement to be completed in order manners, with each step being processed as per project
specifications, CEER standard related to installation and shop drawings.
2: -Scope of work:
Scope of this Procedure covers the following activities related to Fire fighting system for the
underground piping.
• Material handling, transportation & storage.
• Fabrication, joining method & preparation.
• Tool and Tackle.
• Installation procedure.
• QA/QC
• Field test procedure.
• Safety precautions.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
129
3: -DEFINITIONS
CL Client.
PM Project Manager.
SM Site Manager.
CM Construction Manager.
DE Discipline Engineer.
ITP Inspection and Test Plan.
QC Quality Control.
CI Certified Installer.
PQP Project Quality Plan.
PPE Personal Protection Equipment.
HSE PLAN Health Safety & Environment Plan.
4: -Material handling, transportation & storage.

4.1 Handling:
Black Steel products must be handled carefully to avoid any damage. Handling and transportation
of Black Steel is not restricted by temperature. This section lists the most important requirements
for handling materials before and after shipment and for storage.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
130
Nylon rope –with “C” Clamp Pulling Pipe “C”-

Clamp Arrangement on Roller Arrangement.
4.1.1 Loading:
• Pipes, fittings and prefabricated parts (spools) must be transported by suitable trucks
having flatbed floors.
• Forklifts may be used for handling provided that the forks are padded with a protective
material such as rubber or plastic.
• Check and remove any projections, nails or other sharp edges from the supporting floor
before each load.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
131
• Any contact of the truck or steel container with the Black Steel products shall be
separated by wood or rubber.
• Avoid direct contact between individual Black Steel products during transportation.
• Pipes and spools shall be lifted at least at two points by using nylon or canvas sling belts
with a minimum width of 100 mm. Use the largest spool diameter to balance the load
during the lift.
• Secure materials by wooden wedges and supports having a minimum width of 100 mm.
• Pipe supports shall be spaced at #3-meter intervals, minimal 1 m from the ends, the support
distance of nested pipes shall not exceed #2 meter.
• Tie the products in place by using either nylon or canvas sling belts.
• Chains and steel cables may never be used for lifting or fixation.
• Avoid support on sharp edges.
• Fittings can be properly transported in crates or on pallets.
• Flanges must be secured against sliding when stored on the sealing face.
• Pipe ends and machined surfaces must be protected.
4.1.2 Unloading
• Use nylon or canvas sling belts with a minimum width of 100 mm.
• Standard pipe lengths shall be lifted at minimal two supporting points.
• Unload one (packed) item at a time.
4.2 Storage
• In order to avoid damage to Black Steel products, the following recommendations shall
be respected:
• The “EVERFLOW” pipe can be stacked easily, with small precautions. The ground
area should be relative flat & dry, free of rocks or any other potentially damaging debris.
Place flat timber supports as four meters spacing, to facilitate placement &removal of
lifting slings around the pipe & stack the pipes on them. Ensure the stack will be stable for
condition such as high wind, unlevel storage area or other horizontal loads. Maximum
stack height is approximately three meters. Stacking of pipes larger than 1400 mm
diameter is not recommended. Rubber ring EPDM gaskets, being shipped separately,
should store in shade in their original packaging and should not be exposed to sunlight,
except during the pipe jointing. The gaskets must be protected from the exposure to grease
& oils, also from the solvents &other deleterious substances.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
132
• Pipe shall be stored out of the direct sunlight in a building or under a cover.
• Black Steel fittings shall be stored in their original manufacturer containers. Fittings shall
be stored in a safe area protected from the sunlight, solvents and mechanical stress or
damage.
• Adhesive for Black Steel piping shall be stored in an enclosure where temperature do not
exceed 38° C.
• Provide a flat and horizontal supporting surface.
• Do not store the pipes directly on the ground, onto rails or concrete floors.
• Ensure suitable supports such as clean, nail free wooden beams.
• Machined ends must be protected (e.g. with PE-foil).
• Bell and/or spigot ends may not touch each other.
• Pipes can be stacked economically by alternating the orientation of spigot- and socket end.
• Avoid pipe bending by locating supports between the layers of stacked pipe vertically
above each other.
• If pipe stored on a Rack or bearing boards, the supports shall be at least 75 mm wide.
Supports shall be spaced on 3-meter centers maximum with the first supports. 1.5 meter
from the end of the pipe.
• If loose pipes are stacked on each other the stack height shall not exceed 1.5 m. Adequate
side support shall be provided to prevent the slipping or rolling.
• Product diameters may flatten when stacked too high and/or too long, especially at elevated
temperature.
• Pipe stacks must have side supports (e.g., wooden wedges) to prevent rolling or slipping.
• Unprotected flange sealing faces shall not be placed directly on the ground or on
supporting floors.
• Spools shall not be stacked.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
133
• No other materials shall be loaded on top of Black Steel products.
• Do not drop, walk, or stand on Black Steel products.
• Avoid point loading due to careless stacking.
• Raw materials such as gaskets, adhesive kits, resin, hardener, woven roving and lubricants
shall be stored in the original packaging, in a dry environment, at recommended
temperatures.
• The shelf life of adhesives and resins must be respected.
• If any damage is observed due to transportation or during installation (e.g. excessive

scratches, cracks) contact the supplier. Never use damaged materials.
• Provide end cap/cover or end protector during pipe storage.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
134
1- Fabrication, joining system & preparation methods
1.1 Qualification of Black steel pipe Installers
• The installation of Black steel pipe shall be done by personnel trained in the proper
handling and usage of applicable materials and equipment prior to the start of installation.
• Training shall include familiarization and proper handling of materials, use of the
equipment and the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
• The first five joints performed by each certified installer to show techniques to be used in
the actual installation and shall be hydro-tested for integrity. These joints shall be
accepted as permanent joints if passes the hydro-test.
• Training certificate (or a proof of training) for installing Black steel pipe piping system
must be obtained from any Black steel pipe CEER approved piping manufacturer.
• Certificate shall be valid for one year or the duration of the project, whichever is the
farthest.
• Certification shall be submitted to CEER inspection department for review &
concurrence and a job clearance card (JCC) validity is for mentioned project only shall
then be issued to each qualified pipe and fitting installer.
1.2 Joining system and preparation methods
• Adhesive Taper Bell/Spigot Joint.

• Flange joint.
• Lamination joint (Butt & wrap joint).
1.2.1 Adhesive Tapered Bell/Spigot Joint:
• This adhesive bonded joint consists of a conical socket and conical spigot. For this adhesive
joint the following tools and materials are required:
• Gloves, dust mask, safety glasses, coverall.
• Shaving machine, Pencil grinding, Hand saw.
• Rubber scraper, pulling equipment, adhesive kit.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
135
• Heating blankets (Used to cure adhesive bonded joints).
• Measuring tape, marker, bench, cleaning brush.
• Summarized, the bonding procedure consists of cutting, shaving, cleaning and application
of adhesive, joining and curing. The installation time depends on proper preparation,
diameter and personnel. For specific and detailed information, reference is made to
manufacturers’ documentation.
1.2.2 Flange joint:
• Thermo plastic flanges when used, shall be of flat face. Mating flanges of different
approved material shall also be of flat face. They shall be assembled with full face
elastomeric gaskets. For a flange joint following tools and materials are required:
• Ring spanner, torque wrench (Bolt tightening procedure & Torquing shall be as per Project
Specs.
• Bolts, nuts and washers (Flat washers shall be used under nuts & bolts heads on nonmetallic
flanges).
• Gasket (Elastomeric gasket, 3 mm thick, and 50 to 60 shore a durometer hardness).
• It is of major importance that Black steel pipe flanges are aligned with the counter flange.
Excessive misalignment may cause high stresses, which lead to premature material failure.
Generally, flange joints facilitate connections with steel piping and allow easy assembly
and disassembly of piping systems. For specific and detailed information, reference is made
to manufacturers’ documentation.
1.2.3 Lamination (Butt & wrap) joint:
• The laminate joint is used to join plain-ended pipe sections. After preparation of the pipe
surfaces, a specific thickness of resin impregnated glass reinforcement is wrapped over a
certain length around the pipes to be joined; the thickness and the length of the laminate
are related to diameter and pressure. This joint requires following tools/materials:

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
136
• Gloves, dust mask, safety glasses, coverall.
• Shaving machine, Pencil grinding, Hand saw.
• Epoxy resin, woven roving, adhesive kit.
• Rubber scraper, pulling equipment.
• Heating blankets (Used to cure adhesive bonded joints). Measuring tape, marker, bench,
cleaning brush.
• The successive activities for a laminate joint are cutting, sanding, cleaning, mixing, fitting,
laminating and curing. For specific and detailed information, reference is made to
manufacturers’ documentation.
• Joint drying time before movement.
2- Installation Procedure of underground pipe:
7.1 Trenching and bedding:
The trench construction highly depends on the soil parameters, such as type, density and
moisture content. The construction of the trench should comply with following requirements
and recommendations:
• Top sides of the trench must be cleared from rocks or any other sharp/heavy materials.
• The trench foundation shall consist of a compacted sand layer without stones or sharp
objects.
• If trench de-watering is necessary no construction shall start until the design of the de-
watering system has been approved by CEER representative.
• The depth of the trench shall be dug deep enough to provide a minimum ground cover
above the top of the pipe, a ground bed of at least 150 mm in depth below the bottom of
the pipe.
• The width of the trench should be wide enough to allow for jointing, but any case not less
than OD+300 mm.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
137
• A bedding layer of clean sand 150 mm in depth is required for all trenches. The sand shall
be free from debris, rocks and compacted to at least 70 % relative density.
• Shoring shall be in accordance with Project construction safety manual.
• The space between the pipe and the trench wall must be 150 mm wider than the used
compaction equipment.
• Respecting pipe stiffness, operating conditions, soil characteristics and wheel load the
minimum burial depth is 0.9 m.
• Positioning components in the plant after positioning of the pipe system elements next to
the trench, these components have to be handled into final position in the trench.
• Small diameter pipe sections can be lowered manually using ropes, slings or light lifting
devices.
• Avoid unwanted objects falling into the trench during lowering pipe sections.
• Use nylon sling belts or special designed equipment during product handling.
• For non-metallic pipe line, the concrete encasement shall not be directly embedded with
piping system.
• The piping shall be protected by a reinforced concrete slab, or metallic casing.
7.2 Inspection before assembly:
• Each piece of Black steel pipe & fittings shall be examined for cuts, scratches, gouges,
kinks, buckles and ultra-violet (Sun) damage. Damaged lengths of pipe shall be cut out
and discarded. Damage fittings shall be discarded.
• Visual acceptance limits on allowable defect on Black steel pipe & fittings.
• Damaged pipe & fittings shall not be installed.
• Pipe & fittings shall be cleaned and dried before installation.
• Any adhesive or solvent cement that is beyond the stamped expiration date shall be
discarded.
• Complete removal of temporary sheeting (if used).
• Measure and record the pipes vertical diameter.
• Calculate vertical deflection

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
138
7.3 Assembly of Black Steel piping:
• Joint shall be restrained type (adhesive-bonded, butt-and wrap lamination joints or

mechanical type joints). These joints shall be assembled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s procedures for a specific application. Heating blankets shall be used to cure
adhesive joints. Actual I.D. - Installed Vertical I.D.
• Deflection % = ------------------------------------------------- x 100%
Actual I.D.
• Deflection checks should be done when the first installed pipes are backfilled to grade and
continued periodically throughout the entire project. Laying shall not get too far ahead
before verifying the installation quality. This will ensure early detection and correction of
inadequate installation methods. Pipes installed with initial deflections exceeding the value
given as above, shall be reinstalled so that the initial deflection is less than the stated values.
• Black Steel flanges when used, shall be of flat face. Mating flanges of different approved
material shall also be of flat face. They shall be assembled with full face elastomeric
gaskets 3 mm thick, and 50 to 60 shore A durometer hardness.
• Flat washers shall be used under nuts and bolt heads on non-metallic flanges.
• Flange pressure rating requirements, and bolt tightening procedures and maximum torque
requirements shall be in accordance with Black Steel flange manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• For trenches 2-meter-deep or less, pipe assembled next to the trench shall not be moved
within 3 pipe lengths of an uncured joint. The pipeline shall be lowered into the trench
progressively to avoid excessive joint angular deflection.
• For trenches deeper than 2-meter, pipe shall be assembled inside the trench.
• Ensure sufficient space around joints for proper alignment and joining.
Correcting Over Deflected Pipe: Pipes installed with initial diametrical deflections
exceeding the values shall be corrected to ensure the long-term performance of the
pipe by re-excavating the re-backfilling with proper case.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
139
7.4 Thrust Blocks:
RCC thrust blocks will be constructed (common thrust blocks for a ll pipes including product
lines) at the places of bends, tees & reducer. It is recommended to wrap a band of rubber
around the pipe prior to placement of any concrete. Rubber should protrude (25 mm) from
the pipe. Rubber thickness 10 mm & of 50 Durometer. Drawings as given by M/s GIL will be
used for construction. It is always recommended to cast thrust blocks as laying progresses.
Before the hydrotest all thrust blocks should be completed. It is always recommended to have
coupling on two edges when pipe comes out of thrust block.
Thrust block shall be placed between undisturbed earth and fittings to be restrained at every
change in direction for Black Steel with the following exceptions Thrust blocks are not
necessary for piping in gravity flow systems.
a) Thrust blocks are not required for 75 mm and smaller pipe size.
• Thrust block is required at pipe bends, tees and reducers and other change of direction.
• Cast in place concrete thrust block shall not be directly embedded Black Steel piping
& joints.
• HDPE pipe shall be protected from contact with concrete by Neoprene wrapping.
• At the edge where Black steel pipe & fittings enters or leaves a thrust block, it shall be
wrapped with Neoprene wrapping that will be protrude slightly from the block.
• Vibrators shall be kept clear of the piping while casting concrete thrust block.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
140
Immediately after thrust blocks we should provide one small pipe piece (1 to 2 mtr
length) with coupling on each side of block to take care of uneven settlement.
7.5 Road crossing
Precautions shall be taken to protect pipes, which cross underneath roads against the possible
consequences of traffic loads:

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
141
7.6 Steel casing shall be used for non-metallic piping under highway and rail roads. Direct burial
crossings are allowed only for piping system in water services with design pressure less than or
equal 150 psig.
7.7 The minimum depth of cover to direct burial shall be 1.8 meter from the top of the line to the
bottom surface of the asphalt. The minimum depth of the cover at the road shoulders is 1.2
meter.
7.8 “Sappco” 75 mm polystyrene insulation board & concrete slab shall be provided.
7.5 Concrete Encasement:

When pipes (or fittings) must be encased in concrete such as for thrust blocks, stress
blocks, or to carry unusual loads, specific additions to the installation procedures must be
observed
3- Hydrostatic testing & Inspection:
• Before the installed pipeline system is operational, the system has to be hydro tested to ensure
the integrity and leak tightness.
• Unless prevailing conditions or regulations requires full backfilling of the piping prior to the
hydro-test, underground pipe shall be partially backfilled with all joint exposed during the
hydro-test. The exposed joints shall be shaded from direct sun light, and the hydro-test shall be
performed so that the temperature of the Black Steel piping material or the temperature of the
test water does not exceed 40° C during the test period. If the test water is not available at or
below 40° C, the resulting hydrostatic test pressure shall be calculated at the available test water
temperature in accordance with the respective ASTM standards.
• Utility piping system other than Potable (drinking water and raw water) piping system shall be
hydro-tested with, well water or seawater.
• No adhesive-bonded Black Steel piping shall be pressurized until it has cured in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
• The test pump shall be placed on firm ground away from the piping. The pump and the piping
system (piping & equipment) shall be protected from over pressure by relief valve of adequate
capacity set at 5 % above the test pressure or a maximum of 170 kPa (25 psig) above the test

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
142
pressure for pressure piping systems. The relief valve shall be tested, dated and tagged prior to
the test.
• Sizing of the relief valves used for testing shall be in accordance with Project Specs
• The calibration intervals of pressure gauge shall not exceed thirty (30) days prior to the test
date. Stickers shall be applied indicating the latest calibration date.
• A minimum of two pressure gauges are required for the test system. One pressure gauge shall
be on the test manifold and the other on the highest elevation point of the system to be tested.
Their accuracy shall be within 5%.
• The calibration intervals of relief valve shall not exceed seven (7) days prior to the test date.
Stickers shall be applied indicating the latest calibration date.
• A test manifold arrangement with proof of hydro-test and NDT of welds. Test manifold
required revalidation of 36 month for each new project and for existing facilities
• Line whose joints have been backfilled shall be tested for 24 hours.
• Lines whose joints have not been backfilled or above ground shall be tested for 4 hours.
• During Hydro-test, all exposed pipes, joints, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully
examined for leakage.
• leaking pipe, joint and fittings shall be replaced in accordance with project specifications.
• The hydrostatic test shall be repeated after the repair of any defects until the system is provided
satisfactory.
4- Repair methods:
Permanent repairs of Black Steel piping, if required shall use one of the following Flanges and
flanged spool piece.
a) Spigot end adaptors for restrained gasketed joint Black Steel piping, a spool with spigot
ends, and bell-by-bell couplings.
b) Bell-by-bell couplings for flexible for adhesive bonded Black Steel pipe.
c) Field repair of Black Steel piping shall be made in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer’s pre-qualified repaired procedures.
5- Backfilling:
Most coarse-grained soils, (gravel, crushed stone, good clean murdrum and sand) are the
recommended bedding & pipe zone backfill materials. Gravels easier to compact than
sand and allows the pipe to be installed deeper, if required.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
143
Maximum Particle Size Pipe Diameter Maximum Gravel or Stone Size

More than 600mm 25 mm
3.1 Use of Native Soils:

Where native soil is used as pipe zone backfill, the following restrictions apply.
• No rocks greater than maximum gravel size
• No soil clumps greater than 2 times the maximum gravel size.
• No organic material.
• No debris (tires, bottles, metals, etc.).
• Clean sand is used for bedding and backfilling.
• When gravel or crushed stone is used as backfill, immediate backfilling after joining is
desirable, as it will prevent two serious hazards, floating of pipe and thermal movements.
• Floating of pipe can damage the pipe and create unnecessary reinstallation costs. This may
not be the case in this project as the water table is not encountered.
• Thermal movement caused by exposure to the elements can cause the loss of seal due to
movement of several lengths acting on one joint.
• Proper selection, placement, and compaction of pipe zone backfill are important for
controlling the vertical deflection and are critical for pipe performance
• The clean sand from the bottom of the pipe to 300 mm above the top of the pipe (sand
cover) shall be compacted by water flooding and hand tamping only. No compaction
testing is required in this section of the trench.
• Warning and identification metallic location tape shall be located slightly above the pipe sand
cover.
• Select field material shall be placed in lifts of 200 mm maximum in loose dept
• Each layer of backfill shall have a compaction grade of at least 85 % Standard Proctor
Density (SPD).
• Compaction is performed on both sides of the pipe, never across the pipe. A vibrating plate
with an impact force of 3000 N is used.
• Do not use heavy pneumatic hammers or vibrating equipment until having reached a
backfill level of 500 mm over the crown of the pipe.
• Attention must be paid so that the backfill material is not contaminated with debris or other
foreign materials that could damage the pipe or cause loss of side support.
• During backfilling, the granular material should flow completely under the pipe to
provide full support.
• A blunt tool maybe used to push and comp act the backfill under the pipe.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
144
• Proper backfilling should be done in 150 mm to 300mm lifts depending on backfill material
and compaction material, 300mm lifts will be adequate since gravel is relatively easy to
compact. Sand needs more compaction efforts.
• It is recommended that placing and compacting of the pipe zone backfill is done in such a
way as to cause the pipe to ovalize slightly in the vertical direction.
6- Correction Over –Deflected Pipes
Pipes installed with diametrical deflections exceeding the value in the above
table must be corrected to ensure the long- term performance on the pipe.
.1 Procedure
For pipe deflected up to 8% of diameter:

- Excavate down to the haunch area, which is approximately 85% of
the pipe diameter.
- Excavation just above at the sides of the pipe should be done utilizing
hand tools avoid impacting the pipe with heavy equipment.
- Inspect the pipe for damage. Damaged pipe should be repaired or
replaced.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
145
- Re-compact haunch backfilling, insuring it is not contaminated with unacceptable backfill

material soil.
- Re-backfill the pipe zone in lifts with the appropriate material, compacting each layer top
required relative compaction density.
- Backfill to grade and check the pipe deflection to verify they have not exceeded the initial
values in Table 9-1.
- For pipe deflected greater than 8 % pipe diameter: Pipes with over 8 % deflection should be
replaced completely.
Caution: Do not attempt to jack or wedge the installed over -deflected pipe into around
condition. This may cause damage to the pipe. If excavating multiple pipes, care must be
taken to not mound the cover from one pipe over the adjacent one. The extra cover and
reduction of side support could magnify an over- deflected situation.
7- Safety precautions:
d) All personnel involved will use necessary PPE as required.

e) In order to avoid irritation of the respiratory system, satisfactory ventilation should be provided. If a
system is hydro tested, adequate safety precautions must be taken, as a “safe test pressure” does not
exist. Any pressure in itself is dangerous.
f) Experienced personnel must operate the test equipment. Persons not involved in the test or inspection
are not allowed in the immediate area of the tested system. Only one person should be in charge
and everyone else must follow his/her instructions.
g) Do not change anything on the pipe system when it is under pressure. Leaking joints may only be
repaired after the pressure has been fully released.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
146
Hazard And Safety Measures
REQUIRED PERSONEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
SAFETY SAFETY EYE

HARD HAT MASK
SHOES GLOOVES PROTECTION
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
SAFETY CRANE
HARNESSES FIRST AID FIRE LIVE ELEC.
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
KIT EXTINGUISHER EQUPT.
HIGH OVERHEAD
.2 Cutting, shaving and sanding
When cutting or grinding Black Steel materials the following personal protection is
necessary to protect eyes and skin:
h) A dust mask covering nose and mouth.

i) A pair of safety goggles.
j) Gloves and coverall.
k) Close overall sleeves with adhesive tape to keep the dust out.
l) Wear protective clothing to protect the body.
m) Machining should be carried in a well-ventilated room or in open air.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
147
.3 Environment
n) Always clean up the work area. Black Steel and cured adhesive are chemically inert and do not
have to be treated as chemical waste. Waste shall always be disposed in an environment
friendly manner.
o) This literature should only be used by personnel having this literature should only be used by
personnel having specialized training in accordance with currently acceptable industry practice.
Variations in environment, changes in operating procedures, or extrapolation of data may cause
unsatisfactory results
❖ X- 3: - METHOD STATEMENT FOR INSTALLATION OF PVC CONDUITS IN

CONCRETE SLAB & CONCRETE WALLS: ( (Code No.: MS-EL-01)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method statement covers the site installation of the PVC Conduits in floor slab & concrete
wall and the requirements of the checks to be carried out. This procedure defines the method used
to ensure that all conduit and associated accessories: bends, tees, couplers, reducers and all
accessories associated with systems installed are correct and acceptable.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
• Approved Shop Drawings

• Approves Material Submittals
ASSOCIATED WORKS
• Power & Lighting Wiring
RESPONSIBLE PERSONNEL
• Construction Manager
• Project Electrical Engineer
• Site Electrical Engineer
• Site Supervisor
• Technicians Qualified in the trade
METHOD OF PRE-INSTALLATION

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
148
• Ensure that approved material required to carry out work will be available.
• Prior to commencement of work, area and access will be inspected to confirm that the site is
ready to commence the work
• All relevant documentation and material applicable to particular section of works will be checked by
site engineer before commencement.
• Physical verification of material will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores.
• The site engineer / supervisor will give necessary instruction to tradesman and provide
necessary construction / shop drawings.
• The site engineer / supervisor will also check that tools and equipment available are complying to
contract requirements.
• The site supervisor also explains tradesman regarding safety pre-cautions to be observed
METHOD OF INSTALLATION
1. Supervisor will ensure that all the grid lines and datum lines are marked by the surveyor and all
the route and marking are based on the datum line provided by the surveyor.
2. Supervisor will carry out a site survey and marks the route of conduits as per approved
drawings. In the event that there are any discrepancies or difficulties in executing the work,
these will be drought to the notice of engineer for corrective action.
3. PVC conduits of correct sizes will be used for concealment of electrical services in the concrete
walls & slabs.
4. Cast in conduits are of high impact and of approved make and conform to BS 4607 Part 1, 3 &
5, BS 6099 Parts 1 & 2 and BS 5490.
5. The minimum conduit size used will be 20 mm dia. The conduit size selection is completely
as per technical specifications, local statutory authority regulations and as per approved shop
drawings.
6. Wherever conduit to be installed in vertical walls the run of conduit will be kept straight,
7. The bending of conduits will be done using proper bending springs and the straight lengths of
conduits are coupled using standard couplers glued using good quality PVC sealant.
8. All the cast in conduits will be firmly bended to the steel rebar’ and conduits is placed
sandwiched between rebars so that future drilling of anchors should not damage cast in
conduits and the installed wires.
9. Near DB end conduits are terminated on to thick thermal placed under concrete so that
future alignment of conduit will be easier.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
149
10. Wherever cast in conduits to be terminated on to back boxes standard conduit accessories
approved in the material submittal will be used.
11. All the due care will be taken to ensure non-blocking of cast in conduits during concreting and
contractor’s representative will be present at the throughput of concrete period to ensure no
conduits gets damaged during casting of concrete slabs.
12. The guide line for conduit size selection will be as per the following table.
Size of Conduit
Cross Sectional
Maximum number of cables drawn
Area of
20 25 32
Conductor
1.5 mm2 s 7 12 -
2.5 mm2 5 9 12
4.0 mm2 3 6 9
6.0 mm2 - 5 8
QUALITY
• QCE along with Project Engineer and Site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed
as per contract specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request shall be submitted to Consultant after completion of installation of cable tray
before pulling of any wires
SAFETY
• Work will commence as per safety regulations laid down in the contract specification and project
safety plan.
• Proper safety harness to be used and secured, if required.
• All personal protective equipment shall be used as appropriate according to the nature of job.
• Housekeeping shall be of good standard and all cut lengths and debris shall be removed.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
150
HAZARD & SAFETY MEASURES REQUIRED PERSONEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
151
❖ X – 4: - Method Statement G.I & PVC Conduit on Surface (Code No. MS-EL-02)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method statement covers the site installation of the G.I. & PVC Surface Conduiting for small
power and lighting and requirements of checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

• Approved method statement for wire pulling and earthing.
APPLICABLE LOCATION
• Surface GI Conduiting is generally installed in Electrical rooms and plant rooms, lift motor
rooms, sub- stations and outside buildings, partially open ceilings, service areas.
• PVC Conduits are used only the area covered by false ceiling.
• Installation of GI surface conduits shall be done in accordance with the project
specifications and drawings.
MATERIALS
• GI conduit and accessories – galvanized conforming to BS 4568-part 1 class 4.

• Metal boxes enclosing electrical accessories confirms to BS 4662.
EQUIPMENT / TOOLS
• Measuring tape
• Drilling machine
• Pipe bending machine
• Threading machine with die-set
• Helical bend springs
• Hammer & Hack saw
• QA / QC Engineer

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
152
• Site Supervisor.
• Electrician
• Helpers
METHOD OF STORAGE
• Conduit shall be lowered not dropped to the ground.

• Conduit shall be given proper support at all times and shall be stacked on flat surface.
• Manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed as applicable.
• Timber support shall be placed at an interval of one meter.
• Conduits shall be protected from direct sunlight and moisture to avoid deterioration.
• Conduits shall be stored with proper end caps.
• Conduits shall be stacked size wise.
• Proper materials including GI conduits and accessories are withdrawn from stores according to
approved shop drawing and good engineering practices.
• Physical verification of materials will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores
and also prior to installation.
• Prior to commencement of work, area and access will be inspected to confirm that site is
ready to commence the work.
• All relevant documentation and material applicable to particular section of will be checked
by site supervisor prior to commencement of work.
• The site engineer/ site supervisor will give necessary instruction to Electrician and provide
necessary approved construction/ shop drawings.
• The site engineer/ site supervisor will also check that proper tools and equipment are available
to carry out the work and are in compliance with contract specification
• The site supervisor also explains the electrician regarding safety precautions to be observed.
1. Supervisor will carry out a site survey and marks the route of conduit as per approved drawing.
In the event that there are any discrepancies of difficulties in executing the work, these will be
brought to the notice of project engineer for corrective action.
2. Standard length of conduits shall be cut to the required length.
3. For G.I. conduits threaded shall be done using a threaded machine and correct size die-set.
Threaded will be kept to a minimum when showing from coupling and boxes.
4. Cold galvanizing paint is applied to the threaded part of G.I. conduit just before fixing.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
153
5. Where required conduits of size 20mm and 25mm shall be bent to the required radius using
manual bending machine. Manufactured bends are used for conduits size 32mm and 50mm.
6. Conduits are fixed to the building fabric by means of distance bars saddle with appropriate metal
screws and plugs. A space of 3mm minimum shall be maintained between conduit and the
building surface.
7. Check all mechanical connections are internally smooth for pulling wiring in no burrs or sharp edge
will be allowed.
8. The route of this steel conduits is restricted to horizontal and vertical runs except for the areas
were approved to follow the line of an architecture.
9. Conduit support are fixed in regular interval as mentioned in table:
Spacing of Conduit Supports
Maximum Distance Between Support (M)

Cond
Rigid Steel Pliable
ui
Horizo Verti Horizo Verti
t ntal cal ntal cal
20 1.75 2.0 0.4 0.6
S
25 iz 1.75 2.0 0.4 0.6
32 e 2.0 2.25 0.6 0.8
(
10. Ensure the
m conduit installations are in straight line.
11. Conduitsmshall be fixed so that no water enters, if it is not practicable a 3mm hole is drilled at the
lowest )point of the conduit to drain the water out.
12. All terminal boxes are marked on the appropriate location (i.e., wall or ceiling) as per
approved shop drawing and fixed with metal screws and plugs. Suitable braze bushes are
used where conduit enters the boxes to avoid any damage to the wires.
13. Wherever necessary draw wires shall be pulled into conduit runs and kept at pull boxes for future
use.
14. Any rusting of steel conduits occurred during construction shall be removed.
QUALITY
• QCE along with Project Engineer and Site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed
as per contract specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request shall be submitted to consultant after completion of installation of cable tray
before pulling of any wires

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
154
SAFETY
safety plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
155
❖ X-5: - Method Statement Cable tray & Ladders (Code No.: MS-EL-03).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
• This method statement covers the site installation of the cable tray & ladders and requirements of
checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
• Approved method statement for cable laying and earthing
APPLICABLE LOCATION
• Cable Tray system is generally installed in electrical rooms, plant rooms, service corridors as
detailed in approved shop drawings.
MATERIALS
• Cable Trays and associated fittings (Hot dip galvanized conforming to BS 1449 part 1 BS 729)
• Support system (Bracket work, Support Rod, Anchors etc.)
EQUIPMENT / TOOLS
• Grinding machine
• Electrician hand tools

• Site Supervisor
• Electrician & Helpers
METHOD OF STORAGE
• All material received at site shall be inspected and ensure that the material is as per approved
material submittal.
• Any discrepancies, damages etc. Shall be notified and reported for further action.
• Materials found not suitable for the project are removed from site immediately.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
156
• Cable tray and ladders are store in horizontal position on flat surface with timber support placed
at an interval of one meter and covered to protect from moisture and direct sunlight.
• Proper materials including cable trays, ladders and associated fittings accessories are
withdrawn from stores according to approved shop drawing and good engineering practices.
• Physical verification of materials will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores
and also prior to installation.
• Prior to commencement of work, area and access will be inspected to confirm that site is
ready to commence the work.
• All relevant documentation and material applicable to particular section of will be checked
by site supervisor prior to commencement of work.
• The site engineer/ site supervisor will give necessary instruction to Electrician and provide
necessary approved construction/ shop drawings.
• The site engineer/ site supervisor will also check that proper tools and equipment are available
to carry out the work and are in compliance with contract specification
• After the civil clearance to proceed with MEP installations, ensure the area is clean and ready to
start the works.
• Mark the trays and ladders routes as per approved shop drawing; ensure these are of horizontal &
vertical runs only.
• Co-ordinate the routes, levels and ensure there are no clashes with other services.
• Maintain enough clearance for cable pulling and any access for future maintenance.
• Mark the support, fix the threaded rod supports with appropriate metal plugs, and then fix the ‘L’
angles
• / Slotted ‘C’ channels with nuts. A maximum of 1.2 M distance is maintained between the supports
to avoid sagging of trays and ladders. Provide adequate supports for bends, branches and offsets.
• Cut the standard length / ladder to required length with appropriate cutting tools. Use mushroom
head screws on the cable route to avoid the cable insulation damage during pulling.
• All the fittings shall be from manufacturer.
• Expansion provision shall be provided at all the building expansion joints.
• Manufacturer’s instruction for installation shall be followed.
• Approved fire sealant shall be provided wherever the installation crosses the fire rated walls.
• Sleeves shall be provided at all the wall crossing.
• Copper earth link shall be installed at every joint to maintain continuity throughout the installation.
• Ensure the installation of tray / ladders are neat, in straight line. Trim the extra projected supports.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
157
• All sharp edges and burrs shall be cleaned for pulling the cables.
• Treat the cut & Drilled part with zinc paint rich paint immediately after cutting and before installation.
• Provide identification labels as specified to identify the service.
• Inspection shall be offered from QC verification.
• The entire installed cable tray to be protected from damages.
QUALITY
• QCE along with Project Engineer and Site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as per
contract specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request shall be submitted to Consultant after completion of installation of cable tray before
pulling of any wires
SAFETY
• Work will commence as per safety regulations laid down in the contract specification and project safety
plan.
• All personal protective equipment shall be used as appropriate according to the nature of job

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
158
❖ X-6: -Method Statement Cable Trunking System (Code No.:MS-EL-04).

SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method statement covers the site installation of the cable Trunking system and requirements of checks to be
carried out. This procedure defines the method used to ensure that all cable Trunking and associated fittings:
bends, tees, couplers, reducers, flanges, relevant bracket work, supports rods, anchors and all accessories
associated with integrated cable management systems installed are correct and acceptable.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

•
EQUIPMENT / TOOLS
• Measuring tape
• Grinding machine

• Site Supervisor
• Electrician
• Helpers
• Proper materials including cable trays, ladders and associated fittings accessories are withdrawn from
stores according to approved shop drawing and good engineering practices.
• Physical verification of materials will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores and also
prior to installation.
• Prior to commencement of work, area and access will be inspected to confirm that site is ready to
commence the work.
• All relevant documentation and material applicable to particular section of will be checked by site
supervisor prior to commencement of work.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
159
• The site engineer/ site supervisor will give necessary instruction to Electrician and provide necessary
approved construction/ shop drawings.
• The site engineer/ site supervisor will also check that proper tools and equipment are available to carry out
the work and are in compliance with contract specification
• Work will be carried out as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

• Supervisor will carry out a site survey and marks the route of cable trunking as per approved drawings.
• Dedicated cable trunking of size as approved in the shop drawing will be provided for lighting/ power and extra
low voltage (ELV) services.
• For connection of PVC/GI conduits to GI trunking installation details shown in approved shop drawing will be
followed.
• Cable trunking will be in accordance with BS 4678 Part 1 and made of galvanized steel.
• Adjoining lengths of trunking will be correctly aligned and the two sides at right angles to the cover will be
joined to the corresponding side of the trunking piece by means of an internal fish plate connector.
• Standard manufacturer’s fittings will only be used except when necessitated by site conditions, the consultant
engineer’s approval will be obtained.
• All the joints of trunking both at straight lengths or accessories will be fitted with a copper bonding strap and
will be secured by screw, nuts and washers. The earth bonding links will be external to trunking and will make
good contact with the trunking and continuity will not depend on the contact through screws. Jointing screws
will be installed with exposed thread and nut/spring washer external to the trunking.
• Trunking fixing centers are not to exceed those listed below and only in case of 50x50 trunking there will be a
center fixing only. All other sizes will have two fixing at appropriate fixing centers as given below
Distance between Supports

Cross Sectional Area of Steel Trunking
Trunking
Horizontal Vertical
1. Upto 2500 mm2 1.20 M 1.5 M
2. Above 2 5 0 0 u t 1.20 M 1.8 M
p o
m m 2 a n d 6000
3. mm2 Above 6000 u t 2.3 M 2.5 M
p o
mm2 and 10000
mm2

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
160
4. More than 10000 mm2 3.0 M 3.0 M
• All trunking accessory fittings will be secured not more than 150mm from the jointing points.
• Additional support will be provided if required.
• Cable tray will be inspected before pulling the wires.
• Trunking will be installed in such a way that adequate clearance will be provided for access to wiring.
Covers will be installed on to the exposed side of trunking. Where trunking installed horizontal plane with
lid on to bottom side then conduit connection will be done from top and side.
• Earth continuity will be available throughout the trunking including bends and offsets.
• Cable trunking crossing the fire rated walls will be provided with fire protection barriers of approved
materials according to civil defense regulations and will be by main contractor’s scope.
• Any cuts made to the trunking will be debarred for rough surface and treated with cold galvanized paint.
• The supervisor in charge and QC inspector will monitor the activities to ensure that all components
indicated in the approved construction drawing installed as per the contract requirements and manufacture
recommendations.
QUALITY
• QCE along with Project Engineer and Site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as per
• Inspection Request shall be submitted to Consultant after completion of installation of cable tray before
pulling of any wires.
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
161

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
162
❖ X-7: - Method Statement Installation of Earthing System:(Code No.: MS-

EL-05)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method statement covers the site installation of the Earthing System
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

MATERIAL
• Earth rods, Earth rod clamps, Earth bars and Disconnecting Links

• Site Supervisor
APPLICABLE LOCATION
•Basement, Ground level, Roof, Mechanical & Electrical rooms at all levels. All mechanical services
exposed will be bonded to the earthing system.
• Prior to commencement of work, area and access will be inspected to confirm that the site is ready to
commence the work
• All relevant documentation and material applicable to particular section of works will be checked by site
engineer before commencement.
• The site engineer / supervisor will give necessary instruction to tradesman and provide necessary
construction / shop drawings.
• The site engineer / supervisor will also check that tools and equipment available are in compliance to
• The site supervisor also explains tradesman regarding safety pre-cautions to be observed.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
163
1. As per approved drawing identify location of earth pit.

2. Co-ordinate with civil contractor for installation of earth pits with approved fixing details.
3. The copper earth rod will be driven manually in earth. After achieving a minimum depth of approximate 3
meters, the earth resistance will be measured, If the earth resistance value is not satisfactory, the
process of adding further earth electrodes shall be continued till expected resistance value of less than 1
ohm is achieved.
4. Adjacent earth electrodes shall be spread to at least 1 length of one of the driven electrodes (6 mtrs) to
achieve result of less than 1 ohm. Inspection request to be issued.
5. The earth pit shall be installed after completion of installation of earth rods and a clear gap of 50 mm
shall be maintained between top of earth electrode and earth pit cover. The top of earth pit shall be in
level with the finished floor level in the area.
6. The PVC sheathed single core earthing cables of specified sized as per shop drawing shall be laid
between the earth pit and the earth bar inside the building and terminated with approved type lugs/
clamps.
7. The interconnection of earth pit shall be as per approved shop drawing.
8. All earthing connections shall be made after cleaning the surface thoroughly and tightness checks for
each connection shall be performed.
9. Continuity of earth connections shall be checked for every link in the network by QA Engineer, Issue
Inspection request.
10. The down-stream earthing connections from earth bars shall be made to the panel boards, frames and
other equipment as per approved shop drawing.
11. Along with all power cables one earth cable of size as per approved shop drawing shall be laid and it
shall be terminated to the wart bat of the panel/ equipment which it feeds, in addition with local
earthing from earth bar.
12. On completion of total earthing system and testing, inspection request will be submitted for approval to
design consultant.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
1. The metallic frame of all electrical equipment shall be connected to the nearest earrh bar with a
specific size of earth cable.
2. The earthing continuity of cable tray and trunking shall be maintained with earth links on each joints of
cable trays and trunking shall be connected to earth bar with specified size of earth cable.
3. Flexible earth cable shall be used for the earthing connections when there is possibility of expansion/
contraction and also where vibrating equipment is installed.
4. The metallic water lines shall be bonded by an earthing cable of size not less than 6mm².
5. All bonding connections shall be checked for correct tightness and cleanliness.
6. Inspection Request will be issued for signature of consultants.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
164
QUALITY CONTROL
• In general, it shall be ensuring by site engineer that product manufacturer’s recommendations are followed
and shall be monitored by QA/QC Engineer. However, the following points shall be ensured, in particular;
o The appropriate and approved material is used
o Skilled labor is used for application of the material.
o Inspection request shall be raised for consultant’s inspection.
o QC inspection shall be carried out as per the installation checklist and manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY
plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
165
❖ X-8: - Method Statement Installation of Light Protection System: (Code No.: MS-EL-
06)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method statement covers the site installation of the Lightning Protection System.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

MATERIAL
• Material used for the system is as per BS 6651: 1992

• Site Supervisor
commence the work

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
166
1. The dedicated rebar is selected from the pile cap and the cable is clamped with the rebar by CR730
clamp and connected to the dedicated rebar of the selected column as per approved shop drawing.
2. Fix G.I. Box 160x80x35 at 500mm from SSL (for testing purpose) on the column. The box shall be tied
with reinforcement rod and the box cover will be flush with the finish wall.
3. The dedicated rebars of the column as per shop drawing shall be connected to a 70 sq.mm PVC cable
using CR 705 Furse clamp for the extension till it reaches the roof.
4. Expanded polystyrene shall be applied to seal the hole within the concealed disconnect link box and tied
with steel binding wire to prevent concrete / cement entering into the box.
5. Prior to concreting, earth continuity between reinforcement rods and dedicated rods shall be checked with
a.d.c. ohm meter.
6. In each tower final test sheet shall be offered to consultant for witness and sign-off.
7. Once rebar has reached up to the height as shown in the drawing for bonding, the work shall be
coordinated with Civil Contractor. This is applicable in locations as shown in design drawings.
8. At roof G.I. box 160x80x35mm shall be fixed at 500mm from SSL with fixed of PC116 furze earth point
with pre-welded joint. The box shall be tied with reinforcement rod and box cover shall be flush with finish
wall 25x3 copper tape run on roof perimeter as shown in shop drawing bonded with nonferrous bonding
point. All mechanical i.e., AHU’s, pole structure, petal structure etc. shall be bonded with 25x3 copper
tape.
9. 25x3 copper tape shall be fixed on top of parapet wall at 1m intervals as shown in shop drawing with
Non-ferrous bonding point.
10. Inspection shall be offered for QC verification in stages.
11. Inspection request shall be raised al least 24 hours in advance for consultant’s inspection, prior to
concrete pour/ cover-up work.
12. Final inspection shall be carried out collecting all the data from previous inspection requests and finally
verified for the anticipated results.
QUALITY CONTROL
• In general, it shall be ensuring by site engineer that product manufacturer’s recommendations are followed
and shall be monitored by QA/QC Engineer. However, the following points shall be ensured, in particular;
o The appropriate and approved material is used
o Skilled labor is used for application of the material.
o Inspection request shall be raised for consultant’s inspection.
o QC inspection shall be carried out as per the installation checklist and manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
167
plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
168
❖ X-9: - Method Statement Pulling & Testing of Electrical Wires Conduits and Trunking:
(Code No.: MS-EL-07).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method statement covers the onsite Pulling and Testing of Electrical wires in PVC/GI conduits and trunking for
small power and lighting and the requirement of checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

• Approves method statement for installation of PVC/GI conduits, trunking and earthing
• Authority regulations
GENERAL
Electrical wires shall be enclosed in conduit, trunking and withi n short lengths of flexible conduit for final
connections to the various items of the equipment. Installation wires will be carried out as per the project
specifications and drawings and authority regulations.
MATERIAL
• PVC insulated wires confirming to BS 6004 and IEC-60227 rated at 450/750V
• Heat resisting cables confirming to BS 6007

• Site Supervisor
commence the work

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
169
• The site engineer / supervisor will also check that tools and equipment’s available are complying to
• The site supervisor and QC engineer will ensure that Calibrated Megger is available at site for testing.
1. Where in single core PVC insulated cables are enclosed with in the conduits, core will be taken that no
damage will occur to the cables during their installation.
Where conduits are to be installed in damp conditions or outd oors rubber sealing gaskets will be
installed behind besa/ adaptable box lids.
2. Number of cables to be pulled into the conduit will be as per TABLE 1 & 2. The sum of all factors for the
cables, as given in TABLE 1 shall not be greater than the factor for the conduits as given in TABLE 2.
TABLE 1 FACTORS FOR SINGLE CORE PVC INSULATED CABLES ENCLOSED IN A CONDUIT
CONDU S O FACTORS
I F
CTOR FOR SHORT RUNS FOR LONG RUNS
Z
CABLES E OR RUNS WITH
(mm2)
1.5 27 BENDS
22
2.5 39 30
4.0 58 43
6.0 88 58
10 146 105

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
170
TABLE 2 FACTORS FOR THE CONDUITS

Type of run conduit Straig Run with 1 Run with 2
size (mm) ht run 32 bend 2025 bends 2025
Length of 2 (20 ( (1400 232 5 900 232 4 81
run m 425 8 ) 8 1 5 6 8
3 4 8 1400 2 4 857 2 4 75
6 0 6 4 6 3
m 6 0 7 8 3 2 0
4 0
2 50 900 2 4 818 2 3 69
0 0 0 7 3 2
m )
8 1) 5 6 1 8 2
5 2 5 878 2 4 783 1 3 64
6 4 6 3 3 8
m 7 0 4 4 9 5 3
6 2 4 857 2 4 750 1 3 60
8 0 4 2 6 8
m 7 8 3 2 8 3 0
7 2 4 837 2 4 720 1 3 56
0 7 3 2 2 3
m 6 7 2 0 6 1 3
8 2 4 818 2 3 692 1 2 52
3 5 2 4 9 1
m 5 6 1 8 5 9 9
9 2 4 800 2 3 667 1 2 50
6 3 3 8 9 2
m 5 5 0 7 4 7 0
10 2 4 783 1 3 643 1 2 47
0 2 4 3 9 5
m 4 4 6 5 4 6 4
11 2 4 764 - -
4 2 9 8 1 0
m 3 3
12 2 4 748 - -
8 3
m 3 2
13 2 4 735 - -
3 4
m 2 1
8 6
NOTE:
• Short run means a straight run not exceeding 3m long. Long run means straight run exceeding 3m long.
▪ The conduit factors shown in brackets shall only be used in conjunction with the corresponding cable factors
for short runs.
▪ For cables and or conduits not indicated in Table 1 & 2 the number of cables drawn in to a conduit shall not
exceed space factor of 45%.
• Before pulling wire into cast in conduits, ensure that nylon draw ropes have been installed and the
containment system has been found to be clear of any obstruction.
• The use of lubricants, grease, graphite or talc will not be used to assist the drawing of cables.
• Cables of different circuit categories will not be mixed with in the same conduit.
• While preparing cable ends, ensure that conductor stands are not damaged and the strands are twisted
together with pliers to ensure neat and firm connection.
• While removing the conductor insulation, ensure that no excess exposed conductor shall be left.
• Each circuit will incorporate a separate protective conductor selected in accordance with IEEE regulations
(TABLE 54 G latest). Earth continuity will be maintained according to authority’s regulations.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
171
• Final sub circuits will be installed in continuous lengths and no joints will be permitted along the cable run. The final
sub circuits will be wired in the loop – in method and all terminations are made will be accessible.
• Neutral conductors of lighting will be wired direct to the lighting points and will not pass through switch boxes.
• Where PVC insulated sheathed cable enters or exit the trunking system the hole will be lined up with rubber
grommets or bushes.
• Where cables are enclosed in the same trunking and connected to different distribution boards, they shall be
distinguished by separating the cables by insulating taping at an approximate interval of 2.0M and also with an
identification labeling indicating circuit type and reference.
• Color identification sleeve to denote phase, circuit reference and/or terminal reference and/or terminal number
to which it is connected coding of wires will be followed.
QUALITY CONTROL
In general, it shall be ensuring by site engineer that product manufacturer’s recommendations are followed and shall
be monitored by QA/QC Engineer. However, the following points shall be ensured, in particular;
• The appropriate and approved material is used
• Skilled labor is used for application of the material.
• Inspection request shall be raised for consultant’s inspection.
• QC inspection shall be carried out as per the installation checklist and manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
172

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
173
❖ X-10: - Method Statement Commissioning Management: (Code No.: MS-EL-08)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement' 'describes the methodology regarding planning, organizing and executing, methods to be
adopted for Commissioning Management and Verification of MEP services installed at Jumeirah Beach
Residence-Sector 4-A Specialist Commissioning validation (duly approved by the consultant) to e appointed to
monitor, witness and verify all testing and commissioning of the MEP services.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
• Project Specifications Volume III, Division 15, Section: 15010,15100,15400,16005,16010,16050

• Approved shop drawings (latest revision)
• Approved material submittals
• Local authority regulations (DEWA, CIVIL DEFENCE, etc.)
GENERAL
The MEP Services that will be subjected to Commissioning management and validation procedures include the
following:
• Water supply systems
• Air conditioning and ventilation systems
• Ventilation Systems
• Drainage system
• Domestic water supply system
• Firefighting sprinkler & novic systems
• LV Power & Small power
• Emergency lighting & control systems
• Fire detection and alarm system
• Compressed Air system
• CCTV camera system
• Earthing and lighting protection
• Fire alarm system
• Public addressable system
• Access control system
MATERIAL
Approved submittals for
- Specialist for testing and commissio'1mg.
- Approved method statements for commissioning.
EQUIPMENT
Calibrated Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment as outlined in Method Statements.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
174
• Specialist Commissioning Team

• Project Engineers (HVAC/ELEC./PLUMBING)
• Manufacturer's authorized representatives (where required)
• Construction In-Charge.
• Site Engineer/Site supervisor.
• QA/QC Inspectors.
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Tradesmen
• Helpers
COMMISSIONING MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW OF COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITY:
1. MEP contractor shall submit prequalification documents for Commissioning Management and
Verification to the Consultant for approval.
2. Upon approval of a Specialist Commissioning Company, regular site meetings will be convened, in order to ensure
that commissioning of each element proceeds in a logical, systematic and cost-effective manner from
commissioning design appraisal through installation, site testing, commissioning performance verification, whilst
critically satisfying the requirements of overall project program
3. Site Meetings, should discuss the following clearly defined activities:
• Design Commission ability Review
• Commissioning Method Statements
• Commissioning logic diagrams and Programs.
• Format of final record documentation.
• Construction installation appraisal and progress assessment.
• Progress on Pre-commissioning verification
• Progress on verification of all commissioning works
• Verification of integrated performance testing.
• Review of record documentation
• Test documentation collation.
4. It will be ensured that Specialist Commissioning project team will be experienced enough to
carry out commissioning verification activities.
5. Prior to any commissioning and testing taking place, it is essential that a detailed and flexible
commissioning plan be available. The initial aim of this stage of works will be to ensure that all necessary
provisions have been made in the construction design to allow commissioning to be completed to the
requirements of the specification and within the confines of the construction program.
6. Upon appointment of a specialist commissioning agency, a detailed report will be produced
indicating the following:
• The equipment and system facilities required.
• The on-site testing procedures required.
• Testing and commissioning risk assessments.
• The handover procedures and final witnessing requirements.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
175
COMMISSIONING PLAN
1. Working method statements for each element of the pre-commissioning, commissioning and performance
testing will be made available and submitted to the Consultant for approval during planning phase, prior to the
commencement of any testing. A commissioning Management and Verification matrix is attached and will be
followed for this purpose.
2. For Progress monitoring purposes a Commissioning program will be developed and submitted.
3. Throughout the construction period of the project, the specialist commissioning team will undertake detailed
appraisals of the installations, to ensure that the systems contain all necessary features that are required for
commissioning and performance of the systems, as well as health and safety considerations for those
carryout the commissioning works.
COMMISSIONING PHASE
1. During pre-commissioning and commissioning stages of the project the role of specialist commissioning
team is out lined as follows:
2. Ensuring that all necessary pre-commissioning has been carried out to the agreed methods and
standards, and is approved by the verification team. This must be completed prior to the startup of all
plant and equipment
3. Ensuring that the commissioning and testing works are carried out in accordance with
agreed methods and standards as per the commissioning plan.
4. Verifying and collating record documentation for all commissioning and testing operations.
5. Reporting / leasing to ensure that commissioning progress is incorporated into overall completion
monitoring process and handover.
6. Commissioning Verification system will require specialist-commissioning contractor to ensure that all tests
offered for demonstration have been completed successfully and full documentation is available fully.
COMMISSIONING, TESTING AND VERIFICATION
Following clause describes the main elements of test validation PE/CME witnessing to be undertaken.
AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILLATION
• Pre-commissioning.
• Air Balancing (distribution balancing)
• Performance and function testing of AHD's
• Performance and function testing of Fans.
• Performance and function testing of Car Park Ventilation system
PLUMBING SERVICES
• Pre-commissioning
• Plant and function performance (Verify Statutory acceptance)
FIRE FIGHTING SPRINKLER AND NOVEC SYSTEM
• Plant function and performance

• Alarms & monitoring interfaces

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
176
LV DISTRIBUTION AND SMALL POWER
• Installation test (Include Meagering)

• Commissioning tests (Verification of switching control and indication)
• Performance testing (verify statutory acceptance)
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
• Device address and operation tests

• Performance testing (verify overall cause and effect testing)- Civil Defense approval required
MISCEEOUS ELECTRICAL SERVICES
• Air craft warning system (by nominated specialist contractor by client)

• Intercom system
• Telecom / Data system
• Diesel Generator
• Emergency lighting (verify function and statutory demonstrations).
• Earthing / bonding & lightning protection (static verification).
• Security system (by nominated specialist sub-contractor by client).
• Swimming pools
HANDOVER PHASE
Client and Statutory Demonstrations

Upon satisfactory completion of commissioning of a particular system or sub-system, the Specialist
Commissioning Team will issue the relevant test documentation to the MEP Contractor for onward issue to the
consultant and statutory authority as necessary.
COMMISSIONING AND TEST DOCUMENTATION

The Specialist commissioning agency/ Equipment supplier will provide .test pro-forma for all site wide operations
including pre-commissioning, balancing and testing of air and water systems, and testing of electrical distribution
system. The same will be submitted along with method statements.
Following successful witness, the final approved commissioning documentation, as approved by the specialist-
commissioning agency, will be collated and submitted to main contractor for onward submission t o consultant.
MEP contractor for incorporation into final project O & M manuals will retain a copy of it.
MEETINGS REPORTING AND QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEM
MEETINGS
The following meetings would form part of the specialist commissioning team role throughout the course of works
on site: -

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
177
• Site progress meetings- if requested by job clients for coordination purposes.

• Commissioning meetings-attended by in-charge Specialist commissioning team.
REPORTING
Monthly progress report shall be prepared by the Specialist commissioning I agency in addition to individual work
tests, performance demonstrations etc.: -
Detailed elemental report on progress. Updated
commissioning activity schedule.
QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEM
The Specialist commissioning team in association with MEP contractor will provide a detailed breakdown of each
element of commissioning for each service. A database will be maintained, showing the status of testing and
commissioning process, giving all levels of site management a clear and concise breakdown status.
Specialist commissioning team, for comments on site installation and testing will provide site observation reports.
Testing and commissioning documentation will be compiled monitored in generated database format.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
178
❖ X-11: - Method Statement BUS BAR TRUNKING SYSTEM (Code No.: MS-EL-09)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the ons ite installation and testing of Bus bar Trunking systems with relevant
accessories and the requirements of checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
•
• Project Specifications Volume III, Division 16, Section: 16010, 16050, 16477
• Manufacturer’s installation instruction
• Local authority regulations (DEWA, CIVIL DEFENCE, etc.)
GENERAL
Bus - bar trunking system generally includes standard straight lengths, special straight lengths (wherever
necessary), elbows (vertical and horizontal), offsets, T -joints, standard component tap off boxes, feeder boxes,
fixing elements, flanges, support systems and end connections etc; various items of the equipment. Installation of
bus ducts will be carried out as per the project specifications and drawings and DEWA regulations.
EQUIPMENT
• Torque wrenches
• Scaffoldings
• Nylon slings
• Measuring Tape
• Calibrated Megger
• Project Engineers
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Tradesmen
• Helpers

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
179
• Bus bars complete with accessories received at site will be inspected as per approved material submittal
and manufacturer's approved isometric drawings for completeness and physical damages if any. In case of
any damage, the same should be brought to the notice of supplier for suitable resolution/replacement.
• Physical verification of materials will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores and also
prior to installation. Manufacturer’s test certificates received will be reviewed and submitted to consultant for
approval.
commence the work
• The site engineer / supervisor will also check that tools and equipment’s available are in compliance to
1. Bus bar installation will be carried out as per approved bus bar lay out/isometric drawings. Before
starting the installation of bus bar system, proper coordination shall be done with other trades.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions attached will be followed for handling, storage, installations and
testing.
3. Determine the position of the bus bar supports as per approved construction drawings and mark them on
concrete surfaces.
4. Fix the support as per manufacturer’s installation instructions.
5. Provide sufficient horizontal and vertical clearance from walls and ceilings to provide easy access to
joints, both for permanent installation and possible future removal of section when required.
6. For vertical bus bars, ensure that no joints or expansion joints are installed in the slab thickness.
7. Bus bar will be leveled and mounted at the correct height.
8. Elbows, offset and tap off boxes etc., will be installed as per approved construction drawings and as per
manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Cable gland plates for tap off boxes and fixing elements shall be installed as per the recommendations of
the Manufacturer and as per approved schematics.
10. Cable gland plates for tap off boxes and fixing elements shall be installed as per the recommendations of
the Manufacturer and as per approved schematics.
11. Bus bar should be installed so that the orientations of phase from the front side will be GRY&N. The
cabling from tap off shall be from side or bottom.
JOINT ASSEMBLY
• Ensure that all contact surfaces are clean and free of containments.
• Align the bus bar ends of adjoining sections, verifying proper phase alignment, and slide the sections together
(use joints pullers, if required).
• Expansion joints if required as shown in approved construction drawings will be installed as manufacturer’s
instructions attached.
• After completing the jointing of assemblies, torque the joints bolts to the specific value.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
180
• Where a bus bar extends through a inside block. Shear walls, an internal transverse barrier supplied by
manufacturer will be installed.
• Bus ways to be properly covered during the installation to protect them from moisture or other types of
contaminants.
• All the floor/wall crossing of bus bars is to sealed with approved type of fire sealant.
• Bus bar enclosure continuity shall be ensured with proper bounding and connected to the main earthing grid
through return paths al LV Panel end.
TESTING
After complete installation of Bus bar systems, Bus bars are subjected to following tests as recommended
by Manufacturer:
• Checking of all joint connections for tightness.
• An Insulation Resistance test, carried out with a calibrated Megger insulation tester, to ensure that system is
free from short circuits and grounds (phase-to-ground, phase -to- neutral and phase-to- phase). It should be
noted that readings vary inversely with the length of run and width or number of bars per phase.
• Verify that system phasing matches the busway phasing before reconnecting all connections to switchboards.
• Continuity tester will be used to check electrical continuity of SS/QCE phase bus bars, neutral bus bar and
earth bus bar.
QUALITY CONTROL
• QCE along with Project Engineer and site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as per the
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main PE/SS/QCE Contractor/Consultant during the following
stages
• After completion of installation of bus ducts for a particular area/section.
• For testing of Bus ducts.
SAFETY.
plan.
• Hoisting and handling of bus ducts will be carried out as per manufacturer’s installations.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
181

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
182
❖ X-14: - Method Statement for MV Transformer: (Code No.: MS-EL-11)
a. FOUNDATION OR STEEL STRUCTURE PREPARATION PROIR INSTALLATION.

• Foundation to be cleared from any obstacles in order to install the transformer.
• Clean anchor bolts and channels (if its installed) prior to installs the transformer.
• A pair of safety goggles.
• Gloves and coverall.
• Close overall trench areas if exist with a wooden or steel materials to facilitate the work around transformer.
• Wear protective clothing to protect the body.
b. ENVIORNMENT.
• Always clean up the work area. MV & LV Transformer Shall be kept clean all the time from Dust and any water, so we
all always keep it covered until the construction at site to be over. Waste shall always be disposed in an environment
friendly manner.
• The Transformer should be kept on a platform or on its foundation and to be precaution against any mechanical
damage.
c. MATERIAL HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION & STORAGE:
• Loading, unloading and shifting of transformer will be done by certified machinery (Crane or boom truck), Operator,
Rigger & skilled workers.
• Substation is loaded on the trailer with the help of certified mobile crane having lifting chains or Belts to be equipped
and attached to the lifting points.
• Transport the transformer to the installation place, unload the transformer in clean & even place and make sure that,
there should not be any blockade in installation
• Shift the transformer to the installation location with the help of certified heavy-duty lifting fork-lift, ballet trolley and very
carefully place on the its place whether it will be a concrete foundation, or it will be a steel support.
• Transformer to be put on any temporary Platform if the foundation is not ready and to protect the main tank and the
Transformer body from damage and paint damage.
• Push the transformer with the help of skilled worker to its original installation location.
• Remove all the waste material from the trench and substation room, clean the transformer & remove the dust particles
with air blower, cover the transformer with plastic sheets to protect from dust entering the Termination Boxes.
• In order to avoid damage to transformer products, the following recommendations shall be respected.
• If any damage is observed due to transportation or during installation (e.g. broken Pushing’s, oil leaking,) contact the
supplier. Never use damaged materials.
• Certificate shall be valid for one year or the duration of the project, whichever is the farthest.
• Certification shall be submitted to SBG inspection department for review & concurrence and a job clearance card (JCC)
validity is for mentioned project only shall then be issued to each qualified pipe and fitting installer.
d. MATERIAL CONTROL:
• Electrical QC Inspector shall carry out an inspection of the material when the material arrives in the warehouse.
• The Electrical inspector shall ensure the material conforms to the project specifications, Purchase Order and relevant
SAUDI Engineering Standards.
• Electrical QC Inspector should make sure that the material is properly stored and protected from any physical damage.
• Termination Electrical materials and equipment’s should be tested as per Saudi Engineering series prior to be used.
• Perform Cable continuity and Insulation testing as part of the material receiving for Medium voltage and low voltage
cable.
• Perform jobsite acceptance (continuity and insulation resistance testing) as part of the material receiving for
transformer.
e. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
Tools are divided in two main categories: non-consumables and consumables.
• Boom Truck or Trailer
• Portable Generator

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
183
• Electrician hand tools.

• Calibrated megger & multimeter.
• Hydraulic cable cutter & crimping tool.
• Step ladders.
• Torque wench.
• Power Supply: Single-phase & 3-phase power where it is needed.
• Fork lift and mobile crane to move equipment.
• Ohm meter, clamp meter, insulation tester. Earth tester, continuity tester etc.
• Chipping hammer.
• Lifting Belts.
• Heat Gun.
•
f. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE OF MV & LV TRANSFORMERS:
• All installation process to be carried out by following ANSI C57.12.11 Guide for Installation.
• Materials Receiving RFI to be raised in order to proceed Field Installation process after approval.
• Loading the transformer to the trailer using the carne or any approved lifting equipment and drive it to final location to
be unloaded on the foundation or steel structure.
• Install the transformer on the foundation and steel structure by fixing the main body to the Anchor bolts which is
installed on the foundation or fixing the bolts on the steel structure.
• Installation Visual Inspection to be done in order to proceed with Cable termination and connection to the transformer.
• Site pre-Commissioning subject to start after Installation and Cable Connection.
g. Testing.
• Work execution, material approval and test shall be monitored, witnessed and recorded.
• Verify that all accessible electrical connections shall be tightened and torque test as per manufacturer’s
recommendation
• Verify that all finishing damages shall be touch up with the adequate painting system.
• Verify manually that all circuit breakers and other operation mechanisms to operate free.
• The MV power Cable and control connections shall be torque test with certified and calibrated torque‐type screw driver
or beam‐type torque wrench or ratchet‐type torque wrench.
• Before the panel Energization, ensure that all the affected Departments shall be notified, all load insulation devices are
open and locked and tagged.
h. Tests. Following Tests Shall be conducted...

• High Pot Test and Polarization Index.
• Winding Insulation resistance and Polarization index.
• Insulation resistance tests shall be conducted by a 5 KV megger (Insulation tester) for transformers above medium
voltage level and 1Kv tester for low voltage Transformer.
• The tests shall be conducted on both the H.V. and L.V. windings to ground and between the H.V. and L.V. windings Ref
to Table 1 for further information. Ensure the following before taking the measurements.
• Keep all men and materials away from the transformer and barricade the transformer for run authorized entry.
• No external cables are connected to the bushings.
• All bushing porcelains are clean and dry.
• Transformer main body shall be connected to the main grounding grid.
• RATIO TEST ‐ A check shall be made on the ratio of the transformers at each tap. The test may be made using a turns
ratio tester or by voltage injection. This test should also be carried out on all taps of the transformers.
• VECTOR GROUP CONFIRMATION CHECK ‐ A check shall be made on the vector group to confirm they are as per
nameplate.
• WINDING RESISTANCE shall be measured using Micro Ohm meter for fist. Mid, and las tap.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
184
i. MV & LV TRANSFORMERS OPERATION

• After Completing the Testing and Commissioning of Transformers and all the Related FRI’s Approved we will go to
Make the Energization Package in Order to Communicate with Proponent in order to Start Energize the Subsystem and
then the related Systems Following the Transformer Like Switch Racks, Panels Boards, Motor Control Center. Etc.…

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
185
❖ X-13: - Method Statement for LV switchboards: (Code No.: MS-EL-12)
a. Pre-Installation activities.
• Ensure that the Site Engineers, Supervisors, & QC team verify the site condition prior to execute the Panel
Boards activities.
• Review and check the approved drawing prior to execute the activities.
• Make sure that Electricians are qualified to do the LV cable laying and termination.
• Make sure that the foundation or steel support is inspected and ready to install the Panel Boards.
b. Below Grade Panel Boards activities.
• Contractor shall perform the excavation of trench, LV Cables laying, Cable Protection Cable Backfilling, and
Conduit Installation for any Equipment or system Connection, Gland Installation, Termination and Connection to
the final terminal or connection point, Testing LV Cables activities.
c. Above Grade Panel Boards activities.
• Contractor to make the foundation/ Skid of the Panel Board Ready and anchor bolts or drop-in anchor installed.
• All cable to be protected against Mechanical Damage by using Liquid tight or Rigid Steel conduits.
• Using a Crane to load the v on trailer or by using a boom truck
• Transport the Panel Board from the storage area or laydown area to work place.
• Using a crane or boom truck unload the Panel Board to its foundation
• Connect the incomer and outgoing cables.
• Make Torqueing for all the bolts to make sure there no loose connection.
• All above procedures lead to pre-commissioning.
d. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT.
• Pickup Truck or Crain
• Boom Truck or Trailer
• Hand / Power Tools
• Portable Generator
• Knockout Puncher
• Manual or hydraulic cable cutter
• Manual or hydraulic cable crimper
• Drill Machine
• Utility Knife
• Calibrated Torque Wrench.
e. Panel Board Test.
• Cable Continuity and Cable Continuity and Insulation Testing (Installed Cable). Consultant shall be notified on
start of this activity for each process system or plant area.
• Power Cable Termination Torque Testing Consultant shall be notified on start of this activity for each process
system or plant area.
• LV Panel board - Pre-Energized and Functional Testing.
• For Energization LV Panel board - Non-Hazardous Pre-Energization Visual Inspection for Energization
Certificate Quality Document Review and Energization Certificate Review and all associated Quality Records.
• Energized LV Panel board Explosion-Proof Pre-Energization Visual Inspection for Energization Certificate.
• Quality Document Review and Energization Certificate Review EIL and all associated Quality Records.
• Energized Panel board Remote Control, Indication, and Alarm Testing Instrument loop checking as applicable.
• Energized LV Panel board Non-Hazardous Pre-Commissioning Final Visual Inspection consultant shall be
notified on start of this activity for each process system, Project area, room, and building.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
186
• Energized Panel board Quality Document Review and Mechanical Completion Certificate Review and all
associated Quality Records. Hold points prior to certified completion of the LV system
f. HAZARD and SAFETY MEASURES

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
187
❖ X-14: - Method Statement for Mechanical (HVAC) Installation:( Code No.: MS-AC-01).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the onsite installation of HVAC duct work and accessories and the requirement of checks to
be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
• Project Specifications
• Duct work standard DW 144
GENERAL
HVAC duct f work generally includes all types of Supply Air Duct, Return Air Duct, Fresh and Exhaust Air Duct and their
accessories such as duct elbows, offsets, transformation pieces branch off pieces, tee connections, access doors, Fire
Dampers, Volume Control Dampers, Sound Attenuators, flexible ducting and insulation.
EQUIPMENT
• Portable grinding Machine
• Drilling Machine
• Sheet metal cutting tools and bender
• Spirit level
• Scaffolding
• Duct erector hand tools
• Testing instruments
• Air Compressor
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Pipe fitters / Welders
• Helpers
• Ensure that approved material required to carry out work will be available
commence the work

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
188
• Prior to Leak testing, Site Engineer will ensure that Calibrated test kit is available and are in good
condition.
1. Prior to commencement of work coordination will be done with other
2. Determine the position of duct supports as per approved construction layouts and specification.
3. Prepare and fix the duct supports as per approved construction drawing and specification.
4. Any cut edges of angles, channels or threaded rods will be touch up with Zinc rich paint.
5. Transport the Duct pieces and fittings to final location.
6. Pre-assemble the Duct pieces '`and ' fittings as per approved shop drawing ensuring the alignment.
7. Acoustic insulation will be carried out wherever required.
8. Raise the duct work on to the supports ensuring that each length is aligned with preceding length as per
dimensions shown on approved shop drawings.
9. Approved duct sealant shall be applied on the joints. Any excess sealant so that the joint left in clean
and tidy condition.
10. Ensure that duct work is clean and no tools/ construction debris exists within duct work before
proceeding to next length.
11. All open ends of the duct works shall be temporarily sealed with polythene sheets/ply wood before
leaving the job site to prevent moisture and dirt.
12. Ensure that all accessories like Volume control dampers, Fire dampers, Access doors, Test points,
Sensors are installed in accordance with approved shop drawings.
13. Install Sound Attenuators according to approved shop drawings
14. Installation of duct work (complete with accessories) shall be checked before applying insulation at
joints.
15. Leak test will be carried out for duct work as applicable in DW144 standard.
16. Insulation of duct work will be completed as per manufacturer's recommendations (copy-enclosed).
17. Ensure the duct surface is clean and dry before applying any insulation material.
18. Ensure the thickness of insulation as per approved shop drawing.

19. Ensure that all edge joints are closely butted and ends are flush and seated properly.
20. Apply ALUGLASS Tape (Self Adhesive Aluminum Foil Laminated on Glass fabric) at Joints of insulation.
21. Ensure the continuity of vapor barrier and other protective coatings on insulation surface as well as at
connections.
22. Ensure firm adherence of insulation around_ ducting by using approved adhesive between sheet metal
and Insulation material.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
189
23. Where insulated duct work passes through fire rated wall/partitions the gap between sleeve and duct
work shall be filled with approved fire barrier.
QUALITY CONTROL
• QCE along with Project Engineer and site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as
per the contract specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant during the following stages
• After completion of installation before testing
• Leak testing of duct work
• After complete insulation.
SAFETY
plan.
HAZARD and SAFETY MEASURE

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
190
❖ X-15: - Method Statement Installation and insulation Ducting and Duct Accessories
(Code No.: MS-AC-02).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the onsite installation of d u c t i n g and duct accessories and the requirement of
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
• Duct work standard DW 144
GENERAL
GI Spiral round ducting generally installed in for FCU return air, and supply air as shown in approved shop
drawing includes spiral round ducting, fittings such as elbows, tees, couplings, reducers, collars etc, volume
control dampers, flexible ducting insulation.
EQUIPMENT
• Portable grinding Machine
• Sheet metal cutting tools and bender
• Spirit level
• Scaffolding
• Duct erector hand tools
• Testing instruments
• Air Compressor
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Pipe fitters / Welders
• Helpers
commence the work
• Check all the GI Spiral ducting received are pre-fabricated with tag number labeled and received at site in
accordance with specifications and correct dimensions as per approved drawings.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
191
1. Prior to commencement of work coordination will be done with other services.

2. Determine the position of duct supports as per approved Shop drawings and coordinated layouts and
specification.
3. Prepare and fix the duct supports as per approved construction drawing and specification.
5. Transport the duct pieces and fittings to final location.
6. Before assembly ensure that all ducts are free from dirt.
7. Check that ducts and fittings are undamaged. This is especially important with regard to the rubber
gaskets.
8. Assemble the Duct pieces and fittings as per approved shop drawing ensuring the alignment.
a. Push the fittings into the duct right to the stop. Turning the fitting a little makes insertion easier.
b. Fasten fittings to the duct with self-tapping screws or centered pop rivets.
c. Distribute the screws or pop rivets evenly around the circumference, ensuring the rubber gaskets
are not damaged i.e., placing the them approx. l0mm from stop and end of the duct. In the event of
incorrect assembly, holes caused by screws or pop rivets must be sealed.
9. Raise the duct work on to the supports ensuring that each length is aligned and leveled with
preceding length as per dimensions shown on approved shop drawings.
10. Ensure that duct work is clean and no tools/ construction debris exists within duct work before
proceeding to next length.
11. All open ends of the duct works shall be temporarily sealed with polythene
Sheets/ply wood before leaving the job site to prevent moisture and dirt.
12. Ensure that all accessories like Volume control dampers, Test points, Sensors are installed in
accordance with approved shop drawings.
13. Installation of duct work (complete with accessories) shall be checked before applying insulation at
joints.
14. Insulation of duct work will be completed as per manufacturer's recommendations (copy enclosed).
a. Ensure the duct surface is clean and dry before applying any insulation material. Apply thinner /cleaner
where necessary to make the area grease free.
b. Apply glue recommended by manufacturer with an even spread on complete surface of insulation sheet.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
192
c. Once the glue on the sheet gets dry, apply glue on the GI duct and let it dry, then stick the sheet on one end
and slowly press the sheet on the duct from one end to the other so as to ensure that the sheet sticks on
the GI duct completely avoiding air bubbles between the insulation sheet and GI duct.
d. In the areas where the GI duct comes into contact with the duct hangers, rigid support is recommended
such as wood. The wood piece should be glued onto the duct hanger and layer of rubber to be glued on the
wood, so that there is no direct contact between the duct insulation and the wooden piece thus preventing
tearing of the duct insulation. In case the positioning of the support is available in advance, wood by itself
can be used. In this case it has to be made sure that insulation will be glued to the wood from both sides
accordingly.
15. Where insulated duct work passes through fire rated wall/partitions the gap between sleeve and duct work
shall be filled with approved fire barrier.
QUALITY CONTROL
QCE along with Project Engineer and site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as per the
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant during the following
stages.
• Mock up installation of GI spiral round ducting before and after insulation.
• After complete insulation.
SAFETY
plan.
• Housekeeping shall be of good standard and all cut lengths and debris shall be removed

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
193
a. HAZARD and SAFETY MEASURES

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
194
❖ X-16: - Method Statement Installation of Fan Coil Unit (FCU): Code No.: MS-AC-04.
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the ons ite installation of FAN COIL UNITS (FCU) and the requirements of
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Fan Coil Units generally be installed in locations shown in drawings, serving apartments mechanical -rooms etc. both
yin concealed areas and exposed supplying cold dehumidified air-conditioned space.
EQUIPMENT
• Spirit Level
• Scaffolding
• Hand tools of Trads men
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Pipe fitters
• Helpers
commence the work

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
195

2. Determine the position of Fan Coil Unit on the ceiling and mark the location of supports as per
approved shop drawing.
3. Prepare and fix the Fan Coil Unit supports as per approved construction drawing and specification.
4. Ensure that Vibration Isolators of approved make, type and model are installed.
5. Install the Fan Coil Units by lifting it slowly by using suitable lifting aids (if necessary). Manufacturer's
recommendations shall be followed during installation.
7. Fan Coil Units will be connected with Piping Connections complete with valves and accessories as
indicated in approved shop drawing.
8. Ensure that Dielectric unions are used for piping connection to FCU's.
9. FCU Valve packages shall be provided with drain pan as shown in approved shop drawing
10. Ensure that drain connections are made with adequate slope with running trap.
11. Complete the duct connections to Fan Coil Units as shown in approved shop drawing.
12. Complete the Electrical power connection includes earthing a all respects as per approved electrical
drawing and Manufacturer's recommendations.
13. Ensure that adequate space for maintenance of fan coil units and valve package is available.
14. Install the thermostat control units as per shop drawing/ Architectural PE/SS/FM drawing.
15. Complete the BMS interfacing with DDC controllers as per approved BMS drawings.
QUALITY CONTROL
contract specifications a n d approved submittals.
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant.
SAFETY
• Work will commence as per safety regulations laid down in the contract specification and project safety plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
196
• HAZARD & SAFETY MEASURES REQUIRED PERSONEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
197
❖ X-17: -Method Statement Installation of Fans (Code No.: MS-AC-05).

SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the onsite installation of FANS and the requirements of checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Fans generally are installed in locations shown in drawings. Types of fans used in mainly classified as Toilet
extract fans (TEF), Kitchen extract fans (KEF), Refuse fans, Lobby pressure relief fans (LRF), Stairwell
pressurization fans (SPF), Car park exhaust fans, Jet fans etc.
EQUIPMENT
• Spirit Level
• Lifting Equipment (Cranes)
• Scaffolding
• Hand tools of Trades men
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Pipe fitters
• Helpers.
• Check the name plate details of Fans as per approved shop, drawing/schedules and material submittals
before installation.
commence the work

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
198

2. Make sure that fans are free from damage and all internal components are complete and in good
condition.
3. Fan assemblies will be transported to the nearest point of erection. Care will be taken while handling the
units to avoid damage/distortion.
4. Manufacturer's recommendation will be followed for installation of fans.
5. Fans will be installed in location as per approved shop drawing.
INSTALLATION OF FLOOR MOUNTED FANS

1. Ensure that builders work foundation is provided as per approved shop drawing.
2. Ensure the level of Foundation by spirit level.
3. Check the size and orientation of foundation for its suitability to install the fans.
4. Fix the Vibration Isolators to foundation as per approved submittal.
5. Install the Fan assembly mounting brackets on vibration Isolators as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
6. Complete the ductwork / damper installation as per approved shop drawing.
INSTALLATION' OF IN ''LINE MOUNTED FANS(CEILING SUSPENDED)

1. Fans can be mounted either horizontally or vertically as per approved shop drawing.
2. Support the fans by using threaded rods to the fan casing as per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide vibration isolators (approved type) as per manufacturer's recommendations on the mounting
brackets/holes.
4. Complete the ductwork/damper connection as per approved shop drawing.
5. Ensure that sufficient space is available to allow removal of access covers and subsequent removal of fan
and motor assemblies etc. as per manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Complete all electrical connections as per approved electrical drawing and manufacturer's terminal
diagram.
7. Earthing shall be provided as per requirements.
8. Complete the labeling of electrical connections as per schematic drawings.
9. Fan rotation shall be checked before duct connection.
QUALITY CONTROL
• QCE along with Project Engineer and site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as per
the contract specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant.
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
199

• All lifting operations shall be monitored by Safety Officer.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
200
❖ X-18: - Method Statement HVAC Testing, Adjusting & Balancing (Code No.: MS-AC-08).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the onsite Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC systems installed. This
Method statement to be read in conjunction with project commissioning plan.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
The HVAC system testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all environmental
systems in a building to produce the design objectives. This process Includes:
• Balancing air and water distribution systems
• Adjusting the total system to provide design quantities.
• Electrical measurements.
• Establishing quantitative performance of all equipment.
• Sound measurements.
The above procedures are accomplished by

• Checking the installations for conformity to design.
• Measuring and establishing the fluid ' quantities of the system as required to meet design specifications.
• Recording and reporting the results.
EQUIPMENT
• Bolometer
• Anemometer
• Micromanometer
• Pitot Tubes
• Tachometer
• Sound Meter Tester
• Water gauges (duel/single)
• Multimeter/ Tong Tester
• Hand tools of Trades men
• Commissioning Manager
• Seder (Specialist commissioning agency) personnel.
• Equipment/ system supplier (as applicable)

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
201
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen.
• Electrician
• Helpers
• Ensure that As-Built marked up drawings are available reflecting the actual site installations.
commence the work
• Commissioning Manager along with representatives of Sender will carry out Visual inspection of all installations
in order ensure that installations are in accordance with approved documents? In case of any discrepancy
observed the same shall be brought to the notice of the Project engineer and Consultant for resolution of same.
• Ensure that all instruments are calibrated and are in proper working condition.
• chemically cleaned. And all the pipe work is reinstated to original positions.
• Accessibility of all valves, VCD's will be ensured before start of commissioning. Where required temporary
access shall be provided for VCD's.
1. Testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems installed will be CM/SP/PE carried out as per the
specialist commissioning procedures attached by specialist commissioning agency.
2. Commissioning Manager ensures that all manpower deployed by Specialist agency is
competitive and sufficient to complete the TAB work.
3. All the test documentation will be recorded on the test sheets attached to the Specialist
commissioning procedures.
4. Manufacturer's Representative will be associated for start equipment and as required.
5. Status of Testing and commissioning will be maintained and reported periodically to Project
Managers. Consultant.
6.
QUALITY CONTROL
• QCE in coordination with Commissioning Manager and Project CM//PE/QCE Engineer notify to
Consultants for testing and commissioning of HVAC systems area wise for witnessing the same.
• QCE in association with Commissioning Manager and Project Engineer will ensure that all the
test documentation is complete and signed off.
SAFETY
safety plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
202

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
203
❖ X-19: - Method Statement for Method Statement Concealed Drainage Piping: (Code No.: MS-PL-01)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" provides the detailed account of the installation and testing of concealed drainage pipes in
toilets from Level 1 and up in all towers.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Installation of drainage pipes within the concrete slab in toilets, garbage rooms, balconies etc. from level 1 and up in
towers, shall be done in accordance with the project specifications and drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Spirit Level, Water Level

• Measuring tape, Nylon twine
• Pipe cutter, Hack saw, Files, Trimmers etc.
• Marking tools, Plumber’s tool box, Hammers
• Site Engineer/Site supervisor
• QA/QC Inspectors
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Plumbers
• Helpers
1. Approved materials shall be purchased in accordance with the approved shop PE / SS drawings and For
Construction Contract Specifications.
2. Proper materials including pipes and fittings are to be selected and used PE / SS according to approved shop
drawing and good engineering practices.
3. Adequate stock of material, tools and tackles, testing equipment and PE / SS consumables along with
sufficient man power shall be arranged to carry out the work.
4. Site supervisors are to be provided with the civil work schedules for the following works:
a. Shuttering works
b. Bottom Reinforcement fixing works
c. Top Reinforcement fixing works and
d. Concreting works

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
204
5. Site supervisors are to be provided with the finished floor level as well as structural floor level by the civil
surveyors at site before starting marking of pipe line route on shuttering.
6. Ensure that the location of masonry walls, concrete walls, 'shafts, grid lines etc are marked by the main civil
contractor on slab shuttering.
7. Thickness of plastering, tiling etc. with tile modules and thickness of screed and flooring are to be
finalized and produced at site before execution of piping work.
8. Ensure that the construction power and water for testing of pipes are provided by the main contactor near to the
work place
9. Safe and tidy work place, clear access to the work place, modes to shift material, tools and tackles etc. are to
be ensured.
10. Civil works including reinforcement schedules should be designed to accommodate the drainage pipes with
proper slope and level.
PIPING:
1. Main Contractor's Surveyor to mark the locations of Floor gullies, sanitary fittings etc as per approved shop
drawing and revised architectural drawing on shuttering before putting the reinforcement. Information
regarding completion of marking to be given to VL Supervisors etc.
2. Main Contractor to fix bottom reinforcement and inform VL supervisors. VL to install all pipes and fittings as per
approved shop drawing and as follows:
▪ Ensure that the pipes are cut square before they are placed inside the reinforcement.
▪ Use cleaning fluid on both surfaces to be joined. This removes all dirt and machine.
▪ release agents for the chemical solvent weld. Failure to do this can result in joint failure.
▪ Apply solvent cement evenly over mating surfaces of both pipe and socket.
▪ Insert pipe into socket with slight twisting action to full socket depth.
▪ Surplus cement should be removed with a cloth.
▪ The joint should be firm enough to handle in 5 minutes.
▪ Pipe runs are to be placed and tied to reinforcement considering proper slope and gradient as per approved
shop drawings.
3. Pipes and fittings which are push fit types are to be connected as follows:
▪ Lubricate the pipes cut in square and chamfered as well as fittings with rubber lubricant and push fit to full
socket depth.
▪ Withdraw pipe 5 mm on waste system and 10 mm on soil system to allow for expansion.
▪ Soil fittings with spigot ends should be inserted into sockets to depth marks engraved on spigot.
▪ This procedure automatically allows for expansion.
▪ Pipe runs are to be placed and tied to reinforcement considering proper slope and gradient as per approved
shop drawings.
3. Main Contractor to install Top reinforcement in the slab taking adequate care to ensure that drainage pipes /
fittings are not damaged / disturbed etc. VL to ensure that pipes are tied securely to bottom, top reinforcement
and stirrups so that they are not displaced at the time of concreting.
4. All Fire Stopping related works to MEP services viz. pipes entering / exiting Fire rated Walls etc to be done
by Main Contractor.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
205
TESTING:
5. Hydraulic testing of the pipes jointed with solvent. cement should be done after 1 hours of jointing.
6. Check for gradient and slope before filling water.
7. Extend one of the pipes ends to attain the required head of 1.5 m for hydraulic testing.
8. Compression type rubber plugs are` to be used to plug all open pipe ends.
9. Fill the entire pipe network with fresh clean water up to the required height of 1.5 m from the highest point.
10. Keep the water with the head required for 6 hours for testing.
11. Check the joints for any leakage also the fall in water level in the Vertical Pipes. Any leakage found is to be
rectified immediately and tested again.
12. Concreting to be done only after hydraulic testing of pipes has been successful and witnessed by the
engineer.
13. Concreting to be poured over the pipe using mortar pans and compacting to such that needles do not touch
the hydraulically tested pipes. Main Contractor to ensure that the pipes / fittings etc. are not disturbed during
concreting operations. This is critical to ensure alignment of pipe work is maintained as well as preventing
damage.
14. Water filled into pipes to be retained and monitored for the entire duration of concreting so that at any
displacement of joints and, subsequent leakages can be monitored.
15. If the above-mentioned situations arise, concreting over that particular area is to be stopped, 'and
rectification of displaced, pipes,' sealing of joints etc. to be taken up immediately. Main contractor to wait
until the rectification is carried out properly to VL Supervisor/Foreman's satisfaction.
16. Follow items 1-8 above after rectification.
POST INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
• Ensure to prepare As-Built Drawings as soon as possible after the work is completed.
• Location of the concealed drainage piping will be marked on the suffix as per As-built or redline (As- built
marked up) drawings to avoid any drilling or related activity to prevent damage to the concealed drainage
piping.
QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant during the following stages of work
have been completed: Inspection of Piping installation and hydraulic testing.
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
206

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
207
❖ X-20: - Method Statement Installation of Above Ground Drainage Piping: (Code No.: MS-PL-02)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the onsite installation of above ground drainage piping and the requirements of
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Above Ground drainage piping is generally be installed in podium, risers and lobby areas as per locations shown in
approved shop drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Spirit Level
• Measuring Tape
• Nylon twine
• Pipe Cutter, Hack Saw, Files Trimmers etc
• Hammers
• Ladders
• Scaffolding
• Hand tools of Tradesmen
• Project Engineer (Plumbing)

• MEP Coordinator (Main Contractor)
• Construction In-Charge
• QA/QC Engineer
• Safety Officer
• Site Foremen
• Helpers
• Ensure that Above Ground Drainage Piping Material received are inspected and found acceptable as per
approved material submittal, are available to carry out the work.
• Proper Material including pipes and fittings are to be selected and used in accordance with approved
shop drawings.
• Ensure that all related material (Supports/Solvent Cement/Lubricants) of approved make is available
before carrying out any work.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
208
• Prior to Commencement of work, areas and access will be inspected to confirm that site is ready to
commence the work and all relevant shop drawings dully approved for construction.
• All relevant documentation (Drawings) and Material applicable to particular section of works will be
checked by Site Supervisor prior to commencement of work.
• The Site Engineer/ Site Supervisor will give necessary instructions to tradesman (Plumber) and
provide necessary approved construction/ shop drawings to latest revision along with coordinated lay
outs.
• Ensure that location of grid lines, reference levels are marked by Main Contractor.
INSULATION OF HORIZONTAL RUNS
• Mark the route of above ground drainage piping on the soffit of slab.
• Determine the position of support and fix the supports using anchor bolts and ensure that all fixings
(threaded rods, angles, clamps etc.) are straight and secure.
• Install the Drainage pipes on to the supports. Ensure proper slope and gradient is maintained for all
horizontal runs of Drainage piping.
• Install all pipes and fittings as per the following procedure.
• Ensure that the pipes are cut square before they are joined.
• Use cleaning fluid on both surfaces to be joined. This removes all dirt and machine release agents for
chemical solvent weld. Failure to do this can result joint failure.
• Apply solvent cement evenly on mating surfaces of both pipes and socket.
• Insert pipe into socket with slight twisting action and full socket depth.
• Surplus cement should be removed with a cloth.
• The joint should be firm enough to handle in 5 minutes
3.2 Pipes and fittings which are push fit types are to be connected as follows:
• Lubricate the pipes cut in square and chamfered as well as fittings with rubber lubricant and push fit to full
socket depth.
• With draw pipe 5mm on waste system and 10mm on soil system to allow it for expansion.
• Soil fittings with spigot ends should be inserted into sockets to depth marks engraved on spigots. This
procedure automatically allows for expansion.
INSULATION OF VERTICAL RISERS
• Ensure that the shafts are clear and through up to maximum 6 floors above.
• Ensure that the required provision for maintenance of shaft piping is provided in the block work as per
approved drawing.
• The inside faces of shaft to be finished before fixing of the vertical riser pipes.
• Mark sure that proper working platforms are made for safe working inside the shaft.
• Make sure that all pipes protruding out from the slab of the corresponding toilets are in plumb.
• Mark the location of vertical riser and fix the supports (as per approval) at intervals as specified.
• Fix the pipe fittings on the outlet pipes protruding from the slab and align to the plumb of the vertical riser.
• Joining of pipes and fittings will be carried out as per clause 2.4 & 2.5 above.
• Fix the clamps (as per approval) to vertical riser pipes at specified intervals of 1.6M which are already fixed to
the structural members.
• At every five (5) levels additional support with U- Clamp will be provided. Anchor supports to be provided for
vertical loads at each directional change.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
209
• Each directional change or water testing of riser pipes will be carried out after completing the
installation of riser pipe.
• Riser to be tested with minimum 1.5m water head at eight point / air tested. While testing risers all
horizontal floor toilets / WP’s etc. will be disconnected / isolated.
QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant after completion of installation of
riser pipes along with testing.
SAFETY
plan.
• Ensure that proper scaffolding/ ladders are available.
• Ensure that shafts are adequately blocked above and below the working level, so that no fall of debris/
materials takes place.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
210
❖ X-21: - Method Statement Domestic Water (Hot & Cold) Supply Piping (Code No.: MS-PL-03)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the ons ite installation, testing and insulation of the Domestic Water Supply
Piping including Secondary risers and the requirements of checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Domestic Water Supply Piping System includes Hot Water Supply Piping, Cold Water Supply Piping, Risers,
fittings, valves and accessories used for supply of water to Toilets, Kitchen and Utility rooms.
EQUIPMENT
• Cutter for PVC Pipes
• Welding machine for PP-R
• Pressure Test Pump
• Hammers
• Ladders
• Scaffolding
• Project Engineer (Plumbing)

• MEP Coordinator (Main Contractor)
• Construction In-Charge
• QA/QC Engineer
• Safety Officer
• Site Foremen
• Helpers
1. Ensure that approved materials are available to carry out the work.
2. Proper materials including pipes, fittings and associated accessories are withdrawn from stores according to
approved shop drawing and good engineering practices.
3. Physical verification of materials will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
211
4. Prior to Commencement of work, areas and access will be inspected to confirm that Site is ready to commence the
work.
5. All relevant documentation (Drawings) and Material applicable to particular section of works will be checked by Site
Supervisor prior to commencement of work.
6. The Site Engineer/ Site supervisor will give necessary instructions to tradesmen (Pipe fitters/welders) and provide
necessary approved Construction/Shop Drawings along with coordinated layouts.
7. The Site Engineer/Foremen will also check that proper tools and equipment are available to carry out the work and
are in compliance with contract specification.
8. The Site Engineer also explains the tradesmen regarding safety precautions be observed.
9. Prior to Hydrostatic Pressure testing, Site Engineer will ensure that calibrated pressure gauges are available and
are in good condition.
1. Foremen will carry out a site survey and mark the route of water supply Piping (Hot & Cold) as per approved shop
drawings. In the event that there are any discrepancies or difficulties in executing the work, these will be brought to
the notice of Project Engineer for corrective action.
2. Co-ordination with other trades will be carried out while marking the route of piping.
3. Determine the position of support and fix the supports using anchor bolts and ensure all fixing are tight and secure.
While drilling the soffits, ensure that there is no damage to embedded services in the slab.
5. Install the pipes in position on the supports. Wherever possible pre-assembly of pipes and fittings at ground level
will be carried out.
6. Assemble the pipes and fittings as per approved shop drawing.
7. Assemble of U-PVC pipes and Fittings by using Solvent cement. Ensure that joints are clean before applying
solvent cement.
8. For joining of PP-R Pipes and Fittings manufacturer's recommendations will be followed (Copy enclosed).
9. For fixing PEX pipes, ensure that wall chases are done properly by Main Contractor as per locations shown in
approved shop drawing.
10. Fix the female elbow with cover to be located at proper height as per approved shop drawing. Ensure the line and
alignment with wall tiling.
11. Install the PEX pipes with sleeves (Conduit) in the wall chases. Ensure that joint between PEX pipe and female
elbow is proper and leak free.
12. Fix the PEX pipe to Water supply lines by using male adaptors.
13. Spacing between supports / hangers will be maintained in accordance with latest approved shop drawings/
manufacturer's recommendations
14. Ensure all open ends of pipes, fittings and valves are covered with polyethylene sheet before leaving work space.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
212
15. INSTALLATION OF VALVES AND ACCESSORIES

15.1 Install system valves and accessories as per latest approved shop drawings.
15.2 Ensure that system equipment, valves and accessories are secure and rigid.
15.3 The installation shall be done allowing sufficient access to all valves/ strainers/ gauges as per Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
16. INSTALLATION OF WATER SUPPLY RISERS

16.1 Pipe sizes will be identified first as per latest approved shop drawing and shifted to respective floors.
16.2 Install the supports as per approved Shop drawing/ Manufacturer's recommendations.
16.3 Joining of pipes will be carried out as per above procedure (refer clause 6.2.7 & 8).
16.4 After installation of risers check the pipeline for proper alignment and supports.
17. HUDROSTSTIC PRESSURE TESTING:

17.2 Complete pipe work will be subjected to hydraulic pressure tested as per technical specification. Depending
on ongoing Construction activities sectional hydro testing will be under taken to meet the requirements of
the programmed. Test pressure will not be less than 1.5 times the working pressures but not less than 1035
KPa (for Two-hour period) whichever is greater. Prior to any testing the system pressure will be shown on
the pressure testing documentation.
17.3 Pressure gauges used for Pressure testing will have valid calibration certificate.
17.4 After successful Pressure testing ensures that piping system is fully drained and released for insulation
and other related activities.
18. INSULATION
18.1 Insulation of water pipe work will be carried out as per details as shown in approved submittals. Thermal
insulation of joints will be carried out after pressure testing.
18.2 Make sure that Pipes are clean before applying any insulation. Follow manufacturer's
recommendation for insulation of water supply piping (copy enclosed).
18.3 Ensure thickness of insulation is as per approved drawing.
18.4 Identification Bands/ Labeling will be located at is at access panel locations.
QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant for the following stages:
o After completion of installation prior to Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
o Pressure testing of piping
o After completion of insulation before ceiling closure.
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
213

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
214
❖ X-22: - Method Statement Installation of Water Heaters: (Code No.: MS-PL-04)

SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The scope and purpose of this method statement is to define the method of storage, handling, installation and
inspection of the Water Heaters as per specification and manufacturer’s instructions.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
EQUIPMENT
• Gloves
• Spirit Level
• Measuring Tape
• Ladders
• Scaffolding
• Project Engineer
• QA/QC Engineer
• Safety Officer
• Site Foremen
• Plumbers
• Helpers
➢ Receiving
• When received at site, heaters shall be checked for quantities, model numbers and physical damages, if
any discrepancies are noticed, inform supplier for replacement of the same.
• P&T Valves shall be checked for size, model and quantity.
• Check for Test Certificates, Country of Origin Certificate, Spares (if any) and Operation and
Maintenance Manual for the supplied heaters.
• Request for Inspection shall be raised for Consultant’s inspection.
• The storekeeper, engineer and QC Engineer of ETA shall conduct receiving inspection.
• Any items found damaged or not found suitable as per the project requirements shall be quarantined, non-
compliant materials shall be clearly marked and stored separately to prevent any inadvertent use until returned to
vendor.
➢ Storage

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
215
•Upon completion of receiving QC inspection the heaters will be segregated model / size wise and stored
accordingly for easy retrieval.
• Water heaters shall be stored on a flat surface in ventilated and covered area and protected from dust.
• Inlet, outlet and return point's blanks shall not be removed until ready for connection to pipe work.
• Manufacturer's instruction shall be strictly followed as applicable.
• Storekeeper will be responsible for proper storage and maintenance of records, as required
➢ Preparation
• Check and ensure that the shop drawings used are latest and approved for construction.
• Check coordination with other services prior to the installation.
• Check the piping supports locations and power supplies routing locations in coordination water heater and piping
layout and ensure it does not obstruct the space around water heater for removal and maintenance.
• Ensure easy access and sufficient clearance for servicing and maintenance i.e. for replacement of water heaters,
thermostat, heating elements.
➢ Ceiling Suspended Water Heaters
•Install the fabricated water heater support as per approved details.

•Install the water heater on the support.
•Remove the end caps on the inlet, outlet points. Complete the piping and valve package installation as per
approved drawings.
• Install the electrical power connections as per approved drawings.
• Check and ensure availability of adequate access for removal and maintenance of water heater.
• Provide grounding wiring as per approved drawings / suppliers instruction.
• Ensure compliance to the manufacturer’s instructions while installing the water heaters.
• After completion of the installation, Inspection Request shall be raised for Consultant’s approval.
➢ Floor Mounted Water Heaters
• Mark the locations of the Water Heater base frame and hole locations on the foundation.
• Drill the suitable size holes in the foundations.
• Install the water heater on the foundation.
• Remove the end caps on the inlet, outlet points. Complete the piping and valve package installation as per
approved drawings.
• Install the electrical power connections as per approved drawings.
• Connect the P&T valve to the nearest floor drain.
• Check and ensure availability of adequate access for removal and maintenance of water heater.
• Provide grounding wiring as per approved drawings / suppliers instruction.
• Ensure compliance to the manufacturer’s instructions while installing the water heaters.
• After completion of the installation, Inspection Request shall be raised for Consultant’s approval.
QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant after completion and water heater
installation and pipe connection.
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
216
5 HAZARD & SAFETY MEASURES REQUIRED PERSONEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M
OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
217
❖ X-23: - Method Statement Installation of Domestic Water Supply Pumps: (Code No.: MS-PL-05).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The scope and purpose of this method statement is to define the method of storage, handling, installation and
inspection of the Domestic Water Supply Pumps and the controller as per specification and manufacturer’s
instructions.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
EQUIPMENT
• Gloves
• Spirit Level
• Measuring Tape
• Fork Lift, Crane
• Scaffolding
• QA/QC Engineer
• Safety Officer
• Site Foremen
• Plumbers
• Helpers
➢ Receiving
• When received at site, each pump, valves, control panels, float switches shall be checked for quantities,
Model Nos., physical damages etc. and notify supplier of any discrepancies for suitable rectification or
replacement.
• Check for Test Certificates, Country of Origin Certificate, Spares (if any) and Operation and
Maintenance Manual for the supplied pumps.
• Request for Inspection shall be raised for Consultant’s inspection.
• Valves shall be segregated as per sizes/models and stored on racks within a covered store.
• Any items found damaged or not found suitable as per the project requirements shall be
quarantined. Non-compliant material shall be clearly marked and stored separately to prevent any
inadvertent use until returned to vendor
➢ Storage

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
218
•Pump shall be stored on a flat surface in well ventilated storage area.

•Inlet and outlet flange blanks shall not be removed until ready for connection to pipe work.
•Manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed as applicable.
•If the pumps are stored for longer periods the shaft shall be periodically rotated and lubricated, if required.
•The stored pump should be inspected periodically for obvious conditions such as. standing water, parts
theft, excess dirt buildup or any other abnormal condition.
• Storekeeper will be responsible for proper storage and maintenance of records, as required.
➢ Preparation
• Civil Contractor (AHEE) shall provide the foundations designed to meet the vibration and sound control
requirements.
• Check and ensure that the shop drawings used are latest and approved for construction.
• ETA shall co-ordinate the location of foundation as per approved shop drawings.
• The foundation surface shall be flat and level and smoothly finished top surface.
• Check the piping support locations and cable tray routing locations in co-ordination with pump and piping layout
and ensure they are not obstructing the space around pump.
• Ensure easy access and sufficient clearance for servicing and maintenance i.e for replacement of pump, motor,
pressure vessel.
• Mark the locations of the pump base frame and hole locations.
• Drill the suitable size holes in the foundations.
• The pump and the other associated accessories including the piping manifold are pre-assembled on a base frame.
Shift the pumps to the place of installation in safe manner. Use hand trolley / folk-lift/ crane as applicable/ required as
per site conditions.
• Check and ensure free rotation of the shaft.
• Position the pump frame assembly on the foundation and fix the anchor fasteners.
• Water level the pump assembly by placing the shim plates below the base frame as required. After the installation
the pump supplier shall recheck the gap between ' motor and pumps before testing as applicable.
• Position the pressure vessel and do the interconnecting pipe work as per approved drawings.
• Ensure proper coupling guards are provided if required.
• Complete the piping and valve package installation as per approved drawings. Remove the end caps fixed on the
inlet flange.
• Install the electrical control panel and power connections as per approved 'r drawings.
• Provide grounding wiring as per approved drawings / manufacturers instruction.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions while installing the pump.
• After completion of the installation, it shall be checked and certified by the local pipe supplier.
QUALITY CONTROL
• QCE along with Project Engineer and site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed as per the contract
specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant after completion and water heater
installation and pipe connection.
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
219

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
220
❖ X-24: - Method Statement Installation of Sanitary Fixtures: (Code No.: MS-PL-06)

SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the ons ite installation of sanitary fixtures, fittings and various accessories
associated with sanitary ware.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
EQUIPMENT
• Spirit Level
• Nylon twine
• QA/QC Engineer
• Safety Officer
• Site Foremen
• Plumbers
• Helpers
1. Ensure that all Sanitary Ware and associated accessories supplied by Main Contractor are as per approved
material submittals and are inspected and found acceptable as per approved material submittals and are
available to carry out the work.
2. On receiving the Sanitary Ware for installation, careful inspection of material will be done for damage to the
material. Such damaged material will be returned to supplier through the Main Contractor after making a proper
inspection report.
3. The Sanitary Ware will be stocked in properly ventilated stores as per the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Care will be taken that no heavy material will be kept in overhead locations above the storage
space for Sanitary Ware to avoid any damages. While storing the Sanitary Ware metal to ceramic contact will
be avoided as. -possible. While storing sufficient spacing will be ensured for easy lifting and loading. Storage will
be provided by the Main Contractor.
4. Prior to commencement of work, areas and access will be inspected to confirm that the Site is ready to commence
the work.
5. All relevant documentation drawings) and Material applicable to particular section of works will be checked by
Site Supervisor prior to commencement of work.
6. The Site Engineer/ Site Supervisor will give necessary instructions to tradesmen and provide necessary approved
construction/shop drawings of the latest revision along with coordinated layouts.
7. The Site Engineer/Foremen will also check that proper tools and equipment are available to carry out the work
and are in compliance with the contract specification.
8. The Site Engineer will also explain to the tradesmen regarding safety precautions to be observed.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
221
❖ Prior to starting the installation of Sanitary fixtures, fittings and accessories it will be ensured that all pipe
work in the toilets/kitchens are installed properly and tested according to approved methods, and there is
no damage to the pipe work In short all first fix and second fix of the plumbing services will be completed
before sanitary wares are installed.
❖ All pipe supports, valves, floor drains, floor clean out will be checked for accuracy of installation.
❖ The locations and sizes of piping and drainage outlets will be checked for their compatibility with
sanitary fixtures.
❖ All other works, especially floor and wall tile work painting are completed prior to installation of
sanitary ware.
❖ Ensure that all drainage pipe work is flushed out and debris removed from the pipe work.
❖ Identify the models of Sanitary Ware to be installed as per approved drawings/submittals.
❖ WATER CLOSET
• Ensure that no damage has occurred due to transport to site, and all fittings, fixing screws are available
inside the packing.
• Fix the water supply angle valve to the pipe connection on the wall with escutcheon plate.
• Cut the soil drain pipe to the required length to fit the W.C. bowl outlet.
• Install the approved sealing flange connector supplied by the manufacturer on the drainage outlet.
• Place the closet in the locations and adjust to the dimensions as per
• Approved shop drawing. Follow manufacturer installation instructions.
• Mark the holes for fixing screws on the floor, and drill with correct size drill bit to the required depth. Place the
anchors in the drill holes.
• Clean the floor under the W.C. closet and put in place fixing studs carefully observing the levels at all times.
• Seal the base of the water closet unit with approved sealant and allow it to dry.
• Assemble the flushing mechanism of the water cistern ensuring that all rubber seals for the screws and water
connecting pipes are in place.
• Connect the cistern with water supply angle valve using a connecting piece of pipe of appropriate length
supplied along with Sanitary ware.
• Fix the seat and cover to the W.C. bowl using fixing screws provided by the manufacturer.
• Secure the W.C. unit against misuse/damage by using proper protection.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
222
❖ SHOWER TRAY
• Examine the location and position of the shower tray according to the approved shop drawing.
• Check in rough in piping connections for hot and cold-water supply to the shower mixer and waste piping
connections for their locations according to approved shop drawing.
• Place the shower tray in position and align the waste opening. Adjust the level of shower tray using sprit
level.
• Fix the waste strainer on the waste opening and tighten the screws.
• Place the concrete mortar under the shower tray according to manufacturer's instructions and complete
the finishing works regarding tiling and wall finishes shower cubicles etc. as per approved shop drawing.
• Place the protective coverings over shower tray and mixer.
❖ WASH BASIN
• Examine the location and place of wash basin as per approved shop drawing.
• Identify the model of the wash basin, check all dimensions, tolerances, and levels of the rough in water and
drainage piping are matching with the wash basin to be installed as per approved shop drawing.
• Mark the holes for fixing stud on the walls, using template provided by the manufacturer.
• Drill the holes with the correct size of drill bit to the required depth and anchor fasteners in position.
• Place the threaded studs in the holes and fix the wash basins with washer and nuts.
• Check the level of the wash basin by spirit level and coordinate the levels with counter top position.
• Install bottle trap on waste out, fix the strainer on wash basin and tighten the strainer screw.
• Connect to the waste pipe on the wall and fix the escutcheon plate supplied by manufacturer to conceal
piping joint.
• Fix the angle valves for cold and hot water supply flush to the wall, using escutcheon plates.
• Install water mixer on the wash basin and connect the mixer and angle valves by using tubes. Tighten the
coupling nuts ensuring that installation is tidy.
• After complete installation protect the wash basins from any misuse/damage.
QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspection Request ( IR) s h a l l be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant after completion of Installation of
sanitary fixtures.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
223
SAFETY

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
224
❖ X-25: - Method Statement for Fire Fighting Installation: (Code No.: ME-FF-01)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the Installation of Pipes and. Fittings. This will also ensure workmanship and
conforms to Contract documents.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Installation of Sprinkler and Fire Fighting Pipes and Fittings for the Podium and the Towers, shall be done in
accordance with the project specifications and drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Electric Pipe Cutter
• Threading Machine
• Grooving machine
• Welding machine
• Grinding Machine
• Chain Block
• Electric Drill and Extension Cable
• Pipe Wrenches & Spanners
• Spirit Level
• Plumb Bob
• Trolley
• Mobile Scaffolding and Aluminum ‘A’ Ladders
• Project Manager
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Pipe Fitter
• Helpers
• Approved materials shall be purchased in accordance with the approved shop drawings and For
• Proper materials including pipes and fittings are to be selected and used according to approved
shop drawing and good engineering practices.
• Adequate stock of material, tools and tackles, testing equipment and consumables along with
sufficient man power shall be arranged to carry out the work.
• Prior to start of activity, area and access will be inspected to ensure that the area is ready for the
work to start.
• Ensure that all openings are in correct location and as per approved drawings.
• Ensure that the construction power and water for testing of pipes are provided by the main
contactor near to the work place
• Safe and tidy work place, clear access to the work place, modes to shift material, tools and tackles
etc. are to be ensured.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
225
• Gauges used for testing to be calibrated.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
• Ensure that all tools needed for Installation are ready.

• Layout for Pipe Supports locations based on the approved drawings are by means of a chalk line to
ensure straightness & run parallel to alignment of adjacent building surfaces.
• Measure locations of Supports and drill concrete slab and fix anchor bolts, continuous thread rod
and ring hangers.
• Pipe Risers will be supported by means of angle supports anchored to the floor slab or shear wall
with U-bolts, nuts and washers.
• Cross mains will be supported by means of ring hangers with nuts and washers suspended
continuous threaded rod anchored to the concrete ceiling slab.
• Cross mains will also be supported by rigid supports using steel angles with u-bolts which will be
anchored to the concrete ceiling slab.
• Pipe work will rest freely on supports and aligned properly before final connection.
• Valves and other in line equipment will be installed where indicated in the approved drawings and
as per Manufacturer's recommendation.
• Install Automatic Air Release Valve at high point of the system as required.
• All Fire Stopping related works on Fire Protection sleeves are to be done by Main Contractor.
• Pipe ends and Equipment to be covered with polyethylene cover ensuring that no dirt will go inside.
JOINTING METHOD:
• By using Electric Pipe Cutter, cut the desired length of pipe to be joined and ensure the cut end of
pipe is square and burr free.
• For 65mm dia. and larger pipes, cut the pipe to suitable length and roll groove and bevel both ends
by grooving machine.
• For 50mm dia. and smaller, cut the pipe to suitable length and thread both ends by threading
machine for fixing threaded fittings.
• On threaded pipes apply Boss White and Teflon Tape, fix and tighten pipe and fitting using pipe
wrenches.
• Remove all dirt and moisture from pipe ends.
• Ensure to prepare As-Built Drawings as soon as possible after the work is completed.
QUALITY CONTROL
• QCE along with Project Engineer and site Supervisor will monitor that all components are installed
as per the contract specifications and approved submittals.
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant during the following
stages of work have been completed: Inspection of Piping installation and hydraulic testing.
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
226
safety plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
227
❖ X-26: _Method Statement Installation of Sprinklers: (Code No.: ME-FF-02).

SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the Installation of Sprinklers. This will also ensure workmanship and conforms to
Contract documents.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Installation of Sprinklers shall be done in accordance with the project specifications and drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Sprinkler Wrench
• Spirit Level
• Mobile Scaffolding and Aluminum ‘A’ Ladders
• Project Manager
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Pipe Fitter
• Helpers
1. Approved m a t e r i a l s shall be purchased in accordance with the approved shop drawings and For
2. Proper materials which include all types of Sprinklers are to be selected and used according to approved
3. Adequate stock of material, tools and tackles, testing equipment and consumables along with sufficient man
power shall be arranged to carry out the work.
4. Prior to start of activity, area and access will be inspected to ensure that the area is ready for the work to
start.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
228
• Installed False Ceiling Grids is a pre-requisite for Pendent Sprinkler Droppers to be installed, without
Ceiling reference Sprinkler Droppers cannot be installed.
• Installed Bulk Head Frames is a pre-requisite for Sidewall Sprinklers to be installed.
• Final Elevation of Air Grilles as per Site Condition is a pre-requisite for Sidewall Sprinklers to be installed.
5. Ensure that all openings are in correct location and as per approved drawings. Properly coordinated
Approved Sprinkler Drawings and Approved Reflected Ceiling Plan Drawings is required
6. Ensure that construction power and water for testing of pipes are provided by the Main Contactor near to the
work place.
be ensured.
1. Ensure that all tools needed for Installation are ready.

2. Apply necessary Teflon Tapes and Shellac on the Sprinkler thread.
3. For Standard Upright and Pendent Sprinklers, mount the Sprinkler into the 25mm x 15mm reducer finger
tight, after ensuring alignment; tighten by using Sprinkler Wrench and Pipe Wrench. Install Sprinkler
Guard where required.
4. For Concealed Pendent Sprinklers, mount the Sprinkler into the 25mm x 15mm reducer finger tight, after
ensuring alignment; tighten by using Sprinkler Wrench and Pipe Wrench.
5. For Sidewall Sprinklers, mount the Sprinkler (with the inner escutcheon plate in place) into the 25mm x
15mm reducer finger tight, then tighten by using Sprinkler Wrench and Pipe Wrench, ensure alignment by
using Spirit Level mounted on the deflector.
• After Sprinkler is properly installed wrap Sprinkler with masking tape to protect from being painted
when Bulkhead and walls are painted.
6. Upon False Ceiling, Bulkheads and Walls are finally painted, Concealed Sprinkler Head Covers shall be
installed and Sidewall Sprinklers wrapping shall be removed and install Wall Escutcheon plates.
JOINTING METHOD:
• Remove all dirt and moisture from pipe ends.

• Apply Teflon Tapes on Sprinkler thread, fix and tighten and by using Sprinkler Wrench and Pipe Wrench.
4. Ensure to prepare As-Built Drawings as soon as possible after the work is completed.
QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspection Request (IR) shall be submitted to the Main Contractor/Consultant during the following stages of
work have been completed
- Inspection of Piping installation and hydraulic testing

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
229
SAFETY
plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M
OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
230
❖ X-27: - Method Statement Installation of Fire Hose Cabinets: (Code No.: ME-FF-03).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the Installation of Fire Hose Cabinets. This will also ensure workmanship and
conforms to Contract documents.
REFERENCE DOCUMENT
GENERAL
Installation of Fire Cabinets shall be done in accordance with the project specifications and drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Hole Saw
• Electric Drill and Ext. Cable
• Spanners
• Spirit Level
• Project Manager
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Pipe Fitter
• Helpers
1. Approved materials shall be purchased in accordance with the approved shop drawings and For Construction
Contract Specifications.
2. Proper materials which include all types of Sprinklers are to be selected and used according to approved
3. Adequate stock of material, tools and tackles, testing equipment and consumables along with sufficient man
power shall be arranged to carry out the work.
start.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
231
5. Ensure that all openings are in correct location and as per approved drawings.
6. Ensure that construction power and water for testing of pipes are provided by the Main Contactor near to the
work place.
be ensured.

2. Drill the holes for fixing anchors and bolts. Ensure that the Bottom of the Cabinet is mounted 300mm above the
finished floor.
3. Mount the Cabinet, ensuring vertical and horizontal alignments.
4. Mount the Fire Hose Reel into the Cabinet and connect the 25mm dia. Hose to the lock shield valve.
5. Wind the 25mm dia. Hose into the reel
6. Mount the Fire Rack into the Cabinet and connect the 65mm dia. Hose and Nipple to the Pressure Reducing
Valve.
7. Hang the 65mm dia. Fire Hose and Nozzle in the Hose Rack properly.
8. Powder Fire Extinguishers beside the 65mm dia. Fire Hose in the lower compartment of the Cabinet.
JOINTING METHOD:
1. Remove all dirt and moisture from pipe ends.

2. Apply necessary Boss White and Teflon tape on Threads and install the water supply pipe nipple,
pressure reducing valve and lock shield valve by using pipe wrenches.
QUALITY CONTROL
work have been completed:
a. Inspection of Piping Installation
b. Witness Hydrostatic Testing
c. Final Painting Touch-up
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
232

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
233
❖ X-28: - Method Statement Hydro-Static Testing of Sprinklers: (Code No.: ME-FF-04)

SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the Hydro-static Testing of Sprinkler & Fire Fighting Piping Network. This will
also ensure workmanship and conforms to Contract documents.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Hydro-static Testing of Sprinkler & Fire Fighting Piping Network shall be done in accordance with NFPA 13 & 14
requirements & Project Specifications & Drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Pressure Pump
• Pressure gauge with Isolating Ball Valve
• Air Release Valve
• 25mm dia. Water Hose
• Aluminum ‘A’ Ladder & Complete Pipe Fitter’s Tools
• Project Manager
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Pipe Fitter
• Helpers
1. Ensure that all Sprinkler & Fire Fighting Piping Networks are inspected and accepted by Consultant prior to
conducting Hydro-static Test.
2. Ensure all Equipment such as Pressure Pump, Tools and tackles, testing equipment and consumables
along with sufficient Manpower shall be arranged to carry out the work.
start.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
234
4. Ensure all open-ended pipes of the Piping Network to be Pressure tested shall be properly plugged. Install the
Pressure Gauge, Air Release Valve and Isolating Ball Valve at the Remotest Point for Pressure reading and
Flushing. Connect the Pressure Pump to the System
5. Connect the 25mm dia. Water Hose to the source of Water, with the Isolating Valve at the remotest open, fill the
Piping Network with Water and flush the Piping Network until water is satisfactory clear.
6. Shut-off the Isolating Valve, remove the water hose and plug the valve.
be ensured.
8. Ensure that Pressure Gauges are calibrated with valid certificates.
1- Ensure that all Equipment / Tools and Water are ready.

2- Fill up the Pipingl4etwork with Water, then with the use of the Pressure Pump slowly build up the pressure in the
System and ensure trapped air is released thru the Air Release Valve. Check for leaks, inspect all Fittings while
building-up the pressure.
Disconnect the Pressure Pump from Piping Network and keep away from Testing Area.
3- Repair leaks and defects, if any, and re-test the Piping Network as follows;
a. Low Pressure Line at 200 psi (13.8 bar) pressure for 2 hours.
b. High Pressure Line at 456 psi (31.4 bar) pressure for 2 hours.
4- Ensure that during Hydro-testing, calibrated Pressure Gauges are used as follows;
a. Range at 300 psi for low pressure line.
b. Range at 600 psi for high pressure line.
5- Pressure testing documentation shall be submitted along with Inspection request.
6- Fill up the Inspection Request and ensure that all Signatures above Names of Witnesses are taken after
satisfactory result is completed.
QUALITY CONTROL
- Inspection of Piping Installation and Hydraulic Testing.
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
235

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
236
❖ X-29: - Method Statement Installation of Fire Alarm System: (Code No.: ME-FF-05).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the site installation of Fire alarm system complete with all relevant devices and
accessories and the requirements of checks to be carried out.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Fire alarm system integrated with voice alarm system include fire/smoke detection, smoke damper monitoring,
emergency voice evacuation system with paging system and firefighter’s emergency telephone system. It will be
ensuring that complete system shall meet the requirements of Local Civil Defense Authority Regulations.
EQUIPMENT

• Scaffoldings
• Nylon slings
• Measuring Tape
• Calibrated Megger
• Project Manager
• Manufacturer’s authorized representative
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Electrician
• Helpers
1. Ensure that approved Materials are available to carry out the work.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
237
2. Fire alarm system components with accessories received at site will be inspected as per approved
material submittal. In case of any damage, the same should be brought to the notice of supplier for
suitable resolution/replacement.
3. Physical verification of materials will be carried out for any damages prior to taking from stores and also
prior to installation.
4. Prior to Commencement of work, areas and access will be inspected to confirm that Site is ready to
commence the work.
5. All relevant documentation (Drawings and Materials) and Material applicable to particular section of work will
be checked by site Supervisor prior to commencement of work.
6. The site Engineer/ site Supervisor will give necessary instructions to tradesmen (Electricians) and provide
necessary approved construction/shop drawings.
7. The site Supervisor/Foremen will also check that proper tools and equipment are available to carry out the
work and are in compliance with the contract specification.
8. The site Supervisor will also explain to the tradesmen regarding safety precautions to be observed.
9. The site Supervisor and QC Engineer will ensure that calibrated Megger is available at site for testing.
General
All installations shall be carried out as per the Project specifications and CI/SS/FM the applicable wiring
practices as per BS 5839
1. CABLE INSTALLATION
1.1 Ensure that cable containment (where applicable) as per approved shop drawing is installed, inspected
and cleared for wire pulling.
1.2 Fire alarm cables will be directly cleated to soffit where there is no separate ELV containment is available in
the areas covered by false ceiling, in private / core lobbies and car park areas.
1.3 Cable pulling through conduits from the drum end to the other end of the duct manually by using spring
wire.
1.4 Ensure sufficient length of cable is maintained to connect to the device as per the approved shop
drawings, before cutting the cable on both sides of conduit.
2.5 Upon completion of cable pulling. Inspection Request (IR) will be raised to Main contractor/Consultant.
2.6 Perform insulation resistance test for each segment of cable and ensure the continuity of all cable cores.
2. INSTALLATION OF FIELD DEVICES AND CONTROL PANEL:
Manual call points, Smoke detectors, Heat detectors, Strobe light / Sounders:
2.1 Install Manual call points as per approved construction drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 Terminate cable to the device.
2.3 Check the sound ness of installation and alignment of devices.
2.4 Device addressing by software using auto addressing feature. So separate labeling is not required. This will be
carried by Manufacturer's authorized representative.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
238
3 Monitor Module:
3.1 Install Monitor Module as per approved construction drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 Check the soundness of installation and alignment of the device.
3.3 All the monitor modules to be installed near by the system from where it gets the input.
3.4 Terminate the cabling to the device.
3.5 Line isolator and interface unit for flow switch:
• Install the device as per approved construction drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
• Terminate cable to the device.
• Check the sound ness of installation and alignment of devices.
3.6 Fire alarm control panel:
• Check the control panel and its internal components before installation for any damage.
• Install the device as per construction drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
• Check the soundness of installation and alignment of panel.
• Check the battery and its terminals.
• Complete the Cabling terminations (except power supply and battery connection).
• Clean inside the control panel.
3.7 Power Separation:
• Fire detection cables shall not be placed alongside power cables or share the same conduit, channel or sleeve
with electrical apparatus.
• Cable runs shall be installed at least 450mm from the nearest source of electromagnetic interference
3. Labelling:
• Labels for all cables will be attached according to the specifications. Concealed cabling, due to space restrictions
will be tagged with device address at the termination end.
4. Cable Records:
• Correct conductor polarity shall be maintained during connection to devices.
• Identification at the Main fire Alarm Panel and associated connector blocks shall be in accordance with standard
industrial Practices.
• Prepare as -built drawings after completion of installations to allow Commissioning team to work.
5. Cable Testing:
• All cables shall be insulation tested using calibrated instruments.

• Any defects in the cabling system installation shall be replaced in order to ensure complete
performance under installed conditions.
• All test results shall be recorded as per the format given and shall be signed by Main contractor and consultant.
QUALITY CONTROL

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
239
A. After completion of installation of Fire alarm cable for a particular area/section.

B. For testing of Fire alarm cables.
C. Installation of Field devices particular area or section of works.
D. Installation of Fire Alarm Panel.
SAFETY
plan.
• Use of proper scaffolding while installing devices on soffit to be ensured.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
240
❖ X-30: - Method Statement Installation of Zone Control Valve Assembly: (Code No.: ME-FF-06)
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This “Method Statement" covers the Installation of Zone Control Valve Assembly. This will also ensure
workmanship and conforms to Contract documents.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Installation of Zone Control Valve Assembly shall be done in accordance with the project specifications and
drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Chain Block
• Electric Drill
• Hole Saw and Extension Cable
• Torque Wrench
• Spirit Level
• Plumb Bob
• Trolley
• Mobile Tower Scaffolding & Aluminum “A” Ladders
• Project Manager
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Pipe Fitter
• Helpers
1. Approved materials shall be purchased in accordance with the approved shop drawings and For
2. Proper materials such as Butterfly Valves, Water Flow Switches, Pressure Gauges, Isolating Gate
Valves, Inspectors Test Connections & Drains including pipes and fittings are to be selected and used
according to approved shop drawing and good engineering practices.
3. All material, tools and tackles, testing equipment and consumables along with sufficient man power shall be
arranged to carry out the work.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
241
start.
5. Ensure that all openings are in correct location and as per approved drawings.
6. Ensure that the construction power and water for testing of pipes are provided by the Main Contactor
near to the work place.
7. Safe and tidy work place, clear access to the work place, modes to shift.

2. Mount the Butterfly Valve on the grooved pipes and fix the couplings and then tighten the bolts and nuts by
torque wrench.
3. Measure and mark then drill hole (by hole saw) where the Water Flow Switch is mounted then tighten the
bolts & nuts by torque wrench.
4. Before mounting the switch clean inside pipe either side of hole.
5. Measure and mark then drill holes (by hole saw) where the outlet tee for the Inspector Test Connection
piping is connected then tighten bolts & nuts by torque wrench. Apply Boss White and Teflon Tapes on the
threads and install the Inspector Test Connection & Drain and Union.
6. Measure and mark then drill hole (by hole saw) where the outlet tee for the pipe nipple is connected then
tighten bolts & nuts by Torque Wrench. Apply Boss White and Teflon Tapes on the pipe nipple threads and
install the Isolating gate Valve and Pressure Gauge.
QUALITY CONTROL
i. Inspection of Piping Installation and Hydraulic Testing
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
242

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
243
❖ X-31: - Method Statement Installation of Pressure Reducing Valve Station: (Code No.: ME-FF-07).
SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This "Method Statement" covers the Installation of Pressure Reducing Valve Station.. This will also ensure
workmanship and conforms to Contract documents.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL
Installation of Pressure Reducing Station shall be done in accordance with the project specifications and
drawings.
EQUIPMENT
• Grinding Machine
• Chain Block
• Electric Drill and Extension Cable
• Torque Wrench
• Spirit Level
• Plumb Bob
• Trolley
• Grooving Machine
- Approved materials shall be purchased in accordance with the approved shop drawings and For Construction
Contract Specifications.
- Proper materials such as PRV’s, OS&Y Gate Valves, Pressure Gauges, Isolating gate valves including pipes and
fittings are to be selected and used according to approved shop drawing and good engineering practices.
- All material, tools and tackles, testing equipment and consumables along with sufficient man power shall be
arranged to carry out the work.
- Prior to start of activity, area and access will be inspected to ensure that the area is ready for the work to start.
- Ensure that all openings are in correct location and as per approved drawings.
- Ensure that the construction power and water for testing of pipes are provided by the Main Contactor near to the
work place.
- Safe and tidy work place, clear access to the work place, modes to shift.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
244
• Project Manager
• Safety officer
• Site Foremen
• Pipe Fitter
• Helpers
- Ensure that all tools needed for Installation are ready.

- Mount the Gate Valve on the flange with the gasket and all bolts in place then tighten all nuts by fingers.
- Mount the pipe Spool with pipe nipple for Pressure Gauge with the gasket and all bolts in place then tighten nuts by
fingers.
- Mount the Pressure Reducing Valve on the flange with the gasket and all bolts in place then tighten nuts by fingers.
- Mount the Pipe Spool with Pipe nipples for pressure gauge and safety relief valve with gasket and all bolts in place
then tighten nuts by fingers.
- Install the By-pass by repeating items 2 to 5.
- Tighten all bolts and nuts alternately to ensure alignment by using a torque wrench.
- Apply Boss White and Teflon Tapes on pipe nipples and install Isolating Valves and Pressure Gauges and
Pressure Relief Valve.
- Support the Pressure Reducing Station properly as specified.
- Ensure to prepare As-Built Drawings as soon as possible after the work is completed.
QUALITY CONTROL
have been completed:
• Inspection of Piping Installation and Hydraulic Testing
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
245
plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

a.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
246
X-32: -Method of Statement for Installation of compressed air system
1: - SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method of statement covers the on-construction project site installation of the compressed air piping
system.
This method statement covers following type of works:
• Compressed Air Systems
• Factory assembled packaged air compressor complete with
• Scroll air compressor
• Receiver
• Filtration facilities
• Instrumentation & Control Panel
• Air dryers.
2: - PRE-REQUIREMENTS - GALVANIZED PIPEWORK
Construction department will check all materials and documentation relevant to a particular section of works
prior to the commencement of work. This approach will ensure that all materials and wakes are of the correct
type as per the client requirements.
Prior to the commencement of any piping construction activity, safety inspector will check areas and access
to confirm that they are in a suitable condition for construction works to commence.
Before commencement any construction activity, pre-inspections will be carried out on all material prior to
them leaving the storage area.
3: - INSTALLATION METHOD STATEMENT
Ensure that horizontal and vertical pipe runs are correctly aligned and supported as indicated in the table below for
galvanized pipework.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
247
NOMINAL BORE OF INTERVAL FOR INTERVAL FOR

PIPE HORIZONTAL RUNS VERTICAL RUNS
mm m m
15 0.75 1.5
22 to 28 1 1.8
28 to 35 1 2
42 1.2 2.4
54 1.4 3.5
Install the compress air pipework with falls not less than 1 in 80 in the direction of flow.
Provide drainage points at intervals not exceeding 30 meters.
Drain sets will be piped to the nearest suitable floor waste.
3.1. JOINTING PROCEDURE FOR GALVANIZED TUBE
Screw the pipe work and joints up to and including 50 mm mild steel pipe.
Prepare the threads at pipe ends using an appropriate threading machine.
Make sure that the machine die head is suitable to cut tapered type threads.
Cut the threads to the correct thread length.
After cutting the suitable thread burrs, surplus oil and swarf will be removed prior to the selected fitting being screwed
in place.
Threads shall be applied with thread joint compound of the approved type.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
248
By means of an appropriate pipe wrench, the selected fitting will be screwed onto the pipe thread to the correct
tightness required without causing any damage to the pipe/fitting.
When pipe and fitting is fully tightened, clean of any excess jointing compound, and paint exposed threads with
approved cold galvanizing compound
4: - FINAL PIPING CONNECTION
Final connections to compressor will be full line size flexible connections of type shown on the construction drawing
located as close as possible to the compressor.
Ensuring pipework is adequately supported
independently to the flexible connectors.
5: - PIPEWORK PRESSURE TESTING
Prior to the start of pneumatic testing all other works on the system will cease and personnel adjacent to the area will
be informed of the intention to test.
Connect pressurization pump / equipment to the piping system including a pressure gauge to register line pressure,
isolated from the equipment.
Pipe pressure test will include the usage of safety release valve.
The test pressure will 1.5 times the system working pressure, hold the pressure constant for 30 minutes.
Attain the target pressure by raising the pressure equally in three stages.
During any of the three periods if a leakage is apparent in the system, it will be identified and logged, but no remedial
work will be undertaken.
All remedial work will be carried out after the system has been bleed to atmospheric pressure.
Upon completion of any remedial work the system will be re-pressurized as before.
When the system is charged to its test pressure the air temperature in the system must be allowed to stabilize and
the pressurization equipment disconnected.
6: - EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION METHOD
All documentation and certification relevant to the Packaged Air compressor will be checked by the Construction
Department prior to the commence of installation, ensuring that they are of the correct type as review by the client.
All lifting and handling procedures will conform to the manufacturer’s instructions ensuring at all times

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
249
that Packaged Air Compressor is not subjected to undue stress.
Compressor and associated equipment will be carefully plumbed and aligned, then bolted and securely anchored
to "Housekeeping pad.
After alignment is complete, supervisor in charge will ensure that vibration isolators are of the correct deflection.
Final adjustments will be made at pre-commissioning stage.
It will be ensured that all completed installations look neat and tidy, and that there is adequate spacing between
pipe lines and other services allowing easy access for operation and maintenance.
The supervisor and the QC officer will continuously monitor the activities to ensure that all components indicated
on the approved construction drawings have been installed and that the installation is in accordance with the
contract requirements and manufacturers recommendations.
Protect all installation work to avoid any damage from workers and other activities.
7: - SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
In order to ensure that all compress air system works will takes place in a safe manner, the company will consider
suitability of the following:
• Work on height
• Tools
• Welding
• Pressure test
❖ Work on height
• Stand or erect towers on firm base or level ground.
• Brakes on castors are always using.
• Secure the tower scaffold to the structure, if necessary, by ties.
• Unsound ladders shall never be used.
• Lean sideways from ladders is forbidden.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
250
• Ties to be fitted all the time with right length.
• Regular inspections will be done for ladders & scaffolds by competent persons Use of Suitable Tools.
❖ Use of suitable tools
• Always right type of tools for the job will be used
• Correct size of hand tools will be used for the size of the job
• Defected tools will be rejected immediately
• Only earthed tools shall be allowed to use
• Damaged tools are not allowed to use before repairing
• All electric stuff must be in good shape
• The power tools will be inspected regularly by competent persons
❖ Welding
• The welders to be trained and certified for the job, must be in good health and trained for safe work.
• Correct face shield or goggles must be used in accordance with the type of welding
• Leather gauntlet gloves be worn during the welding
• Welding curtains to be used to protect neighboring workers at all the time
• All Oxygen cylinders to be black, out let threaded is right hand, Acetylene cylinders are brown, out let
threaded is left hand, and propane cylinders are blue, out let threaded is left hand.
• Regulators must be always fitted in good condition
• Hoses to be in good condition and in standard color code: Red for fuel gasses and Blue for oxygen
• Non return valve will be fitted all the time and flash- back arrestors if available
• Non defective torch will be using
• Fire extinguishers in the welding area are required all the time
• Avoid welding near rammable materials
• Torch should not be left unattended

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
251
• Welding area will be checked before leaving to make sure there are no source of fire or heat
• Monitor the welding area for gasses using online gas monitor
❖ Pressure test
• Testing area will be secured from passing workers/neighbors
• DANGER HIGH PRESSURE warning signs to be displayed
• Communication system will be used if required in noisy area
• Only authorized personnel to be present in the pressure testing area
8: - RECORDS & REFERENCES
• Equipment Factory Test Certificate
• Compressed Air System Check List
• Pipework Pressure Test Certificate
• Approved Construction Drawing
• Manufacturer - Instructions for Package Air Compressors
QUALITY CONTROL
SAFETY
plan.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
252

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

b.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
253
X-33: -Method of Statement for Installation of Novec system 1230: (Code No.: ME-FF-07)
1: - SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This method of statement covers the on-construction project site installation of the Novec system.
❖ REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
❖ GENERAL
Installation of Novec 1230 system shall be done in accordance with the project specifications and
drawings.
❖ Features
The high efficiency of the Novec 1230 system allows using a low extinguishing concentration. Novec
1230 fluid even offers the lowest extinguishing concentration of all currently authorized extinguishing
agents. Therefore, compact system designs are possible and less space is needed for installation and
cylinder storage.
The Novec 1230 fluid is non-corrosive and non-conductive, which means it does not damage high-value
assets such as delicate electronics. It is also harmless to people’s health. This makes the Novec 1230
fluid ideal for spaces that are normally or occasionally occupied. The agent is also non-toxic, non-
flammable and non-explosive.
The innovative Novec 1230 fluid is safe, effective and not subject to regulatory restrictions or phase-out.
The Novec 1230 fluid has zero ozone depletion potential (ODP), a short atmospheric lifetime (ALT) of 3-5
days and a low global warming potential (GWP) of 1, making it exempt from restrictions of so-called
“greenhouse gases” imposed by the Kyoto Protocol. This makes Novec 1230 fluid an innovative, clean
and future-proof solution. Novec 1230 with the Novec 1230 fluid follows EN standards and guidelines
and is backed by appropriate certifications such as VdS, CNPP and others.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
254
❖ HIGHLIGHTS
• Highest extinguishing efficiency and flexibility in engineering
• Optimal protection of electrical and electronic equipment
• Efficient high-pressure technology from Siemens
• Discharge time 10 seconds for fast extinguishing
• Compact, space-saving system
• Non-conductive, no residues
• Harmless for people with one of the highest safety margins
• Innovative, effective and environmentally friendly
❖ Required Tools/Equipment
• Multimeter
• Detector Testing Tool
• Hilti Machine
• Drill Machine
• Pull string
• Step Ladders
• Mobile Scaffold
❖ Preparation Work Before Installation
• With the aid of computer software program design the system and prepare isometric drawing.
• Prepare layout drawing of piping network system and Mechanical equipment of Novec1230 System.
• Prepare drawings of detection system.
• Obtain approval of the concerned authorities for the drawing.
• Arrange inspection of the pipe, fittings and installation accessories and obtain approval prior to the
commencement of installation works.
❖ Fire Suppression System Installation Procedure
➢ Piping Work
• Use schedule 40 pipes with 3000 PSI fittings. Install pipe and fitting in strict accordance with the
approved drawing.
• Piping between cylinder and nozzles must be through shortest route possible.
• Any deviation in the routing or number of fittings must be approved by the Design Engineer prior to
the installation.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
255
• All piping shall be earth bonded. Piping must be reamed free of burrs and ridges after cutting or
threading.
• Teflon tape only need to be applied on pipe joints. Tape should be applied on male thread only.
• All pipe hangers must conform to general industry standard.
• For reducing pipe size use only concentric bell reducers.
• Before fixing discharge nozzles blow the system piping free of debris.
• Install nozzles, ensure that correct nozzles types part numbers and orifice sizes are installed in the
proper location.
• Ensure piping and nozzles do not interface with objects in the hazard area.
• Install Novec 1230 cylinder at the location shown in the drawing observing the safety requirements
while handling the Novec 1230 cylinder.
• Secure the cylinder to a solid structure.
• Connect the pipe system to the cylinder.
➢ Cylinder Installation
• Identify the actual location of the cylinder based on the approved shop drawings.
• Mount the fire suppression system gas cylinder on the mounting bracket and tighten the cylinder on
the mounting bracket with the supplied strap using bolts.
➢ Install the supports:
• Mark the drill hole location on the wall corresponding to the mounting bracket supplied with the
cylinder.
• Drill the holes as per drop-in anchor size and install the mounting bracket on the wall using drop-in
anchor bolts.
➢ Painting of Pipes:
• Clean the black pipe with cotton rag to remove any dust or grease on the pipes.
• After cleaning, paint the black pipes with 1 layer undercoat of wash primer. Ensure all sides (top &
bottom) are painted evenly.
• Put the painted pipes in a good ventilation condition for 24 hours for the paint to dry.
• After the paint is dried, then paint the pipes with 2 layer of finish coat. Ensure all sides (top &
bottom) are painted evenly.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
256
• After the finish coat is dry, install the pipes as per approved shop drawings of clean agent fire
suppression system.
➢ Installation of Pipe Support for fire suppression system
• Identify the actual location of the hanger based on the approved shop drawing. Mark the position
for installing the drop-in anchor after coordination with Structural Engineer.
• Cut the required length of the Gl angle as per the site condition.
• Fabricate the support by welding the angles as per the approved shop drawing.
• Drill holes on the fabricated support for fixing the Gl angle to the wall/slab and also for installation
the pipes using U bolt as per require pipe sizes.
• Locate the required support locations as per the approved shop drawing and marks the holes to be
drilled on the wall/slab.
• Drill the hole on the marked position as per the anchor bolt sizes.
• Insert the drop-in anchor in the hole.
• Tighten the Gl angles on drop-in anchor using bolts.
• Rigid bracing is required at each directional change fitting, tee and nozzle.
❖ Threading Procedure for fire suppression system piping
➢ Pipe Cutting
• Cut the required length of the pipe to be threads.
• Check that the cut ends of the pipe are square.
• Install the Threading Dies
• Install the correct die head with threading teethes on the threading machine for the corresponding
pipe:
➢ Thread the Pipe

• Insert the end of the pipe to be threaded in-between the die head and tighten the chuck to hold the
pipe properly.
• Support the other end of the pipe using the pipe stand.
• Start the machine and engage the die head into threading position.
• Thread the pipe until the required length of the thread is achieved.
• After the threading, loosen the chuck and remove the pipe.
• Drain the residual threading oil from the pipe into the oil tray of the threading machine.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
257
➢ Fire Suppression System Coupling Installation

• Groove the pipe ends according to the manufacturer's specification, project specification and
consultant's approval.
• Pipe must be free from indentation, projection or roll marks on exterior from the end to the groove,
to assure a leak tight seat for the gasket.
• Pipe must be free from indentation, projection or roll marks on exterior from the end to the groove,
to assure a leak tight seat for the gasket. Refer to figure 1 next page.
• Place gasket over pipe ends, being sure gasket lip does not overhang pipe end.
• Align and bring 2 pipe ends together and slide gasket into position centered between the grooves
on each pipe. No portion of the gasket should extend into the grove on either pipe.
• Loosely assemble all segment leaving on nut and bolt off to allow for "swing-over" feature.
• With 1 nut and 1 bolt removed, use the "swing-over" feature to position housing over gasket and
into the grooves on both pipes.
• Insert the remaining bolt to allow easy tightening of the nut. Be sure track head engages into
housing recess.
• Tighten nuts alternately and equally maintaining metal-to-metal contact at the angle bolt pads.
Tighten securely to assure a rigid joint.
➢ Mechanical-T Installation
• Drill the hole according to the manufacturer's specification, project specification and consultant
approval.
• Remove 1 nut and bolt from housing. Loosen the other nut until it is flush with the end of the bolt.
Remove the tape and lift the gasket from Mechanical-T outlet.
• Check gasket supplied to be certain it is suited for intended service. Apply a thin coat of silicone
lubricant to gasket lips and outside of gasket.
• Reposition gasket into housing using alignment tabs on slides for proper positioning.
• Rotate the lower housing approximately 90° away from the upper housing in the hole.
• Make sure that the locating collar is in the outlet hole by rocking the upper housing in the hole.
• Insert bolts in his hole and finger tighten both nuts. Be certain oval-neck of bolt engages recess in
housing.
• Make sure that the locating collar is in the outlet hole and the positioning lugs are properly aligned.
• Tighten bolt nut uniformly until the upper housing is in complete surface contact in the gasket
pocket area and the assembly is rigid.
➢ Fire Suppression System Nozzle Installation

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
258
• Install the pipe as per approved shop drawings with provision to install the nozzles at location as
indicated on the approved shop drawing.
• Install support near to the last bend of each nozzle location.
• All drops to 180 degrees nozzles require back-bracing in the opposite direction of the discharge.
• Ensure that there is no residuals present inside the pipe before installing the nozzles.
• Install the nozzles by tightening the nozzles at the last end of the pipe at location as identified on
the approved shop drawings
❖ Installation of Fire Detection System
• Arrange detection system material inspection and obtain necessary approval.

• Install the control panel and devices as per the approved drawing layout.
• Test the cabling for open, short circuits prior to connecting to devices.
• Terminate the cabling and conduct pre commissioning tests on the system.
❖ Testing & Commissioning of Novec1230 Fire Suppression System
• Check the panel functions for its proper working

• Power supply monitoring
• Detector line Monitoring
• Alarm line monitoring
• Silence alarm switch operational
• Reset system switch operational
• Evacuate switch operational
• Auto manual select switch operational
❖ Check for the field devices
• Ionization Smoke detectors operational

• Optical smoke detectors operational
• Cylindrical Pressure monitoring
• Air conditioning unit shut down
• Damper / Curtain shutdown
• Abort switch operational
• Novec 1230 actuator solenoid operational
• Manual release unit operational

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
259
❖ Check the cylinder accuracy
• Weight of Novec 1230 agent

• Pressure of the cylinder
• Leakage test
❖ Storage and Handling for Clean Agent Fire Suppression System
• Using suitable means of transportation carefully transport packaged/crated components to their

place of installation.
• Ensure cylinders are not installed where they could be exposed to fire or an explosion hazard.
• They should be installed in such a way to ensure ease of removal after use or for weighing and
inspection.
• Each container has a nameplate with an identifying part number. The part numbers should be
checked against the parts listed on the system plans to verify that the correct equipment was
received.
• Cylinder containers should be located according to system plans in clean, dry, relatively vibration
free areas.
• Cylinders should never be mounted in any area which the cylinders could potentially be submerged
in liquid.
• Ensure cylinders are not exposed to direct sunlight.
• Cylinder brackets shall be mounted securely to rigid surfaces which will support the container load.
QUALITY CONTROL
SAFETY

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
260
plan.

SAFETY SAFETY EYE
HARD HAT MASK
SAFETY CRANE
ABOVE 3M OPERATION
HIGH OVERHEAD

c.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
261
❖ X-34: -Method of Statement for Finishing, Protection & Cleaning
PERSONNEL ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
OPERATION/PROJECT MANAGER
The Operation Manager / Project Manager must mobilize the required materials, equipment and manpower to do
the job as required, and will monitor activities. He must take note of existing shortfall and problems and discuss the
same with the Project Manager. Corrective solutions must be identified and applied to compensate for the shortfalls.
PROJECT ENGINEER
The Project Engineer ensures on-site availability of all the required manpower and equipment. Oversees his on-site
team, including the site engineers, surveyors, and foremen. Provide his site team with final drawings for execution.
Deals with the supplier of the ready-mix regarding concrete quantity and delivery. Monitors casting operations,
ensures the preparation of the curing process, ensures that the safety requirements are met on site.
SITE ENGINEER
The Site Engineer will be in charge for the supervision and implementation of all activities as required in the
preparation and filing of reports. It is the Site Engineer’s duty to make sure all workers are properly oriented, and
inspected for proper safely gear worn. It is their duty to be present at all times during the work in progress. He shall
also ensure that all necessary safety and protective equipment are provided along with properly trained and qualified
personnel.
SITE FOREMAN
The Site Foreman shall be in charge for the supervisions and implementation of various steps in shoring works, as
instructed by the Site Engineer. The Site Foreman shall also keep record of all work schedules, work production and
daily safety issues.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
262
TECHNICIANS AND LABOURS
It is the technicians and labors’ duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety rules.
They must also perform the work as described in the method statement procedure.
Installation.
1- Introduction and scope
This method of statement specifies the detailed requirements and procedures for the installation scope of work for
Project.
2- Mobilization & temporary works
After award the project, STL will start mobilization immediately as per the work schedule. The proposed
temporary site works such as site offices, utilities, workshops & storage areas to be arranged during the
mobilization period with the coordination & consultation with the contractor t representative. A preliminary site
layout, details of equipment’s to be used, man power schedule and details of proposed working hours will be
submitted for approval before start the works.
3- Applicable Project Specification

4- Section: Civil Sections
GENERAL STRUCTURAL/ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITIONS
Study the scope of works related to the existing building and the design of new additional works and submit for the
Engineer's approval, details of the method statement of supporting and protecting the existing and the new works.
Consult with relevant workers, contractors and health and safety representatives (HSRs) about the tasks, the
HRCW involved and the associated hazards, risks and controls.
Reusable materials/furniture from the building before demolishing or after dismantling, shall carefully be hand
over the selected materials/ items to the Employer at a safe location as instructed by the Engineer.
Debris of materials shall be removed away from the site to approved dumping areas.
1: -BLOCK WALLS
WORK PREPARATION


Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
263
PRECAUTIONS
10. Lines and levels to be set out by the surveying team.

11. Masonry/Block works, wall ties, damp proof membranes, cavity details will be in accordance with Architectural
and/or engineer’s drawings.
12. Masonry/Blocks and Mortar will be supplied to the Block layers by experienced workers (Hood carriers) the
15. Trestles and boards will be used where required for a short term as possible, these will be checked before,
during and after use.
16. A telescopic forklift (if available or required) will be used to transport and place materials onto loading
platforms.
18. All surplus/broken materials will be removed from the working areas to ensure continual housekeeping as part
of our safe system on work.
WORK PROCEDURE
18. Marking layout will be made in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint.
19. Layout area shall be cleaned prior to installation.
20. Block shall be wetted prior to using.
21. In case of hollow block wall, the first 2 courses will be filled with mortar.
22. In case of solid block wall (where defined in drawings), all block will be filled with mortar (procured solid block).
23. The used mortar will be in accordance with the required cement to sand ratio.
24. Block work shall be fixed by 2 erected dove tail at where the shop drawings indicate
25. Ladders shall be laid at every 3rd course or where the shop drawings indication

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
264
26. The maximum height of masonry work shall be up to the tie beam per day
27. Where doors are indicated, the tie beam shall be on the level of the lintel unless otherwise indicated by the
shop drawings or the consultant request.
28. Where doors are indicated, all hollow block shall be filled with mortar around the door frame.
TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
- Hand tool, wheelbarrows

- Trestles and board
2: -MASONRY WORK
a. Scope
This method statement is to describe all Masonry work done in the project. Including boundary wall
b. References
Codes and specifications: ACI 530
- Hand tool, wheel barrows
- Trestles and board
- Project Manager, Project Engineer, Site Engineer, Surveyor & Assistant, Skilled/unskilled labors, Foreman,
Equipment operator

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
265
a. Safety
- Always use taglines with the precast element while lifting to keep the load steady.
the shift.
d. Work Preparation
e. Procedures
19. Lines and levels to be set out by the surveying team.
20. Materials will be stacked as close as possible to the working area.
21. Masonry/Block works, wall ties, damp proof membranes, cavity details will be in accordance with
Architectural and/or engineer’s drawings.
22. Masonry/Blocks and Mortar will be supplied to the Block layers by experienced workers (Hod carriers) the
25. Trestles and boards will be used where required for a short term as possible, these will be checked before,
during and after use.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
266
26. A telescopic forklift (if available or required) will be used to transport and place materials onto loading
platforms.
28. All surplus/broken materials will be removed from the working areas to ensure continual housekeeping as
part of our safe system on work.
f. Responsibilities
shortfalls.
met on site.
personnel.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
267
It is the Mason & Laborers’ duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety rules.
They must also perform the work as described in the method statement procedure.
3: -STEEL WORK
Designer shall provide STL with necessary shop drawings and MOS. (For reference only)
a. Scope
This method statement describes the requirements that will be observed at the site in handling and
storing materials, installation for steel frames to carry out the external units.
a. References
Approved Drawings and Details
Codes and specifications: Steel Works
b. Tools, Equipment’s & Manpower
- Cranes, lifting gear including sling wires, belts, shackles, Etc.
- Plastic ropes to be used as guides during lifting
- Spanners, transportation trucks, torque wrenches
- Site Supervisor, Site Engineer, Foreman, welders, and laborers
c. Safety
entering the site.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
268
obtained.
the shift.
b. Work Preparation
3. As per item suggest construction drawing and design calculations shall be submitted for approval before
fabrication and installation commences.
c. Procedures
1. PLANNING ACTIVITIES
- Plan the sequence of installation of the steel structure according to the approved construction schedule.
- Monitor the progress of the work and keep the Project Manager updated for any deviation from the original
schedule.
- Planning the installation of steel roof framing or any steel structures shall be made according to installation
priority and material availability.
2. TECHNICAL DRAWINGS
- The technical office receives the steel drawing and details from the engineering department based on the
availability of drawing. Materials after fabrication, specifications and in congruence with planning, technical
office shall issue detailed drawing for creating and copy to all the concerned departments.
3. HANDLING AND STORING

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
269
- Material Engineer shall receive all steel structures in accordance with the procedures and shall be responsible
for checking quantity and type of materials indicated in the packing list and qc inspector checks for quality.
The damages shall be immediately notified to take the required measures.
- Material shall be stored, handled and preserved in accordance with the procedure.
4. PRELIMINARY CHECKS
The following preliminary checks shall be carried out before installation begins, in order to verify:
- The availability of experienced, qualified personnel and equipment necessary to carry out the work
- The availability of fabricated steel structure and its status of acceptance.
- The status and availability of approved for construction drawing and specifications.
- All tools and equipment used for erection are calibrated as per Calibration of Inspection and Testing
Equipment procedure
5. MATERIAL WITHDRAWAL
- According to the installation sequence, the priority and on the basis of the availability of approved for
construction drawings and material, the fabrication supervisor retrieves the material from warehouse and
handles in accordance with the procedure and with specific care to avoid damage to surface preparation.
6. INSTALLATION
- Installation shall be in accordance with the approved code and specification or the approved supplier’s
installation procedures
- The setting out of works - the accurate positioning, plumbing, lining, and leveling of all steel installations
shall be in accordance with the approved drawings.
- Steel shall not be installed or placed on concrete until the concrete has already been cured.
- All work during installation shall be securely bolted and if required temporarily braced. No permanent bolting
shall be executed until correct positioning and alignment have been obtained.
- When all steel structure finally installed, it shall be inspected to check if its free from contaminations, twist
and distortions.
- Final installation of roofing tent should be done after all steel roofing works are finalize, mounting roofing
tent shall be carefully and safely executed, following any approved procedures in handling such activity.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
270
7. FINAL INSPECTION
- Check for steel structure frameworks vertical and horizontal alignment and height shall be carried after
mounting the structure.
- The setting out of works - the accurate positioning, plumbing, lining, and leveling of all steel installations
shall be in accordance with the approved drawings.
- All checking of connection, the installation drawing shall be marked to indicate acceptance.
d. Responsibilities
shortfalls.
met on site.
personnel.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
271
12. It is the Worker’s duty to properly wear the protective equipment provided and obey all safety rules. They
5: -FALSE CEILING
PRELIMINARY ACTIVITIES/ APPROVALS
1. The forklift will be used for lifting of material, safe for its use
2. The operator has a valid license to operate.
3. Slings have been identified and are correctly certified.
4. A toolbox talk is conducted prior to the start of the work, in accordance with procedure
5. One member of the erection crew will be assigned as banks man and shall be suitably trained by supplier for
the task.
6. Only the banks man will give instructions to the operator.
7. All required materials will be brought to the site location.
8. Forklift operations will be under the control of the banks man who will have clear visual contact at all times
with the equipment.
9. Ensure all Personal Protection Equipment like Steel Toe Safety Shoes. Safety helmets,
10. Goggle, Safety reflective jacket, Safety Belt is worn prior to start of work
11. The work Involves working at a height of 1.8 meters from Floor Level all the time should wear full body safety
harness.
12. All safety precautions to be taken when working at heights. Full body Safety harness to be strapped at all
times.
13. Erection of scaffolding shall be by the certified scaffolders.
14. All electrical cable shall be color coded by the competent person with monthly color coding.
15. Lighting shall be providing in the night shift activities.
WORK PROCEDURE
SITE SURVEY
The receipt of the shop drawings approved the consultants the site will be surveyed and any discrepancy found
will be notified to the main contractor for clarification.
SETTING OUT

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
272
Setting out and marking will be done as per approved shop drawing ceiling height of various areas shall be marked
based on the benchmark provided by main contractor level will be transferred on all the corners and chalk lines
will be marked.
FIXING OF WALL ANGLES

The wall angles will be fixed along the marked ceiling line depending on the substrate at 600mm to center spacing.
Before fixing the wall angle the substrate has to receive necessary finishes as per the finish schedule.
FIXING OF HANGERS
Fixing of hangers will be done as per the approved shop drawing layout details and using hanger anchorage
devices of the soffit as per approved material submittal. The position of the hangers will be marked on the soffit of
the slab, which has to be reviewed by main contractor site engineer upon receipt of MEP clearance hangers shall
be fixed at a spacing of 1200mm centers on both the directions where MEP services are clashing with fixing
hangers, additional supplies shall be provided by agreeing with main contractor on site.
FRAME WORK
The framework will be done according to the approved shop drawings and with approved materials. Framing
members such as Main Runners and Furring Channels of 0.55mm thick shall be placed as a spacing of 1200mm
and entries respectively. Heavy recessed fixtures should be independent of the ceiling framing stems.
FRAMEWORK INSPECTION AND MEP CLEARANCE

Upon completion of framework, respective areas shall be offered for main contractor and consultant inspection.
Inspection request will be raised on prescribed formats for first and second fix of ceiling. Written clearance for
MEP and associated works to be different stages for the uninterrupted flow of our works. Upon receiving the
approval and MEP clearance. Void closures shall be started by gypsum board installation. Gypsum boards of
specified type (Regular) shall be applied to the framing using gypsum screws at 200mm. For tile ceiling, the void
closure will be done by placing calcium silicate tiles on the complete grid work.
TAPING AND JOINTING FOR GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS

The following coat will be applied over the joints.
1. First Coat / Jointing Coat
2. Second Coat
3. Third Coat
First coat is initial jointing process where the fiber tape is fixed over the thin joining compound applied over the
joints. Another layer of jointing compound application would be done over the tape. This would be approximately
75mm wide. Screw heads also will be covered by the application of the joint compound. The second and third coat

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
273
will be applied successively after having dried the previous coats. Each successive coat to be feathered 40mm
beyond the previous layer sides of the joint. This would be sanded smooth after drying and leave for receiving
decoration by following trades.
FINAL CHECK-UP
On completion of taping, jointing and sanding, check the level and make sure that is in true level and the work is
within the tolerance limits.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
1. Drills with bits for concrete and metal

2. Screw gun – Power tool that drives all types of gypsum board screws through gypsum board
3. and into framing or substrate
4. Powder-actuated tool (E.g. Hilti Gun fastener)
5. Chalk line
6. Sprit level
7. Metal cutting scissors
8. Measuring tape – A steel retractable measuring tape, usually 25 feet in length.
9. Gypsum board T-square –Square edge for measuring and cutting gypsum board to length and for cutting out
holes for square outlet boxes and other openings.
10. Utility knife – the Standard cutting tool with replaceable/reversible blades for scoring and
11. cutting gypsum board.
12. Hammer – Drives nails through gypsum board into wood framing.
13. Keyhole saw – Small triangular saw for cutting out holes for outlet boxes, pipes, and other penetrations.
14. Assorted trowels and taping knives – Bladed tools for applying and smoothing tape and joint compound over
joints and fastener heads.
15. Tray / Box to contain joint compound while finishing joints and fastener heads.
i. 12.5mm thick regular gypsum boards
ii. 0.55mm thick suspension of framing elements
iii. T-24 exposed GI suspension
iv. 0.5 mm thick 600mm x 600mm Aluminum Perforated tile

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
274
6: -PLASTER WORKS
WORK PREPARATION
▪ Clean the surface and remove any dust, contaminated materials on plaster bases and substrates for direct
application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the work. Form ties and other
obstruction shall be removed or trimmed back even with the surface of the solid base.
▪ Dissimilar Backgrounds: where rendering is to be continued without break across joints between dissimilar
solid backgrounds which are in the same plane, cover joints with 200mm wide galvanized steel lathing as
specified & approved fixed with corrosion resistant fasteners at not more than 600mm centers along both
edges, apply mesh over electro-mechanical embedded conduits.
▪ Apply forcefully dash coat on concrete and concrete masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application.
Dash coat is to cover full surface to be plastered and is to provide rough surface of sharp protrusions ranging
3.0mm and 5.0mm. Dash-Coat Mix: 2 volume parts Portland cement to 3 volume parts fine sand, 1 part
bonding agent to 3 part clean water mixed to a mushy-paste consistency shall be left untowelled, undisturbed
and moist cured for at least 24 hours after application and before plastering.
▪ Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces. Check the
straightness in each corner and add grout to hold the external corner beads in correct and internal position to
be fixed using corrosion resistant fasteners.
▪ Before plastering starts, dampen, by spraying water concrete dash coat surfaces that are to receive plaster
with clean water.
WORK PROCEDURE
▪ All plaster shall be prepared in a mechanical mixer mix 1:5 (1 part cement and 5 part sand) using sufficient
water to produce a workable consistency. Mix fiber 0.6 kg/m3 of the mortar or plaster by first mixing with
some water (30%). After all the ingredients have been added including the remaining mixing water, the plaster
should be mixed for a further few minutes until uniform fiber dispersion. Plaster not used within 1.5h from
start of mixing shall be discarded.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
275
▪ The second coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact with dash coat.
▪ The surface of the second coat shall be brought to a true, even plane with a rod or straightedge, filling surface
defects in place with plaster.
▪ Applied plaster shall be floated as smooth as possible and then steel-troweled. Steel troweling shall be
delayed as long as possible and used only to eliminate the uneven points and to force aggregate particles into
the plaster surface.
▪ Each plaster coat shall be applied to an entire wall or ceiling panel without interruption to avoid cold joints
and abrupt changes in the uniform appearance of succeeding coats. Wet plaster shall abut set plaster at
naturally occurring interruptions in the plane of the plaster, such as corner angles, openings, and control joints
where this is possible.
▪ Make internal angles and corners square.
▪ Finished grooves shall be neat, of uniform width and depth, sharp straight edges, and exact vertical and
horizontal lines. Elevation grooves shall be cut before plaster sets by using molded guide or wooden strip and
fixing it in temporary grout and screed. Regarding recessed, follow the procedures same as grooves.
▪ Form cornices by plastering additional coats against pre-formed wood templates fixed onto plastered
elevation. Make form wood templates to shapes, dimensions and projection indicated on drawings. Apply
additional under coats in thickness not more that 10mm until obtaining required projection. Final finishes
refer to item D.
▪ Plaster should not deviate more than plus or minus 3mm in 3m from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces,
as measured by a 3-m straight edge placed in any location on surface.
CURING
▪ A. Provide sufficient moisture in the plaster by spraying water as frequently as required at least twice per day.
▪ Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and
indented surfaces. Repair work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, and dry out as necessary to
comply with visual effects.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
276
▪ To correct inaccuracies, dubbed out in thickness of not more than 10mm in same mix as base coat and total
thickness of dubbing must not exceed 25mm unless otherwise approved.
▪ In areas where thickness is more than 20mm, apply dash keying mix before adding new layer.
▪ To correct inaccuracies in beam, column together with block work, chip carefully the concrete structures by
using hammer and chisel to receive dash coat (follow the procedure in 1.C). For 25mm thick plaster repair
apply it one time as per 2.B. For 45mm thick, apply 20mm first coat and apply keying mix before adding the
new layer. Each layer must not exceed 10 mm, start again same as from 1C.
7: -PAINTING WORKS
WORK PREPARATION
▪ Hardware materials which are already fixed and not to be painted shall be removed. Removal if not possible, it
shall be covered/protected appropriately before surface preparation and painting will commence.
▪ Clean and prepare concrete or cement plaster surfaces to be painted. Efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and
oils shall be removed.
▪ The surface of the area to be painted would be prepared by removing loose particles, blemishes, and deleterious
materials by way of sanding.
WORK PROCEDURE
▪ The paint system would be emulsion paint for internal and as approved for external but to be approved by the
Engineer. The surface to be painted when prepared one coat of paint to be applied as primer. Curing would be
made by drying until 4 hours is attained prior to the succeeding coat to be applied.
▪ Two coats of Stucco would be applied after the primer has reached its curing period. But each coat shall have
an interval time of 4 hours for curing. Before the application of second coat stucco sanding would be done for
cleaning and removing of splattered, blemishes and stains on the painted surface.
▪ Then two coats of final paint would be applied as per the approved RAL color.
▪ For working at height, fixed and movable scaffolding would be erected as per area requirements. Scaffolding
when erected shall be inspected with Safety officer prior to usage. Operatives will be inductive before working
at site. Pre-start meeting would be conducted before the start of painting activities and tool box meeting would
be regularly conducted by safety officer for all concern operatives.
▪ Inspection Request to be submitted for checking and approval of the Engineer.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
277
TILING
SITE PLANNING:
▪ Define the area required to be covered

▪ Identify possible counter backs of material transportation
▪ Plan site needs of materials
▪ Clean the working area and barricade it
▪ Arrange the electricity and water needs
▪ Arrange the site safety as per required by HSE
▪ Arrange the all material & equipment nearby site
▪ Arrange the skilled manpower
▪ Arrange the design & drawing of the area.
▪ Carry take off analysis and cutting schedule
WORK PROCEDURE:
▪ Marble shall be plain machine cut and mirror polished. The marble shall be smooth and of even surface without
holes or pits.
▪ Every marble shall be cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the full depth so that
a straight edge laid along the side of the marble shall be fully in contact with it. The top surface shall also be fine
chisel dressed to remove all waviness. machine cut slabs are used, fine chisel dressing of machine cut surface
need not be done provided a straight edge laid anywhere along the machine cut surfaces is in contact with every
point on it. The sides and top surface of slabs shall be machined rubbed or table rubbed with coarse sand before
paving.
▪ All angles and edges of the marble slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be
true and plane.
▪ Marble slabs flooring shall also be laid as per the pattern/design as described in item of work and/or drawing.
▪ All marble shall be wetted before placing in position.
▪ Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted, and mopped.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
278
▪ The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as Given in the
BOQ/Specifications/Offer.
▪ The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and the thickness at any place under
the slab shall be not less than 12 mm or as specified in the BOQ/Specifications/Offer.
▪ The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same
at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white
cement with or without admixture of pigment to match the shade of the marble slabs.
▪ The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Joint thickness shall not be more than 1 mm.
▪ Due care shall be taken to match the grains of slabs which shall be selected judiciously having uniform pattern of
Veins/streaks or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
▪ Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster skirting or
dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without waviness.
▪ The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

MATERIALS
As per description in provided design
EQUIPMENT
• Stone cutters
• Spirit Level
• Solid notch towel
• Hammers with Rubber Tips
PORCELAIN, CERAMICS, AND TERRAZO (UNDER CARPET) TILING

SITE PLANNING:
• Define the area required to be covered
• Identify possible counter backs of material transportation
• Plan site needs of materials

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
279
• Clean the working area and barricade it

• Arrange the electricity and water needs
• Arrange the site safety as per required by HSE
• Arrange the all material & equipment nearby site
• Arrange the skilled manpower
• Arrange the design & drawing of the area.
• Carry take off analysis and cutting schedule
WORK PROCEDURE:
▪ Handling, Delivery and Storage of tiles, adhesives and cementitious / grout materials will be in a manner to
ensure no discoloration and damages occurs.
▪ Tile consignments shall be stacked in batches segregated with respect to type, color, shape, thickness and
form. Tiles from different batches will not be mixed in one batch / bundle.
SUBSTRATE PREPARTAION OF FLOORS
▪ Cast in place concrete substrate shall be sufficiently smooth and level such that when thin set
mortar/adhesive to accept tiles is applied.
▪ Grind off high spots and fill in low spots as necessary to ensure no void occurs.
▪ All toilets and pantries where to receive waterproofing, apply waterproofing prior to installation of tiles
following the detail as shown on the relevant approved drawings.
SETTING OUT AND INSTALLATION OF TILES:
▪ Mix bedding / adhesive materials thoroughly as approved to a uniform consistency in a suitable forced
action as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
▪ For installation of ceramic/porcelain/agglomerate tiles as required by approved shop drawings/finishing
schedule.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
280
▪ Only the approved tile adhesive /mortars will be applied to substrate and backside of the tiles as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
▪ The laying and fixing of tiles will be start from the location marked on the approved shop drawing and
mentioned as “Start Point.”
▪ Tiles will be laid in prepared area to give true and regular appearance to tiles and joints
▪ maintaining the desired level as shown on the approved drawings. Tiles will be fixed in accordance with
approved setting out drawings.
▪ Level marks will be provided and set out up to finish level as per surveyor’s marking based on the approved
drawings.
▪ Tiles will be fixed in place and pressed firmly with twisting / sliding action to give finished bed thickness
within the tolerance limits as defined in specifications and drawings.
▪ Installation will be in a manner to ensure that no voids under the tiles occur.
▪ It will be ensured that joints are true to line, continuous and without steps.
▪ The joint width will be 2mm.
▪ Ensure joints in skirting and Joints between walls and floors are continuous and match in alignment. The
supply and laying, fixing or installation of the various types of floor and skirting finishes will be as shown on
the approved shop drawings or finishing schedules.
▪ The materials used for each type of floor and skirting finishes shall be approved by the Consultant.
▪ Control joints will be provided in large areas in each direction and at perimeter walls or where required as
per detail shown in relevant approved shop drawings.
▪ The tiles will be fixed closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars,
or covers overlap tile. The tile work will be extended into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated and will be
terminated neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
▪ Pre-mold corner pieces shall be provided for all right-angle corners as per approved shop drawing.
▪ Surfaces will be sloped uniformly where indicated/required by drawings.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
281
▪ Tile floors shall be finished flush with gratings, strainers and drains, where applicable and as shown on the
drawings.
GROUTING
▪ Application of tile adhesives and grouts, as approved, will be carried out in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and relevant temperature and humidity conditions specified in manufacturer’s product
data sheet.
▪ Allow bedding/adhesive materials to harden sufficiently before grouting.
▪ Ensure that the joint width and depth is maintained to 2mm & 6mm (or the depth of the tile if less)
respectively or in accordance with grout/tile manufacturer’s recommendations and free from dust and
debris.
▪ Grouting and filling of joints will be done in accordance with grout manufacturer’s
▪ recommendations.
▪ Grout will be forced to fill joints completely to entire depth, tooled to an approved profile, clean off by
leaving surfaces free from blemishes.
▪ Control Joints / Expansion Joints will be provided as per approved shop drawings and will be sealed with
approved special sealants.
▪ Floor will be closed for all kind of traffic including foot traffic for 24 hours (or as per manufacturer’s
recommendations) after installation for sufficient hardening.
CONCRETING WORKS
▪ The contractor shall obtain approval from various grades of concrete as specified in the drawings.
▪ Before concreting, necessary approval for rebars, formwork should be obtained from responsible engineer.
Clearance from electro mechanical shall be obtained. All the inserts, fixtures are in firmly position.
▪ Request for Inspection shall be submitted in advance clearly mentioning the scope of concreting including
the time, date, grade and quantity of concrete.
▪ All the equipment necessary for the proposed concrete should be made available in working condition at
site. Proper lighting arrangements should be made available at concreting location if required.
CONCRETING WORKS

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
282
▪ The contractor shall obtain approval from various grades of concrete as specified in the drawings.
▪ Before concreting, necessary approval for rebars, formwork should be obtained from responsible engineer.
Clearance from electro mechanical shall be obtained. All the inserts, fixtures are in firmly position.
▪ Request for Inspection shall be submitted in advance clearly mentioning the scope of concreting including
the time, date, grade and quantity of concrete.
▪ All the equipment necessary for the proposed concrete should be made available in working condition at site.
Proper lighting arrangements should be made available at concreting location if required. Adequate
manpower shall be arranged at site for finishing the concrete before it takes initial setting.
• Ensure that the correct grade and required quantity of concrete is ordered and the delivery of concrete shall be
such that there should not be any time gap which shall lead to cold joints in the freshly placed concrete.
• STL approved Independent Testing Agency should be readily available at site prior to commencement of
concreting to conduct test on concrete. All the equipment used by the Independent Testing Agency shall have
valid calibration certificate for each equipment.
• Temperature of concrete should be taken and it shall be within the permissible limits. If the temperature of
concrete exceeds 32°C at the placing point, STL engineer should be informed and placing shall be at the
discretion of STL engineer as it may create cold joint at the placement.
• Slump test in accordance with BS 1881 should be conducted before placing of concrete. Tests shall also be
conducted when making test cubes and a record must be kept for all these tests. Slump test should be carried
out at the rate of one test per load of concrete or one test per 10 cu. M of concrete delivered to site whichever
is less.
• Samples for work cube test shall be taken at the rate of one sample from every load or one test for 15 co. of
concrete whichever is less of a particular grade placed with a minimum of one sample taken every day that the
mix is used. A sample consists of (6) Six cubes to be made, (3) three to be tested on (7) seven days and the
balance (28) twenty-eight days.
• Test cubes shall be crushed in presence of STL engineer and the results should be submitted to STL in an
approved form giving the information like cube specimen mark, date of casting, date of testing, age,
dimensions, compressive strength, weight of the cube etc.
• Concrete shall only be placed on surface ready to receive it. Concrete shall be placed gently to avoid
segregation and care must be taken to see that the reinforcement is completely surrounded by the concrete and

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
283
no voids or cavities left in the body of the concrete. It shall generally be deposited in horizontal layers to a
compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm.
• Concrete shall not be thrown or dropped from a height exceeding 2 m and it shall be placed in final position
and shall not be remanded.
• Concreting shall be carried out continuously and fresh concrete shall not be placed against inset concrete,
which is more than 30 thirty minutes unless a construction joint is formed.
• The laying is shall be planned to ensure that a bay or panel is completed at an approved joint before the
temperature rises above the permissible limits. At any case concrete shall not be placed in standing water in
the formwork. The depth of layers and the time between placements of layer shall be such that each layer can
be properly merged into preceding layer before initial set takes place.
• Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration during the operation of placing and thoroughly worked
around the reinforcements, embedded fixtures and the corner of the formwork to form a solid mass free from
voids.
• Vibration of the concrete shall not be applied by way of reinforcement. The duration of vibration shall be
limited to that required to produce satisfactory compaction without causing segregation.
• Curing of concrete shall be made from the next day and if the weather is hot, proper protection arrangement
shall be in place to protect the concrete from quick drying. Curing shall be arranged continuously as per
requirement on completion of concreting, the site shall be cleaned and any splashes of concrete shall be
removed to avoid setting and hardening.
MASONRY WORKS
Block work shall be constructed generally in accordance with project specification.

The area is to be cleaned, all loose materials to be removed.
Before starting of block work, the area is to be washed with water.

All block shall be thoroughly wetted with water before they are laid and tops of walls left from previous day
work shall be similarly wetted before the new work commences.
Block work shall rise at the rate of four courses per 900mm. A maximum of 6 courses being built in a section
in any one day.
Walls shall be built in stretcher bond unless otherwise specified.

Cutting of blocks shall be kept to a minimum. When cutting of blocks is essential, a bolster shall be used in
preference to a trowel.
All units shall be laid on a full bed of mortar in perfectly horizontal courses. All perpend joints shall be in
perfect vertical alignment and well filled by buttering the ends of the unit and then sliding into position against
its neighbor. Collar joints shall be filled by buttering the stretcher side.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
284
All joints shall be solidly filled and the thickness of the joints shall not exceed 10mm. All mortar joints shall be
finished flush with the general face of the wall unless otherwise specified.
Hollow block at jambs, reveals of opening etc shall be filled solid with concrete.
PLASTERING WORK
MATERIAL REQUIREMENT:
Material approval for Sand, cement and water has to be obtained prior to take up the plastering work. Cement
shall be of Portland cement conforming project specification. Curing of block work should be done for at least
7 days.
Sand for mortar shall be of beach or dune sand washed clean free from clay, chalk, shells organic materials and
other impurities.
Water shall be potable.
RENDERING:
Mortar mix shall be accurately gauged by volume using approved gauge boxes.
The ingredients shall first be mixed dry thoroughly to obtain a uniform colour before water is added to the mix.
Rendering shall be composed of one part cement to three parts sand by volume.
Only sufficient material shall be prepared which can easily be applied within the initial setting time of the
material and no water shall be added after the initial mix. Unset plaster shall be discarded when initial set
occurs and no reconstituted mix shall be allowed.
Surfaces to receive plasterwork shall be brushed down to remove dust loose flecking material shall be removed
and the projections of mortar and the like shall be clipped off or ground away. Surfaces shall be dampened
sufficiently to ensure uniform absorption.
Backgrounds shall be prepared as required to suit the finish being applied. Dense, smooth concrete shall be
keyed with PVA emulsion bonding agent, block work shall be hacked if necessary.
Junctions between dissimilar materials such as block work and concrete shall be covered with a continuous
strip of galvanized expended metal lathing at least 300 mm wide securely nailed in position with plated
masonry mails.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
285
Metal angle beads, casing beads and the like shall be fixed in placed before commencing plastering and the
plastering shall be worked up to the bead to finish flush.
Rendering to finish 12 mm thick may be carried out in one coat. Rendering over 12 mm thick shall be carried
out in two coats. In two coats of works the coats shall be of equal thickness, the first coat shall be properly
scratched and keyed for the second coat.
The finished surface of the rendering shall be smooth with a wood float.
Rendering shall be prevented from drying out too quickly. All external rendering shall be protected by properly
constructed screens during hot period.
The surface of the finish coat shall be smooth and free from waviness irregularities or blemishes with straight
level and plumb angles.
Curing shall be done with approved potable water for a period not less than 7 days in any case.
BUILDING PAINTING WORKS
SURFACE PREPARATION:
Paint shall be applied to properly prepared, clean, sound and dry surfaces. No paint shall be applied to surface
structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation,
efflorescence, etc. before application of each coat. The surface shall first be scrapped to remove mortar
splashes. The surface shall then be rubbed down with fine glass paper to remove loose particles and to smooth
irregularities.
The surface preparation shall be inspected and approved by engineer before the application of primer/ filler
coat.
APPLICATION:
Priming coats shall be applied by brush to give a coat of adequate thickness with no misses and to satisfy the
porosity of the surface. The priming shall be well worked into the surface, joints, angles and other places where
moisture is likely to collect. Joinery fittings shall be primed at works after inspection and approval of the
joinery. The back of all timber frames shall also be primed.
On approval, the filler coat shall be spread evenly with a scraper on overall surfaces and allowed to dry. This
has to be sanded down and dusted off. by emery paper to obtain a very smooth surface finish.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
286
Undercoats shall be applied evenly over the whole surface to give a solid film, Care shall be taken to avoid
uneven thickness of paint at edges and angles.
On application of filler coat/under coat and before proceeding with finishing coats, approval shall be taken.
Each coat of paint shall be thoroughly dried before the next coat is applied and the surface of primers and under
coats shall be lightly rubbed down. Further coats shall be applied at proper intervals to secure maximum
adhesion. Where two hard gloss finishing coats are scheduled, the second coat shall be applied within 48 hours.
All paint shall be brush applied unless otherwise approved or specified. Paint shall be applied so that the
finished surface is free from brush marks. When spray painting is done surfaces adjoining those being sprayed
shall be carefully and closely masked.
Finishing coats shall be applied evenly over the whole surface to give a solid film free from brush marks, sags,
runs orange peeling and other defects.
Three coats of clean wood finish shall be applied. The first in the joiner’s shop where applicable followed by
two coats immediately after fixing. Where scheduled the finished work shall be matted down wet, rinsed, dried
and a high gloss produced with rubbing compound.
After completion of finishing coat, approval shall be taken. Any snag items / punch list shall be attended
immediately and clearance shall be taken from Engineer.
CARPET FLOORING WORKS
GENERAL REQUIREMENT:
Before carpet-laying work commences, it has to be ensured that the building is weather tight.
All the wet trades have finished their work. All the painting works should be finished and dry.
All the socket out lets, duct covers and the like around which carpet needs to be cut have been fixed.
The substrate on which the carpet is laid should be dry and clean.
Carpet shall be cut and fitted to all socket outlets and other fixtures and shall be cut in all the doorways and
recesses. It shall not be pieced in.
Where practicable, room coverings shall start with a full width of carpet by the side of door.
INSTALLATION OF CARPETS WITH TACKLES FIXINGS
Unless the manufacturers specially recommends or otherwise, all the carpet other than foam backed and fiber
bonded carpet, shall be fixed by means of tackles strip (gripper).

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
287
All carpets of one type, color and pattern shall be from the same batch.
The underlay shall be installed so that its seams do not shadow through the carpet and do not coincide with
those of the carpet when laid in the same direction. Uneven edges shall be overlapped and cut through.
The seams of rubber and rubber-based under lays shall be joined with approved tape as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
The underlay shall be fixed along its perimeter in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The underlay shall cover the treads and risers of stairs and shall be fixed to prevent movement and wrinkling.
Seams in carpet shall be joined by approved heat bonded tape or as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Care
shall be taken to ensure that:
The joints are strong enough to permit the carpet to the stretched and not break down under use.
The pile is laying in the same direction.
The pile is not caught down into the seam.

The seams are straight.
The carpet shall be laid with the seams parallel to one main axis of the room.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
288
The gripper shall be fixed around the perimeter of the area to be covered leaving a gap approximately two
thirds of the thickness of the carpet which shall be stretched into position over the gripper using a knee kicker
or power stretcher as appropriate to form a neat rolled edge.
Binder bar shall be used at all free edges of carpet and double binder bar shall be used where carpets of a
different type, color or pattern meet.
Single or double binder bar appropriate shall be used at all doorways situated under the center line the door leaf
.
At stairs the pile of the carpet shall be towards the bottom. Gripper shall be fixed to the bottom of all risers and
to the adjacent horizontal surface of the tread.
INSTALLATION OF CARPET WITH ADHESIVES
Fiber bonded, high density foam backed carpet and carpet where the manufacturer specifically so
recommended shall be fully bonded to the sub floor using QP approved peel up adhesive applied in
accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
Joints in the carpet shall be bonded with a joining adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet
and shall parallel to one main axis of the room.
Where applicable care shall be taken to ensure that:
The pile is laying in the same direction.
The pattern matches where a repeating motif occurs.
The pile is not caught down into the joint.
The joints are straight.
Adhesive marks shall be removed from the carpet and other exposed surfaces as the work proceeds.
At stairs the pile of the carpet shall be towards the bottom. The carpet shall be folded under any exposed edges
and fixed to each tread as one continuous piece unless a nosing is provided
Edge trim or dividing strips shall be used at all free edges of carpet and double binder bar shall be used where
carpets of a different type, color or pattern meet.
On completion of the installation, all loose rap ends shall be trimmed, the carpet shall be cleaned with a beater
type vacuum cleaner and covered with clean dust sheets, hardboard, etc., as necessary to prevent damage from
dust and traffic until handover.
All carpets shall be installed by skilled operatives only, so that it is flat and sufficiently taut to ensure that
movement of furniture over the surface does not cause rocking to take place.
DRY WALL PARTITION WORK
Approval for the materials like framework, partition boards, including fixtures have to be taken prior to
proceed for actual work.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
289
Setting out of the areas where dry wall partitions have to be erected has to be done and the approval has to be
obtained to proceed further.
Framework material has to be selected based on approved drawings, Architectural specifications and should be
fixed as per manufacturers recommendations.
All the succeeding activities like electrical & telephone conducting wiring and other M&E recess are to be
completed successively.
Clearance has to be obtained before proceeding with fixing of partition boards.
Based on architectural requirement the selection of the boards are to be made. They must be damage free and
have required thickness.
The boards are to be fixed to the frame in position, true to line and level.
All the joints are to be filled with approved sealer tapes, putty and the decorative coat to be applied.
FLOOR TILING WORKS
Material approval for tiles, cement mortar, grouting mortar shall be obtained prior to commencement of work.
Approval shall be taken form QP for the tiling pattern.
Each area to be tiled shall be set out to establish correct datum level and “spot” levels in each area shall control
levels.
Gauge rods indicating the overall measurements of 10 tiles and joints shall be prepared and used to set out the
tiling to ensure that cut tiles are kept minimum.
Setting out shall be agreed with the engineer before actual tile lying is commenced.
Floor tiles shall be laid in cement and sand bedding (1:3) of thickness minimum 15 mm and maximum 20 mm
thick. Tiles less than 10 mm thick shall be laid in bedding not exceeding 15 mm thick.
Bedding mortar shall be a stiff plastic consistency with only sufficient water incorporated so that when tamped
and fully compacted in place. Water does not bleed to the surface.
The bedding shall be roughly levelled and compacted and the surface dusted with dry cement powder. Cement
powder shall be lightly toweled in until it becomes damp. Alternatively, the back of tiles shall be coated with
neat cement and water slurry applied immediately before laying in position.
The tiles shall be soaked in clean water for 15-30 minutes before fixing and allowed to drain for 10 minutes to
remove all surplus water. Fully vitrified tiles do not require soaking.
Tiles shall then be laid in the bedding mix and tamped level.
All the tiles laid are to be checked for hollowness sound before grouting is applied. Grouting shall comprise
cement and sand (1:1) mixed to a paste consistency with the minimum of water where specified to be colored,
pigment shall be thoroughly mixed in with dry cement before the sand is added.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
290
The grout shall be applied to the joints in the tiling and worked well in until flush with the tile surface. Surplus
grout shall be wiped off with a cloth whilst still wet. Joint grouting shall be carried out within 4 hours of the
completion of the laying of tiles.
Tiles shall be laid level or to 1% falls in “wet” areas as may be required. Localized variations in levels for a
nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of 3 mm under a 3-meter straight edge. Particular care shall be taken
in “wet” areas to prevent low spots and the pooling of water.
Skirting of the same tile size as the floor shall be fixed in such a manner that their vertical joints coincide with
the horizontal joints of the floor tiles.
The site is cleaned and the surrounding is cleared. A Request for Inspection shall be submitted for final
inspection and approval of the work.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
SITE VERIFICATION…
Prior to any site installation of Hollow Metal Doors & Frames, site verification will be done in order to ensure
the readiness of wall for the installation.
If site is not found ready for the installation of metal frames, main contractor will be requested to expedite the
work of sub-contractors dealing with the walls and partitions where doors are to be installed.
SAFETY AT WORKS…
Primarily, safety is the most important regulation to be implemented for this job or any other job. Main goal is
to achieve accomplishment of the project with “Zero Accident” until completion of all works.
Installation crew will be provided with all the necessary personal protective equipment’s, they will be advised
and made aware of the importance of safety at site.
INSTALLATION OF METAL DOORS & HARDWARE…
After site verification approval, metal frames can be installed accordingly. Number of installation crews will be
determined by the quantity of doors & frames to be installed and the time span allocated. Attached, please find
suggested installation instruction of metal doors, frames and hardware for reference.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
291
PRIMER TOUCH-UP…
During the installation process, damages and scratches cannot be avoided. Installation crews will be instructed
to take care for installing the material. They will be equipped as well to do the touching-up primer for the doors
and frames. First inspection will be done to determine the severity and amount of touch-up needed. For minor
scratches, area will be cleaned with soft cloth to remove all loose dirt and loose primer. Further, it is touched-
up with specified paint using artist’s brush. Thereafter, it is dried-up for a period of two hours.
For severe scratches and damages, first all loose primer will be removed. Later it is sanded down to bare metal
with 80 grit sandpaper and feather grit sandpaper. All dust and derbies will be wiped and cleaned with soft
cloth. Affected area will be re-printed with the specified primer and it will be allowed to dry for 1 hour. All the
hardware installed on the door and frame will be masked in order to avoid loose primer sticking on it.
Installation crews will be made aware of all health and safety precautions to be followed as recommended by
paint manufacturer.
WOODEN DOORS
All the materials, which shall be used for fabrication of doors, frames, architraves shall be approved prior to
start manufacturing.
The timbers used for doors shall be free from unsound knots, dead knots, loose knots and knotholes. It should
also be free from decay and insect attack other than pinholes.
All structural timber and soft wood for permanent incorporation in the works shall be treated for protection
from degradation by wood destroying organism.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
292
Protection against fire shall be by vacuum pressure process carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
The certificate of treatment of timber in accordance with the specification shall be provided with every
consignment of treated timber delivered.
Treatment is to be carried out after all cutting and shaping has been completed. If subsequent cutting of the
timber is unavoidable all freshly exposed surfaces shall receive a liberal application of the preservative
recommended in the relevant treatment specification.
The plywood’s used shall be free from bow, twist and warp. The core in 3-ply shall not be more than 60% of
the total thickness.
All plywood’s thicker than 10 mm shall be made of not less than 5 plies.
Flush doors shall be plywood faced on both faces with hardwood lipping to all edges.
Openings for glazing in fire check flush doors shall be fitted with hardwood glazing beads both sides minimum
25 mm thick, fixed with brass screws and cups.
Timber for carpentry shall be in continuous lengths in one piece wherever possible.
All joints shall be glued and screwed or dowelled and in work which is exposed to the weather or internal wet
areas they shall be glued with WBP Grade glue.
All works shall be prepared, framed up and put together at the earliest time possible and placed in a drying
room for as long as practicable before being wedged or glued up.
All joinery work shall be taken approval from Engineer before being fixed in place.
All the dimensions shall be verified on site prior to fabrication and installation.
Exposed and semi-concealed joinery shall be planed and sanded to remove all machinery and other surface
defects so that after application of the specified finish imperfections in manufacture will not be apparent.
Architraves, cover fillets and the like shall be accurately shaped to fit the contour of any irregular surface
against which they are required to form a close connection.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
293
Where possible joinery for painting shall be primed before delivery to site, and where this has not been carried
out shall be primed as soon as possible after delivery and approval shall be taken from Engineer.
All joineries shall generally be secured with nails, masonry nails may be used to secure joinery timber directly
to concrete or block work.
Hardwood joinery and other timber which is polished or clear finished shall be secured with screws and with
plastic plugs where fixed to concrete or block work. The heads of the screws shall be counter sunk below the
finished surface and covered in a matching timber pellet glued in and finished perfectly flush and smooth.
On completion of fixing of doors/joineries, final inspection shall be carried out and approval shall be obtained
from engineer.
SUSPENDED CEILING WORK
MATERIAL APPROVAL
Approval of ceiling material like framing sections, ceiling board, panels etc should be taken from engineer
before proceeding with ceiling works. All the approved materials sample should be available at site for
reference.
APPROVAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS
Approval shall be obtained for shop drawings showing the general layout, support framing, and installation
details including lay-in, hanger and support details.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CEILING WORKS
The suspended ceiling works shall be taken up only when:

The building is weather tight
The wet trades have finished their work

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
294
All works above the ceiling such as ductwork, pipe work, and electrical work had been installed, tested,
inspected and approved.
The positions of light fittings, diffusers and the like have been checked.
The positions of access panels have been confirmed with the engineer.
All the services have been installed.
The fastenings and supports installed by others are rigid and secured in place.
The installation of other services shall not touch the back of the ceiling.
Engineer’s approval shall be obtained for the clearance before proceeding with ceiling works.
The manufacture’s recommendations shall be followed for installation of ceilings unless as agreed with
engineer.
INSTALLATION
The ceiling works shall be installed within 3 mm of required level, when measured against a straight
over a distance of 3 m.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
295
The ceiling tiles shall be set out so that the soffits are level, free from undulations and lopping, with all lines
and joints straight and parallel to walls unless shown otherwise. They are symmetrical about the center lines of
the roof, or space, beginning with a tile or joint line as required avoiding narrow tiles at the perimeter edges.
All junctions between the ceiling and walls, and between the ceiling and columns, the ceiling shall be finished
with perimeter edge trim. The trim shall be fixed at maximum 450 mm centers.
Additional hanging supports shall be provided between the floor or roof structure above and the suspended
ceiling at all access panels, light fittings, diffusers etc. The lay-in material shall be accurately cut to
accommodate all such fittings. Under no circumstance shall the lay-in material support any fitting.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the tiles, strip ceilings are kept clean if subsequently removed for access to
services, for inspection or for the remedial work.
FIXED TYPE SUSPENDED CEILINGS

GENERAL:
Gypsum board will be used for fixed type suspended ceilings unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
Installation of gypsum board for suspended ceilings and associated plaster or rendering work shall comply with
the relevant provisions of project specification.
MATERIALS:
Gypsum wallboard shall be as per approved thickness complying with project specification, having one face
finished for direct decoration.
The edge profiles of wallboard shall be:
“Tapped “for smooth seamless jointing.
“Beveled” for V-jointing.
“Square” for stippled textured coatings, corner strip jointing or plaster.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
296
Accessories for installing wallboard shall be approved proprietary materials recommended by the
manufacturer’s, inclusive of the following:
Soffit assemblies, where indicated on drawings consists of galvanized steel channel runners and studs faced
with gypsum panels, screw attached unless specified otherwise and approved by the engineer.
Hangers, hanger attachments, support carrier members with connecters, screws, and trim members related to
ceiling as is required for complete.
Fabricated miscellaneous clips, splices, connectors, screws, and other standard metal accessories of strength
and design compatible with the suspension methods and system.
INSTALLATION:
A complete setting out of the ceiling area for lines and levels have to be carried out prior to framing works.
And the levels have to be approved by the engineer.
Adequate preparation is to be made for the attachment of hangers and fasteners and provide for the support and
incorporation of flush- mounted and recessed fittings and services components.
The ceiling system shall be installed in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations and to project
specification.
5- MEP Installation
A-Material:
Approved Materials only used at site by STL Employee and shall be installed as per the approved shop
drawings.
B-Storage and Protection:

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
297
All equipment’s delivered to site, shall be completely identified in accordance with shop and certified drawings
prepared for this work. Material shall be Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground,
properly protected from the weather and construction activities
C-Installation:
Installation shall be done in sequential steps.
1. First Fix
2. Second Fix
3. Third and final Fix
First Fix
All Electrical work first fix such as concrete embedded works, boxes, PVC conduits, EMT, RSC, Cable Trays,
supports and Accessories shall be installed as per shop drawing and detail layouts.
All Mechanical work first fix such as piping work for equipment’s, Fire Fighting, Sewage, etc.& duct work
complete with supports and accessories shall be installed as per shop drawing and detail layouts.
Second Fix
MEP complementary work such as, wires, cables, duct and pipe insulation above false ceiling, Electrical Panel
Boards and MCC, HVAC Equipment’s including cable trays/ raceways, runways inside technical rooms shall
be installed and preliminary test to be conducted to make sure that all installation work comply with standard
and specification before closing ceiling and be ready for third fix.
Third and finishing Fix

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
298
MEP related approved system devices such as, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, Fire Alarm System, Fire
Fighting Sprinkles, HVAC Gilles, Fans, Thermostat, sanitary fixtures, etc. shall be installed nicely in a
finishing manner as per the Project requirements and Engineer satisfaction.
6- Responsibilities
a- Project Manager
1- To ensure that all the preparation and application works are carried out according to the Contract
Specification and the approved drawings.
2- To ensure that the progressing of works is carried out according to the planned program and as per the
approved method of statement.
3- To ensure that all the equipment and material required for executing the work are available according to the
planned construction program.
4- To co-ordinate with the client / consultant, MEP coordinator, Safety Officer for a safe and proper execution
of the works
b- Site Engineer
5- To ensure that the works are carried out according to the Contract Specification, approved material,
approved method statement and approved shop drawings.
6- To provide all necessary information and distribute responsibilities to the construction team.
7- To monitor the progress of work in relation with the work program and to report to the Project Manager.
8- To co-ordinate with the safety officer and to ensure that the works are carried out in safe practicing method.
c- Foreman
9- The foreman will carry out his duties by maintaining continuous coordination with the QC engineer on daily
basis, and ensure proper distribution of the work force on the required and planned locations.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
299
10- To ensure that his assistant foreman/ team leader are aware of the job requirements and they have enough
information to carry out their duties properly.
11- To ensure that the daily work is progressing as planned and advice the site engineer of any requirement for
additional resources.
12- To ensure in consultation with the site engineer that the manpower involved in the works are moving as
agreed and planned for the work.
13- To control disposal of waste materials according to the instructions received from the site engineer.
14- To ensure full coordination with the safety officer to maintain safe working and proper housekeeping of the
site, following the proved safety measures and further ensure that all his working team are aware of the same to
prevent accident and losses.
15- To inform the QC engineer regarding areas ready for inspection.
16- Foreman, QC engineer and the storekeeper are responsible for the distribution and control of materials.
7-Tools and Equipment

All required Tools shall be ready at site and in store for immediate use in case needed.
8- Health and Safety
Strictly followed as per the manufacturer's Health and Safety recommendations for handling and use of the
materials. Ensure all involved personnel shall be aware of the same.
B- Protection
All equipment during installation process shall be protected as per manufactures instructions after installation
by using wrap nylon, sketch tape and hard syrefoon or cartoon to avoid any scratches, dust penetration and
damaged to devices and enclosures.
All devices installed above ceiling, on ceiling, walls and partition to be protected by nylon wrap to avoid dust
penetration and scratches.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
300
All wall, ceilings, floors, Panels, Motors, AHU’s, FCU, VAVs shall be protected after installation and cable
termination by wrapping it by heavy nylon material and cartoon to avoid animals and rates from entering the
units which might damage the materials. Also, it is important for HVAC equipment’s such as filters, Pipes, etc
to keep clean from dust and debris.
C- Cleanings
All MEP equipment’s and related devices shall be cleaned as per manufacturer recommendation either by Air
Blower or Towel. All leftover, cut pieces of cables, pipes remaining, welding rods, bolts and nuts shall be
removed before protecting the units in order to become ready for commissioning and handover.
D- Commissioning and Handover
The Commissioning team shall conduct his own preliminary commissioning on all equipment’s and devices
that required to be commissioned prior to invite the Supplier and Consultant to perform the commission and
handover the system to owner.
As per our company rules and regulation, suppliers shall conduct Testing &Commissioning of their supplied
systems based on the specification, approved material and agreed upon commissioning and handover
procedure. The form used during Commissioning must be signed by supplier, Contractor and owner
representatives.
Copies of the same shall be included in the O & M Manual file incase needed by the Maintenance Companies
afterward.
The Project contractual systems shall be commissioning to become suitable for occupancies to move in and be
able to use the building safely.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
301
❖ Project control Methodology:
The Project Manager oversees functional interfaces using STL and CEER Standard Procedure e
for Project Management. The complete Project Management Procedure is available at the request
t of the Client. The elements addressed in detail are administration, Contract, commercial and
financial, engineering, procurement and subcontracts, personnel-staff and labor, quality, safety
and environmental issues.
The Project Control function will be overseen by the Project Control Manager and shall address
the interaction and coordination of Design, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning in
order to ensure a total and optimal project execution. This will be achieved by the development
and implementation of specific planning documents including management plans, procedures and
others as required.
In order for Project Control to operate effectively, management plans will be put into place
covering all facets of the operation. These shall address all of the Client standards specifications
and project requirements and will be compiled using Standard Procedures where possible.
Specialist Participation Management Plans will be produced to cover the full spectrum of
documentation required.
STL and the Client shall review documentation, all agreed comments shall be incorporated in the
documents then issued for construction. Necessary training will be undertaken to ensure all project
members are fully conversant with all requirements.
Ongoing Internal Audit shall be performed to ensure a high standard of compliance with Contract
Standard Procedures and Management Plans.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
302
❖ PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING:
STL will plan, schedule and report work progress using the Critical Path Method (CPM) and an
automated scheduling system reviewed and agreed to by the Client.
STL will submit for CEER- construction of prototype workshop project 's review Contractor’s
WORK Schedule comprised of a resource loaded CPM logic network of detailed activities for the
engineering and procurement phases of the WORK and construction activities at a level of detail
necessary to show the Contractor’s approach for planning and executing the construction phase
of the WORK. STL will submit detailed
construction activities into the WORK Schedule at least one hundred twenty (120) days prior to
start of construction activities, providing a single integrated network of all phases of the work. The
WORK Schedule shall be updated at least monthly and as may be required. CONTRACTOR shall
submit both hard copy and electronic files of the following interrelated documents:
- A Detailed Level CPM network logic diagram in precedence diagram (PDM) format and bar
graphs describing all the significant activities to be accomplished to perform the WORK and
their restraints and dependencies, and with the critical path (lowest float) highlighted. Number
of activities and activity durations should be sufficient to ensure that the scope of work is covered
in the WORK Schedule to the satisfaction of the Company Representative. STL separately list and
submit to Company Representative for review all activities.
- Tabulated lists of WORK Schedule activities containing for each activity its number,
description, discipline, FACILITY area, duration (Original and remaining) in work days, early and
late start and finish dates, total float, percent complete, required man-hours and other resources,
predecessors, and successors; such lists shall be sorted as required by CEER Representative.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
303
- A Summary Level CPM time scaled network logic diagram and bar graphs summarizing the
Detailed Level CPM diagram including restraints and dependencies and showing the Critical
Milestone Dates.
- A Narrative Report in a format acceptable to CEER, summarizing each month's progress, areas of
concern, delays and solutions to the delays, and WORK scheduled to be accomplished in the next
month.
- The WORK Schedule shall be based upon and incorporate the Critical Milestone Dates and the
Scheduled Mechanical Completion Date, and shall be updated or revised monthly and resubmitted
to CEER Representative for review so that it accurately reflects actual and forecasted WORK
progress, including the incorporation and impact of executed Change Orders. Contractor shall
respond to, and when applicable incorporate, CEER comments on initial and revised WORK
Schedule submittals and resubmit for review the modified WORK Schedule including specific
narrative responses to all CEER comments within fifteen (15) days of receipt of CEER comments.
CEER review and comments shall not be deemed a waiver of its rights and remedies with respect
to delayed Critical Milestone Dates or the Scheduled Mechanical Completion Date specified in this
Contract.
- Contractor shall perform the WORK in accordance with the latest Approved version of the WORK
Schedule, which shall serve as the basis for WORK progress reporting and schedule controlling
and forecasting, including the determination of Contractor’s entitlement, if any, to a time
extension.
- Upon CEER request. Contractor shall provide to CEER representative all of Contractor’s
calculations and documents supporting the WORK Schedule and any other related schedules,
reports, and forecasts.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
304
❖ PROGRESS MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE:
Design Measurement Procedure:
We have to list down all the Design Disciplines relevant to the Project like Civil, Structural,
Architectural, Process, Mechanical– Rotating, Mechanical – Fire Protection, Piping, Documents
& Specification and Project Study. Also, the corresponding number of Drawing Design Sheets
shall be listed thus this will determine the weight percentages of the Design Disciplines. This can
be derived by dividing the individual Design Discipline number of drawing sheets against the
overall Total Number of Drawing Sheets.
Subsequently, asper Standard, eachDesignDisciplinehas7phaseswith the corresponding

weight factor as follows;
1. Initial Drafting: 20%

2. Complete Drafting: 45%
3. Discipline Check: 15%
4. Initial CEER Review: 5%
5. CEER Review: 5%
6. Initial Acceptance (Withhold): 5%
7. Final Acceptance 5%
TOTAL 100%
To get the corresponding Design Discipline Progress, we have to determine the product of:
individual progress of the 7 phases x the weight factor above x the weight percentage as initially
computed above. Summate all the Design Discipline Progress Percentage and that will be the
Overall Design Progress on a certain Reporting Time.
Procurement Measurement Procedure:
We have to list down all the Materials to be procured whether they are non-Engineered or

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
305
Engineered Items. According to the number of Materials listed, we shall determine the weight
percentage es of each material. We have to consider that each material has the same weight value
so that the c or responding weight percentage of each material shall be computed as 1/total number
of Material Items.
Secondly, as per Standard, each Material Procurement shall pass thru 6 gates with the
corresponding weight factor as follows;
1. Issue MR /RFQ: 10%

2. Tender Bid Evaluation: 15%
3. Place Purchase Order: 15%
4. Material submittal: 20%
5. Materials onsite: 30%
6. PO Closeout: 10%
TOTAL 100%
To get the corresponding Material Procurement Progress, we have to determine the product of
individual progress of the 6 gates x the weight factor above x the weight percentage as initially com
putted above. To detail the Procurement Progress, summarize the progress by Procurement Line
Items as per BOQ by summating all the Materials Progress under each Line-Item umbrella.
Finally summate all the Procurement Line-Item Progress and that will be the Overall
Material Procurement Progress on a certain Reporting Time.
Construction Measurement Procedure:
We have to list down all the Construction Line Items as per Contract BOQ together with the
corresponding activities extracted from the Baseline Schedule. Each activity has a designated
manhour. We can compute the corresponding Activity Weight Percentage by dividing the
individual activity manhour against the total manhours as extracted from the Schedule. After that,
Line Items weight percentage can be determined by adding all the activities under its umbrella.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
306
To update the progress at a certain time, we must determine the individual progress of each
activity by dividing the progress quantity against the activity total quantity and thereafter multiply
the progress by the activity weight percentage. After that we determine the Line Items Progress
by summating all the Activity Progress under their umbrella.
Lastly summate all the Line Items Progress Percentage to determine the Overall Construction
Progress at a certain Reporting Time.
Overall Project Progress Measurement:
Each Line Item in the Design BOQ has its corresponding manhours. We can derive the Weight
Percentage of each category by dividing the Line-Item manhour by the total manhours. Likewise,
we can compute the Progress of each Line Item by multiplying the derived weight percentage
against the Progress as computed in the first 3 Measurement Procedures. After that we will sum
up all the Line-Item Progress and that will be the Overall Project Progress at a certain Reporting
Time.
307
❖ PROGRESS REPORTING:
STL to provide the Client Daily Reports, Weekly Reports and Monthly Reports as
required by CEER.ProgressReportsshallclearlyreflecttheProgressinEngineering,
Procurement and Construction Phases and in accordance to formats daily approved by
the Client, below are some templates for previous reports that we can use it, noting that
it can be modified base on the project and CEER requirements.
1- Daily Report
Material Progress report:
308
Material Submittals Progress Reports
309
Construction Progress Report:
310
311
Weekly Progress S-Curve:
312
❖ Procurement Plan:
a- INTRODUCTION
Procurement Management is a process that defines the methodology of purchase from

suppliers. The procurement management process involves managing the ordering,
receipt, review and approval of items by the client Quality Control. A procurement
process also specifies how the supplier relationships will be managed, to ensure a
high level of service is received. This is a critical task in Procurement Management.
For CEER, STL Procurement Management would be important task because of the
complexity of procurement processes and supply chain management and consortium
member relationships.
Finally, the main focus of the STL procurement strategy to ensure that Holy mosques
gets the best product and the latest product at the best price. It may entail that STL
interacts with multiple vendors to get competitive quotes for the same solution and
would strategically maneuver the procurement directly or through the STL
Consortium Partners as required to achieve target pricing budgets.
Ideally STL procurement strategy will mainly help to:
❖ Identify the goods and services to procure.
❖ Get competitive quotes from multiple vendors.
❖ Finalize the product based on merits & payment terms.
❖ Identify supplier milestones.
Ensure the direct involvement of vendors in the validation of design and test labs
❖ Complete Purchase Orders and issue to suppliers

❖ Agree on delivery timeframes and methods
❖ Review vendor performance against purchase Contracts
❖ Receive goods and services from suppliers
❖ Review and accept the items procured
313
❖ Identify and resolve supplier performance issues

❖ Approve supplier payments.
❖ Communicate the status to management.
Procuring goods and services from external suppliers will be a critical path this project. Often, the
performance of the supplier chain cycle will reflect on the performance of the overall project
team. It would be therefore very crucial that STL manages the supplier’s performance carefully,
to ensure that they produce deliverables which meet project expectations
b -PURCHASE SYSTEM
1.1. Selection of Vendor

The supplier list shall be based on the Approved Project Vendor List. Any
additional vendor(s) to the Approved Project Vendor list shall be subjected to
client’s and consultant’s approval.
1.2. Check of Inquiry and Vendor Evaluation
- Upon receipt of inquiry, Procurement Manager shall check the inquiry with
the cooperation of relevant Procurement Engineer, to ensure that the inquiry
fully conforms to the requirements of inquiry document.
- If there are errors or any omission, Procurement Manager shall request the
vendor to make correction or complete the requirements. All technical bid
tabulations for engineered equipment shall be subjected to
clients/consultant’s
- Selection of vendor shall be totally dependent upon the type of product and
service, vendor’s demonstrated present capacity, vendor’s inquiry, quality
evaluation and capability on schedule.
- Any technical deviation from the Project Specification shall be approved
prior, to award the purchase order.
- Pre-award meeting shall be held prior, to award of purchase order.
1.3. Evaluation and Verification of Vendor’s Performance
After placing a purchase order, STL exerts the following:
314
1.3.1. Review and Approval of Vendor’s Documents
Under the records of Document Controller (DC), vendor’s document shall be

reviewed and approved for their compliance to the project specifications, where it
deems necessary, Procurement/Contract Manager to check the budget and price and
QA/QC Manager to review for Standard Quality compliance and requirement.
1.3.2 Control and Verification of Vendor’s Performance
A pre-inspection meeting will be held between STL and vendor soon after Contract award. Pre-
fabrication meeting shall be held with vendor at his shop when STL requires. In this meeting, any
problems related to vendor’s progress schedule, inspection schedule, delivery and documents
issue schedule are discussed and necessary expediting shall be carried out. Expeditor shall carry
out day-to-day expediting work by telecommunication with letter, facsimile, and telephone, etc.,
and shop visiting. Expediting shall be levelled based on the equipment criticality level rating.
Factory inspection shall be performed in accordance with Inspection and Testing
Procedure.
1.3.3 Sub Vendor Control
In the meeting with vendor, at shop survey, the quality requirements of vendor to
his Sub-vendor shall be checked and confirmed.
1.4. On-Site Receipt and Store:
- During the mobilization period, site stores will be set up to consist of the following:
- Site Store Office no.
- Air-conditioned closed area to store specialized items, instrumentation and a closed area to
store all types of small items and fittings.
- Fence open yard area to store bulk items such as piping material, Fence, New Gate house
material, Copper Cable, structural steel, and vendor supplied crated material and boxes.
- Compatible separate stores for paint, all other flammable and/or toxic materials with adequate
ventilation and warning signs detailing hazards and actions required such as No Smoking and
Hazardous Material.
315
- The organization of STL stores may consist of the following:

❖ Storekeeper.
❖ Material Chaser.
❖ Material Checker (issuing at site).
❖ Material Checker (receiving at site).
❖ Rigging Crews/Drivers/Operators.
- All personnel employed in material handling shall be conversant with project requirements
and have had previous experience dealing with construction permanent material.
- Responsibilities of STL Material Controller:
❖ Establish and maintain an effective liaison with STL authorized requisition people.
❖ Ensure that all MAN Senior Personnel are properly and currently informed of material
received by issuing regular reports of material received.
❖ Develop and recommend periodically in conjunction with the Project Manager and Planning
Engineer priority and sequenced requisitioning and collecting of the Permanent material.
❖ Monitor material required dates and ensure lead-time for any changes in these dates.
❖ On arrival of material at site, the Material Checkers shall start unloading, checking and
labelling each item with its correct description, tally sheet number, stock number,
drawing number and store it in its proper place as advised by the Material Controller.
❖ QA/QC Department shall be kept informed of deliveries in order that personnel
can be allocated to perform Material Receiving Inspections.
❖ Should there be any deviations, damage, shortage, etc. then the site management
shall be informed accordingly on an appropriate form.
❖ The material received shall be recorded on stock record cards or the store's computer,
reflecting the material description, the date received the quantity, stock number and the
drawing number.
❖ The following forms may be used to report on the status of the delivered material:
I. Shortage/Damage Report.
II. Out Shipment Report.
III. Material Receiving Non-conformance Report.
IV. Daily Receiving Log.
316
1.5. Specific Tasks:
❖ All loading/unloading of material will be conducted in a safe manner as specified in Project

Loss Prevention Plan.
❖ All material stored in the open section will be properly protected from damage or
deterioration.
❖ To avoid double handling and only in the event that it suits, Items requiring heavy lifts will be
programmed to arrive to site once their prospective foundations are ready.
❖ All de-crating, opening of boxes, repackaging and disposal of boxes etc. will be done by the
stores which shall have sufficient manpower including carpenters to carry out this task.
❖ No material will be issued for any other job/location than for what it was supplied for without
the approval of the Project Manager and Project QA/QC Manager. If material is re-allocated
due to specific needs, then immediate arrangements should be made for Reordering by
Management.
❖ For easy checks all withdrawal Store Requisition numbers shall be recorded on the stock record
cards/computer.
❖ The stock record cards/database entry will be filled by category of material.
❖ General Procedure to be followed for the Protection of Construction Materials and
Equipment.
❖ This includes means to prevent penetration of dirt, salt or water into transformer, CCTV
System, Drop Arms, Fiber Optical and Copper Cable, compressors, panels, switchgears, MCCS
etc. and corrosion to the finish of metal parts. Adequate protection must be provided to
withstand extended periods of materials storage in bright sunlight or other atmospheric/climatic
conditions, extreme heat, humidity, moisture and rain.
❖ Upon receipt of construction material, each consignment shall be checked for quantity
and quality, shortages, visible or concealed damages and if any anomaly is found, it
should be immediately reported.
❖ Job plots shall be marked in the storage yard by alphabetical or numerical system
for easy location and identification on both stock record cards and in the storage yard.
❖ Cement, timber and insulation materials should be stacked on wooden pallets above
ground and be covered with polythene sheets and/or water proof tarpaulins well
secured with ropes, bulky items such as pumps, compressors, panels, switch
transformers etc. packed in boxes, crates, skids, are to be opened and checked for
317
damage and to be repacked and covered with polythene sheeting or water proof
tarpaulins.
❖ Hazardous materials, paint, oxyacetylene cylinders, toxic acid etc. to be stored in

compatible separate stores with adequate ventilation and warning signs such as
hazardous material and no smoking to be demonstrated in red.
1.6. Procurement Tracking Systems:
❖ The purchase order shall in addition to material description and technicalities, contain a
production and delivery schedule. The supplier shall agree and confirm compliance with the
schedule, when necessary, corrective actions will be taken on variations to suit both parties and
eliminate any possible delay in the construction process.
❖ During the life of the Purchase Order and particularly during the fabrication and testing phase,
the Project QA/QC Manager shall liaise and follow-up with the STL inspection or the third-
party inspection agency the scheduled inspection visits. He shall ensure that the inspection
visits meet the approved schedule requirements and do not give rise to a claim for delay.
❖ The STL Project Team shall analyse and evaluate potential and actual deviation detected in the
supplier production activities schedule. Similarly, they shall analyse and evaluate and report
the impact on the delivery dates to Project Manager.
❖ STL, Project Team shall be in permanent contact with suppliers to review progress on regular
basis. They shall request the supplier to submit a regular progress report. The progress report
shall detail all material production progress and confirm inspection and release dates in
accordance with schedule.
❖ Critical activities shall be reviewed with planning and the project management prior to reverting
to supplier. The Procurement Manager shall take into consideration Management and planning
comments and recommendation and accordingly define the necessary corrective action or plan
to be adopted. The action plan shall be reviewed with the supplier and any other involved parties
who may be causing or contributing to the deviation. A schedule which does not have an effect
on Contract Completion shall be issued to incorporate the corrective action plan.
❖ The Project QA/QC Manager and/or Client may recommend additional inspection
visits to be scheduled, for the follow-up of the production progress. Inspection shall
submit reports on the results of their visit and the status of the production and identify
noticed and foreseen problems and the correction plan for out-standing actions as well
as taken actions.
318
❖ The Procurement Manager shall obtain from the supplier, on the approach of the
delivery date, a confirmation that the established dates will be met. In the case of non-
respect of the delivery clauses and the established shipping schedule, the buyer shall
report to the procurement manager all the relevant details referring to this matter.
❖ When supplier confirms the delivery, Contractor shall require a copy of all documents
necessary for the shipping and clearance and ensure of their completeness.
❖ The completeness of the shipping documentation shall be a condition for final payment
of the invoice.
❖ The Storekeeper shall confirm deliveries to the stores where transportation involves
special arrangements such as delivery from overseas by ship, or heavy or oversize loads.
❖ The Procurement Manager shall ensure that the construction team is aware of any
Deliveries so that arrangement for receiving and offloading can be made.
1.7. Release of Materials for Construction:
❖ The procurement department is responsible for ensuring that the material is procured
in conformance with the project requirements and specifications. The quality
requirement contains the necessary action to be taken that the purchased material will
meet the specified quality. The degree of the quality requirement shall be based on the
criticality rating, shall depend on the evaluation of each item and reviewed by the
Project Technical Staff and the Client.
❖ All the incoming material shall be inspected for compliance with the Standards and
technical requirements stipulated in the purchase order. In case the supplied material
does not comply with the specifications or is not accompanied by mill or test
certificates, a written report (NCR and/or Corrective Action Report) shall be submitted
by the Quality Department to the Project Manager for action.
❖ It is mandatory that the Quality Department ensures that the vendor has complied with
the requirements as specified on the procurement documents prior to their release for
shipment.
❖ The Quality Department shall ensure that only acceptable items are released from
storage for installation and the required identification and trace ability of material is
maintained from receipt through completion of construction.
❖ When certificates are missing, material shall be considered as NC (Non- conformance)
if the delivery does not comply with the requirements specified in the purchase order
documents, or for free issue material supplied by the client does not correspond to
319
the client's specifications, then a Non- conformance Report (NCR) shall be prepared
and submitted to the appropriate parties for action.
1.8. Documentation and Accountability:
❖ Upon completion of receiving control, all documents essential for trace ability shall be
forwarded to the Material Controller. The Material Controller shall prepare the
Material Receiving Report (MRR) within one week, which may require counter-sign
by Client. Each MRR shall be numbered and prepared against the purchase order.
The MRR shall also contain reference to the shipment to enable trace ability of all
documents pertaining to the procurement and delivery of the specified item.
❖ For certified material, the Material Man shall prepare a certification package against
each MRR and certificates number to be shown in the description column for each
item, then he will file these packages according to MRR numbers. This certification
package will contain:
- Material Receipt Report

- Certificates Index Sheet
- Mill Certificates
- Test Certificates
- Operating & Maintenance Manuals (When required)
❖ Material Man shall file the original certification package and will forward copy
to Quality Department.
❖ Withdrawal requisitions signed by site authorized personnel stating the following will
authorize the stores to release the material stated on the requisition:
- Designation and description of material
- Item Stock Number (where applicable)
- Quantity required
- Drawing Number (and Area Location)
- The Material Checkers shall load the material requisitioned and deliver it to the
location required against the signature of the receiver.
- All the material issued will be entered by the Store Clerk on the stock record
cards or in computer reflecting the quantity, balance etc.
- The expeditor shall review the Contract documentation requirements in the presence
of the responsible works personnel, verify that all documents and/or data are being
provided according to the Contract and register any deviations/corrective action.
320
- Where applicable, Contract documentation shall include the following:

I. Quality/inspection/Manufacturing plans
II. Production schedules
III. Delivery schedules
IV. Progress reports
V. Interim inspection reports
VI. Interim inspection/final inspection reports
VII. Material certificates.
The store keeper shall ensure that all the listed material is on the delivery list. QC
inspectors shall ensure that material is in accordance with the purchasing quality
requirements. The disposal and action to be initiated for Nonconforming products shall be
as per Quality Assurance Control of Non- conforming Product Procedure.
1.9. Submittal of Material Status Report to Client:
1. A monthly Material Status Report shall be prepared based on all the
information obtained from suppliers. This report shall contain and show the
following information:
2. Material Schedule and Delivery Dates
3. Inspection Visits.
4. Critical Production Activities.
5. Critical Deliveries.
6. Initiated Corrective Actions.
7. Rescheduled Production Activities.
8. New and Rescheduled Inspections.
9. Follow-up of Corrective Actions.
321
10. Material Delivered to Stores.
11. Material Delivered to Site.
12. Final Material Status.
13. Client comments, requirements and recommendations shall be submitted to
the project management and procurement for review and shall be transmitted
to suppliers for action.
322
1.10.PROCUREMENT FLOW CHART:
323
❖ Mobilization Plan and Project Site Preparations:
1. Introduction
1.1. STL has had extensive experience in mobilizing large projects even in remote areas and is
familiar with the problems, which must be overcome to ensure success. Mobilization requires
proven experience and “in place” mechanisms to ensure that the following activities occur to
support project scheduled milestone:
o Recruitment selection and deployment of management, engineering and labor resources;

o Large number visas availability on hand;
o Erection of proper camp and other support facilities to support field work forces;
o Establishment of required office and communication facilities, equipment and supplies in
a short time;
o Coordination of procurement activities to support filed need dates, especially with regard to
long-lead items;
1.2. Establishment of proper custom clearance and other logistics to ensure uninterrupted material
flow;
1.3. These are some of the more important, but not all issues, involved in large scale mobilization
efforts. STL has successfully dealt with these issues and considering its present resources is
confident to be able to address this issue successfully.
1.4. In case of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia STL undertook to deliver a number of mega projects
wherein the peak manpower levels were 3,000 to 6,000. STL was successful in mobilizing
required equipment and manpower to the site and the projects have been delivered in
scheduled time.
1.5. It may be noted that in case of Projects in the region a portion of the skilled manpower &
equipment have to be brought in.. the sequence of visas, recruitment & arrival at site takes at
most 3~4 months not to mention the time lost further in (learning curves) adjustment to living
conditions, atmosphere etc.. besides the need for orientation and necessary training with the
organization and its systems
1.6. The overall project demands considerable number of construction plant and equipment. is the
direct Client of the largest pool of such equipment in the Middle East. However, many of such
required equipment are already mobilized for various similar Projects in Saudi Arabia.
1.7. Our experience in dealing with labor accommodation and temporary facilities will be of
tremendous importance. We intend to place most of our temporary offices, labor
accommodation and other requisite temporary facilities and production facilities as close to
324
the project site as possible. These facilities will be located on site with the permission of the Client for
obvious benefit to the Project.
1.8. The Personnel Officer will work with the Security Officer to maintain security of access to the Site. All
staff and labor will be issued controlled identity cards which must be worn and displayed at all times.
Personnel traveling on buses between the Camp and job site will be checked as they board the buses
and will be subject to further check by the Client’s Security Guards at the Security Gate on the Main
Access Gate. Those traveling in their own transport will obviously be checked at the Client’s Security
Gate and be subject to further spot checks at the work sites.
2. Temporary Facilities Plan
2.1. STL recognizes the need for rapid mobilization of temporary facilities and has developed a
comprehensive, temporary facilities plan to allow productive field operations to begin at the earliest
possible time. We shall, with the primary assistance of our local sub-Contractor and group companies.
2.2. Office Buildings
2.2.1. Office Buildings will consist of pre-fabricated mobile office modules that can be rapidly obtained
from inventory, shipped to site and quickly erected. The office facilities for the Client I Engineer will
be fabricated new after due approval of layouts. The standard of office accommodation for the Contractor
will be consistent with the quality of Project Management services to be performed in these offices,
We may also hire office space in the adjacent buildings as per our overall requirements.
2.2.2. It will be noted that the offices are grouped to provide accommodation to the separate disciplines and
work groups such as Architectural, Civil! Structural, Electrical I Mechanical and Project Management.
yet are in close proximity to maintain constant contact and communication between the groups. Client’s
Site Representative’s Office will be located in the adjacent buildings.
2.2.3. Field offices will be located directly at the work site, as much as possible, for each Section Engineer to
keep the field forces close to the work. They will be used for daily coordination meetings between Section
Engineers and the Site Engineers and Trades Foremen, Drawings and supplies will be maintained at these
Field Offices to minimize the need for field personnel to travel to the Project Office
The QA/QC Manager will be located at the Office Compound but the facilities such as Lab and testing
facilities a little bit distant. The Lab facilities will be used in common by our own Lab staff
supplemented as necessary with Independent Testing Agency’s personnel.
325
3. Communication Systems
3.1. Plans have been prepared for extension of the main telephone lines, obtained from local service
provider, to all the major offices. Within the Offices the telephone lines will be distributed from the
Central Switchboard. Telephones extensions will be provided to all areas of works, apart from within
the offices, such as the warehouse, site workshops, lab, security gate among others.
3.2. Cellular telephones will be provided to the Project Manager and other key staff to communicate with all.
At main project offices we will arrange to provide fax facilities for communicating with all concerned.
STL shall take full advantage offered by internet and email. We intend to establish email & internet
server on the site for rapid and seamless communication with all of our offices, suppliers, sub-
Contractors and others connected with the project. All constituents of STL are connected to internet and
email is primary communication mode.
3.3. A two-way communication (Tetra) between employees can be provided under CEER request.
4. Warehouses, Fabrication Shops, Maintenance Shops
4.1. A separate Warehouse, site workshop, maintenance shop compound will be established in accordance
with the overall requirements. Facilities of local suppliers will also be tapped as much as possible in order
to provide work opportunities to local companies.
4.2. The Warehouse/Shops Compound will be fenced and secured. Both covered and open storage will be
provided and space will be provided in the covered areas for fabrication and preparation of materials before
dispatch to the field. Separate facilities will be provided for Electrical, Mechanical and Architectural and
Client furnished materials, systems and equipment. A shop will be assigned to sheet metal work and
duct fabrication. A rough carpentry shop will fabricate and re-furbish formwork and a re-bar shop will do
cutting and bending of re-bar, although this may be sub-Contracted to an off-site rebar detailer and
fabricator. A part of the area will be designated for Structural Steel storage, fabrication and assembly.
326
5. Electrical Power Distribution
5.1. STL shall arrange for extension of the power cable, provided by the local utility company, adjacent
to the Project Office, to the respective construction sites, filed offices and facilities. In case power
cable is not available STL has number of generators for meeting part of the project requirements
5.2. For early construction work on various work elements small portable 3KV - 5KV generators will
provide electrical power. Power for welding will be provided by portable welding sets.
5.3. As superstructure construction proceeds, permanent electrical conduit and wiring will be installed
and temporary lighting attached. Systems will be connected to the temporary power supply and
energized. Supplementary task lighting will be provided in certain areas for specialist finishing
trades, as required. Exterior flood-lighting will be installed to provide general night-time lighting.
Office and Warehouse compounds will be adequately lit to provide night-time working levels
and for security.
5.4. When permanent power becomes available temporary power systems will be progressively
dismantled and removed
6. Water Distribution
6.1. STL will arrange for installation of the main temporary water supply, from a source provided by the
local utility company, located adjacent to the Project Office, to the project sites and sources of
consumption. Alternatively, this can be arranged by water tankers from third party sources as well
and with storage facilities at site.
6.1.1. A temporary water ring main will be installed around the construction site, so located as to
avoid permanent construction for utilities and damage from other construction activities.
6.1.2. As superstructure construction proceeds, permanent piping will be installed and connected to the
temporary water supply to provide water for construction within the buildings and for fire-fighting
purpose. Every effort will be made to provide early installation of the permanent water supply, the
distribution system and the waste water collection system so that water is readily available
throughout the building.
6.1.3. The temporary system can then be systematically removed so as not to clutter up the work site.
6.1.4. The Temporary water supply is installed for construction and to limited extent for firefighting
purposes. Potable drinking water for the office and the construction workers will be provided in
suitable containers by a Contracted vendor. Electric coolers will be provided in the offices and
at strategic locations to provide drinking
327
water to all workers.
7. Waste and Garbage Disposal
7.1. Construction debris and waste that is clean and non-polluting will be disposed of at the Client
provided or agreed Construction Waste Disposal Area. Dumpsters will be strategically located
around the construction site and at the Workshops and Warehouses to receive construction
waste. These dumpsters will be regularly emptied at the Disposal site so that there is no buildup
of construction waste in the work areas.
7.2. For garbage disposal, suitable containers will be placed at the Office and Warehouse compounds
for food-waste, food containers and other sanitary waste. Around the construction site, 5-gallon
barrels, suitably marked and with tops removed, will be conveniently located for sanitary waste
such as food-waste and containers, drink cartons, bottles, cigarette packets and general refuse that
degrades the work-site but which cannot be placed in the construction waste dumpsters. These 5-
gallon barrels will be emptied regularly, along with the sanitary waste disposal containers at the
Office and Warehouse Compounds. A sanitary waste disposal sub- Contractor will be retained to
provide the sanitary waste containers and to regularly empty the containers and dispose of the
contents at a certified sanitary waste disposal area selected by the Engineer.
8. Sanitary Facilities
8.1. Toilet facilities will be provided at the Office and Warehouse Compounds. Sewage will be
collected in temporary, underground collection tanks which will be emptied on a regularly
scheduled basis.
8.2. At fixed locations around the main construction sites, gang type toilet and washing facilities will
be installed. The sewage from these facilities will, again, be collected in temporary, underground
tanks and regularly emptied.
8.3. A sanitary sub-Contractor will be retained to regularly service the toilet and washing facilities
including cleaning and provision of soap, paper. towels and other supplies. This sub- Contractor
will regularly empty the holding tanks etc. as required by extent of usage, by means of suitable
tankers and pumps. The sub-Contractor will transport the sewage to a certified, approved,
sewage disposal system for disposal.
328
9. Camp Operation Procedure
9.1. All the temporary facilities and housing for labor and junior staff will be located close to the site.
In line with our policy the senior staff is encouraged to live in the city as per their choice providing
opportunities to local real estate Clients. Additions in the camp will be necessary for the labor
accommodation in case of Camp due to sheer size of the project. This will be carried out in
advance of labor requirements.
9.2. The camp is managed by Camp Boss reporting to the Administration Manager. He is provided with
a crew to maintain the camp in good condition apart from a separate group for safety and security.
The Camp Boss ensures discipline & hygiene and looks after personnel requirements,
entertainment, health requirements. urged with the responsibility that local laws should be
followed as required.
10. Design Management Plan:
1. Introduction
1.1. The design of the Project will be performed by Jain Consulting, a team having extensive
experience in the design and construction supervision of major Royal projects in the Middle East.
1.2. It is proposed that the design be carried out in a very short time in order to enable STL to speed up
their procurement and construction efforts. Jain Consulting with its considerable resources located
offsite are adequately staffed in order to accomplish this task. It may also be noted that it is not
necessary for the project to be completely designed in five months; on the other hand it is enough
that the design is well ahead of construction for all the facilities of importance since there will be
long lead items that require considerable period for engineering, fabrication and shipment.
1.3. In this section we are presenting a very brief methodology that will be adapted in the design
management of the project.
2. The Process:
2.1. The design of the project will be performed by Jain Consulting who have considerable
experience in the design and construction supervision of major projects in the Middle East.
2.2. Immediately upon award of the Contract, Jain Consulting will meet with all the stake holders in
the project in order to review in detail the proposed design. We anticipate that CEER
representative will facilitate such meetings and carry out the required coordination. They
329
shall prepare a Needs List, (Information / Confirmation Required) for regular follow-up with all
concerned through STL’s Engineering Manager. We anticipate that there will be considerable
coordination requirements between all project authorities, stake holders, other service providers.
2.3. Subsequent to these meetings the proposed design will be fine-tuned and agreements will be
reached on a number of critical points. We anticipate this session to last no more than one week.
We also anticipate that these meetings will be attended by client O&M team.
2.4. If there are any substantial variations between the proposed design and the agreed version then
agreements will have to be reached between all parties on how the adjustments are to be reflected
in the Contract.
2.5. A schedule shall be agreed between STL and Vesta concerning the timing and content of the
delivery of the design documentation to suit the established procurement and construction
packaging strategy. Progressive submission of the documentation will be necessary in this
regard. Consideration will be given for early release of earthwork and long lead items.
2.6. A detailed geotechnical investigation will be arranged based on the approved master plan and
concept design at the soonest opportunity as this will help pave the way for the confirmation of
the adequacy of the foundation design.
2.7. Meetings shall also be held with all service providers in order to advise them of the requirements
of the project both in terms of capacity and schedule. Timely availability of utilities is critical
for the commissioning of the project.
2.8. Formal design approvals shall be obtained from all statutory authorities as required with the
assistance of the offices of CEER- construction of prototype workshop project.
2.9. The design team shall continue to be involved in the project during the construction phase as well
in order to ensure that there is ongoing coordination between project users, tenants and other
users of the project with regard to the design of the project.
11. Communication Channels

The communication channels for the project are through the designated email created as
sauditech@sauditech.com.sa In terms of the participants i.e., the Client, Consultants
(Engineer), (STL, Suppliers, and Sub-Contractors; the offices in which the work will be
performed; and internally as shown in the organization charts described in the previous section.
The graphics on the following two pages identify the channels of communication that will exist
among the participating entities and the products of communication that will be produced.
Communications will occur in the form of drawings, specifications, transmittals, reports, requests
for information (RFI), letters, telephones, faxes, E-Mail, computer link-ups, and face-to-face
meetings.
330
a. Figure shows the communication channels among the major participants, determined by specific
project responsibilities. The Client communication links are primarily with STL. Contacts with
suppliers and sub-Contractors will generally pass through STL or in common meetings for discussion
of specific issues such as design reviews and progress meetings. In this way STL maintains constant
control over design development, quality control and construction progress.
b. The other figure shows the communication activities among STL offices. The focal point of
communication is through the Project Manager who is located at the site office. Communications with
suppliers and fabricators will be expedited due to the many STL offices
c. Communications with the sub-Contractors with them will be managed by the site office and in specific
cases by the Central Office. Suppliers may be located around the world. Materials obtained locally
or in KSA will be managed from the site offices or our City Offices. Materials procured in European
or American markets will also be expedited and managed by the site procurement offices until
assistance is requested as required by the Jeddah office.
d. STL will utilize state of the art personal computers for all data processing needs on the project. We
will connect the on-site computers with a Local Area Network which will allow efficient software
sharing, data storage and retrieval and communication among users. A further section that follows
gives a complete description of the computer system planned for the project and exhibits it graphically
e. Further, all STL offices and even the Client offices can be easily connected via phone modems
and fax modems to provide additional communications and access to information as may be requested
through internet or directly as required. STL utilizes state of the art technology and almost all of the
project sites and individuals are linked via internet, local nets, email services providing almost instant
access. STL thus has adequate communication channels at its disposal to support the project in a rightful
manner.
B. Documentation
a. On all projects clearly defined means of document management must be established to ensure that
consistency of purpose is maintained and that all appropriate parties are involved along the way
in a constructive and productive manner.
b. The basis for effective document control involves of ensuring that all forms of incoming or outgoing
printed communications and records are identified and tracked and assurances are provided that
confirm that the document has been reviewed by the appropriate parties. Incoming documents must be
numbered, reviewed and responses prepared that reflect the
331
needs of all effected participants. Outgoing correspondence must be coordinated to ensure that the
project speaks with one voice.
A. It is vital that the transmission of information is handled in a controlled manner to ensure that project
staff is consistently using the latest version of any document, that all appropriate coordination has taken
place and that all correspondence has been responded to in a timely and concise manner. Documentation
for the project will come in many forms;
i. Drawings
ii. Submittals
iii. Transmittals
iv. Specifications
v. Inspection reports
vi. Test results
vii. Progress reports
viii. Schedules
ix. Manuals
x. As-built drawings
xi. As-built documentation
xii. Coordination drawings and submittals.
B. Receipt and Distribution - The general principles for the receipt and transmittal of project generated
communications are described below:
C. All Communications will bear, in the appropriate location, a combination of letters and numbers
which designates the origin, destination, communication category, project area (optional), and serial
number.
D. Document Control - correspondence received during the day will be delivered to the project
manager’s secretary who checks that all enclosures are present, stamps a receipt date, enters relevant
information into the appropriate documentation log, codes the document, copies, distributes and files
the correspondence.
E. The Project Manager or his designated engineer will identify the “action” responsibility and any additional
distribution, mark persons to have copies of enclosures and return correspondence to the secretary for copying and
distribution. The project secretary distributes copies to the identified action.
332
❖ Sub Contract Procedure:
After awarding the Project, STL, thus the purpose of this Subcontracting plan is to establish the
procedure for performing and achieving the scope of work in high quality and with lowest Safety
issues wherever and whenever a sub-Contractor is required in this regard, for implementing
subcontracts for this project.
The objective of this plan is to specifically identify those portions of the work which STL plans to
subcontract, identify the sub-Contractors, and explain how STL will hold the sub-Contractor
accountable for their performance and the terms and conditions for the subcontract.
❖ GENERAL TERMS:
- This Subcontracting plan shall not supersede the detailed requirements of the
Contract.
- In obtaining additional personnel to supplement its permanent staff in the performance of
the work, Sub-Contractor shall give priority to Saudi Nationals.
- All of sub-Contractors’ personnel shall have in their possession all required and properly
validates licenses or certificates prescribed by the Saudi Government or Client as being
necessary for the performance of those aspects of the work to which they are assigned.
- Sub-Contractor’s personnel shall comply with all applicable rules and instruction issued
by Client and with generally acceptable standards of conduct for expatriate personnel
living and working in Saudi Arabia. Upon Client’s written request, Contractor shall at its
own expense remove from involvement with or performance of the work and replace at
his own cost and expense any sub- Contractor’s personnel who fails to comply with the
foregoing rules and instructions.
- Contractor agrees to depend, indemnify and hold Client harmless from any expense, loss,
damage, fine or penalty incurred by assessed against or demanded from sub- Contractor’s
failure to fulfil the obligations set forth in the Contract.
- All of sub-Contractor’s equipment shall be suitable for the safe and the efficient
performance of the work. All such equipment shall be subject to inspection from
333
time to time by Client. Any such equipment which found to be in unsafe condition shall be
promptly removed from the work by Contractor and replaced or repaired without additional
cost to Client and without delay in completion of the facilities.
- All sub-Contractor’s personnel shall wear an identification card issued by Client on their
outer garments whenever on the worksite.
❖ Procedure:
1- Client Approval and Authorization of the Sub-Contractor
Sub-Contractors for the performance of any portion of the work shall be procured only
after CONTRACTOR has received written authorization from Client that
CONTRACTOR may subcontract that portion of the work. If not accomplished prior to
the effective date of this Contract, then promptly thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall prepare
and submit to the company Representative for Client’s approval Contractor’s
subcontracting plan specifically identifying those portions of the work which
CONTRACTOR proposes to subcontracts, CONTRACTOR shall select sub-Contractor/s
solely on the basis of financial and technical considerations.
2- Submittals by Sub-Contractor
After receiving Client written authorization that a portion of the work may be
subContracted. CONTRACTOR shall, before procuring any subContract for part or all of
that portion of the work, submit a notification to Client containing the following
information:
• If the proposed sub-Contractor is a sole proprietorship or partnership, the name(s) and

address(s) of the proprietor or all members of the partnership, as the case may be.
• If the proposed sub-Contractor is a corporation, the place of its incorporation or formation
and its corporate headquarters.
• The name address of the proposed sub-Contractor’s principal bank and a copy of the sub-
Contractor’s latest audited financial statement.
334
• Evidence acceptable to Client of proposed sub-Contractor’s safety and technical

qualifications to perform the work to be subContracted. Client shall, in a timely manner,
review the information and, provided that the proposed sub- Contractor is, in Client’s
opinion, safety qualified, technically competent, of financially able to perform the WORK
to be subContracted, Client shall advise CONTRACTOR in writing of its no-objection to
the proposed sub-Contractor. If Client objects to the proposed sub-Contractor,
CONTRACTOR shall either itself accomplish the work which would have been performed
by the proposed sub-Contractor or shall select another sub-Contractor to which Client has
no objection.
3- Comply with the regulations
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all sub-Contractors selected by CONTRACTOR abide by and
observe, to the same extent required of CONTRACTOR, all applicable Client regulations, and
CONTRACTOR agrees to insert or clause to be inserted into all subcontracts provision to that effect.
4- Breach of the Contract
In the event of any substantial breach of this Contract by CONTRACTOR and without regard to
whether Client terminates this Contract or a portion of the work pursuant”, CONTRACTOR shall, if
Client request, assign to Client all of its rights under all subcontracts entered into by CONTRACTOR,
and Client may, to the extent permitted by applicable law and after prior written notice to
CONTRACTOR, enforce directly against any such sub-Contractor all rights of CONTRACTOR under
such subContract. All subcontracts entered into by CONTRACTOR shall contain a provision whereby
the sub- Contractor agree and consents to such assignment by CONTRACTOR to Client.
5- SubContracting of a portion that is under another subContract agreement
CONTRACTOR shall include in every subContract under this Contract a provision prohibiting any
further subContracting of any portion of work by the sub-Contractor unless
335
the sub-Contractor first obtains the approval of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall not give
such approval without first obtaining the approval of Client. If Client gives such approval,
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all future sub-Contracts, entered into by its sub-Contractor, are
entered only after receipt by CONTRACTOR of the information described in Schedule ‘A’
paragraph 13.4 and Contractor’s notification to the Sub- Contractor of its no-objection to the sub-
Contractor selected on the basis described in paragraph 13.1.2. SubContracting Agreement contain
a provision prohibiting any further subContracting of any portion of the WORK without first
obtaining the approval of CONTRACTOR, which approval may be given only in accordance with
the provisions.
6- Protection of confidential information:
Protection of confidential information as part of the subContract agreements, sub-

Contractor shall protect all confidential information relating to the project provided to STL
by Client.
7- Contractor’s responsibility:
- Contractor shall be fully responsible to Client for the acts and omissions of all its sub- Contractors
at whatever tier, and their personnel. Contractor shall manage, schedule and coordinate the work of
all its sub-Contractors so as to meet the Scheduled Completion Date and critical Milestone Date.
Nothing in this Contract shall create any Contractual relation between Client and any sub-
Contractor unless Client elects to exercise its rights. SAUDI Client’s approval to subContract any
portion of the WORK and Client’s no- objection to Contractor’s sub-Contractor selection shall not
relieve Contractor of any of its obligations under this Contract.
- Contractor shall use its best efforts to prevent and take all reasonable precautions to avoid pollution
or contamination of the land, air or water arising out of Contractor’s or its sub-Contractors’
performance of the WORK.
- Contractor shall lend every reasonable assistance to Client in handling, controlling or cleaning up
any discharge or escape of pollutants or contaminants. If the discharge or escape arises out of the
negligence or default of Contractor or any sub-Contractor.
- All technical data, standards, specifications, designs, drawing and the like furnished to Contractor
are and shall continue to be the property of Client. Neither Contractor nor any sub-Contractor shall
reproduce or copy any such materials in whole or in part except as required to perform the WORK
- Expert for such design, drawing and calculation as are considered proprietary by Contractor and
of which Client is given notice as provided below, all designs, drawings and calculations
developed by Contractor, its sub-Contractors or suppliers,

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
336
and all software initially and specifically developed by Contractor or its sub- Contractors or
supplies, under this Contract shall at all-time be the property of Client.
- If any design, drawing or Software developed under this Contract results in any device, idea,
process, or technology, whether patentable or not, all rights to that device, process, or technology
shall be the property of Client. Contractor represents those all- Contractor personnel, including
agency personnel, and the personnel, of its sub- Contractors have agreed to assign to Contractor
all discoveries, inventions and improvements made.
- Late performance by a sub-Contractor caused by a shortage of supervisors or labor, inefficiencies,
or similar occurrences cannot be deemed as force majeure.
- Should Contractor or any of its sub-Contractor’s desire to publish or release any publicity or
public relations materials of any kind concerning or relating to this Contract or to Contractor’s or
its sub-Contractors’ activities in connection with this Contract, Contractor shall first submit such
material to Client for review. Contractor shall not publish or release, and shall ensure that its
sub-Contractors do not publish or release, any such material without Client’s prior approval.
- Contractor shall be an independent with respect to the w o r k under this Contract. Neither
Contractor, any sub-Contractor nor the personnel of either of them shall be deemed to be the
servants, agents or employees of Client.
- CEER shall retrieve ID cards from all employees and sub-Contractor employees upon completion
of the project or termination of the Contract.
- Maintenance Plan:
1. STL has substantial experience in handing over and maintaining various critical
infrastructure facilities including control rooms and palaces and similar projects through-
out the Middle East. State-of-the-art programs and software shall be used in the assembly
of all documentation requirements for the speedy and efficient handing over of the project.
2. Particular consideration shall be given to the Client’s requirements concerning training of

personnel in the factories and other similar requirements.
3. Dedicated crew including a capable manager shall be made available during the Defects
Liability Period for the warranty maintenance during the first one year after turning over
of the project.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
337
Training Plan:
1- Introduction and objective

- STLwillprovideatrainingcoursecoveringboththeclassroom(theoretical)andon-thejob
(hands-on) phrases. The training covers the introduction of all components of the system
and instruction to operate and maintaining a safe way.
- The training is
providedforbothowner’soperationandmaintenancepersonnelontheprocedures and
schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing and maintaining the
Systems.
- The principal aim of this training is to identify all the requirements for employee HDPE
aiming, establish the procedures for obtaining the training course documentation and
confirm the level of trainees and management to tailor the training to their requirements.
- Audience: Engineers & Operators
- Desired Outcome: Upon completion of the course the audience should be able to perform
the procedures and have a basic knowledge about system operation, preventive
maintenance and system diagnostic.
2- Training & Work plan
2.1 Key task sand activities schedule:

-
- The training shall take place in the CEER and shall be based on a combination of
theoretical lessons and hands-on training. During the classroom sessions all the trainees
will get the information regarding the type of Systems. The hands-on training shall be
performed on the actual equipment installed in the CEER.
- The training material is prepared in English and to be approved by the Engineer before the
training course is conducted. The training will be performed in total 2 days.
- Upon completion of training, training aids, training manuals and any other relevant
materials will be handed over to the client.
- Each staff member going through the training program shall be given a personal copy of
the relevant training material.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
338
- The training program shall include a test designed to assess the capabilities acquired
during the training. Certificates shall be issued for staff passing the test.
- The training shall take place after installation of the equipment has been completed but
before the system has been commissioned.
- The main intention of the training program is to ensure that the personnel nominated to
be trained, are trained sufficiently and professionally to enable these trained personnel to
train and educate further personnel within the employer’s operation and maintenance
teams
2.2 Training timing
- Training will on daily bases from 8 AM to 5 PM excluding weekends (Fri & Sat) and official
vacations.
2.3 Training Room and Requirements

- As theory and practical training will be provided, the Contractor will require one suitable
classroom with digital projector, screen and whiteboard to be provided by the Main
Contractor.
- Group of Operational & Maintenance Technicians, number of staff to be decided by

Operations Department.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
339
2.4 General Details

- The sub-section details all the requirements such as:
- Training Proficiency – detail the written, oral and practical performance tests to
determine each trainee’s proficiency level at designated intervals during the course of
training.
- Training Completion – detail the description or method (s) to be used to certify trainees
upon satisfactory completion of the training, it shall be certified, in writing, that each.
- Trainee, by name is qualified to operate or maintain the system, supervise or instruct, as

applicable.
- Make-up Instruction – details the make-up instruction that shall be scheduled to

accommodate shift work and authorized absences.
2.5 Ratio of Training Personnel to Trainees

- Ratio of training personnel to trainees for both classroom and on the job phases of each
course:
- For classroom sessions a maximum of 8 attendees is recommended. For field sessions a

maximum of 8 attendees per session is recommended. In field session instructor will be
supplemented by Contractor’s staff.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
340
2.6 Daily Work Plan
TaskID TaskName Duration StartDate EndDate
Minutes TBA TBA
Classroom Training & Hands-on Training
Day1 1. System Overview/Design 120

Coffee Break 30
2. Safety Procedures 30
Lunch Break 60
3. System Description 150
Coffee Break 30
4. Question & Answer 60
Classroom and Hands-on Training
Day2 1. Equipment Overview 90

Coffee Break 30
2. On Site Practical Training 120
Lunch Break 60
3. Configuration procedures 120
4. Maintenance procedures 120
Training Program
3.1Scope
3.1.1 System overview/ Design

An overview of design intended for the 24CEERs.
3.1.2 System Information

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
341
❖ This information is a summary of the safety requirements on operation and maintenance

personnel based on general electrical and laser safety precautions. CEER Operations
and maintenance
personnelarestronglyadvisedtoobservethefollowingsymbolsandsafetyadvisories.
3.1.4 Observe live procedures
3.1.5 Question &Answer

❖ Questionandanswersessionwillbeconductedtoverifythateachtraineehasgainedan
understanding of the topic covered.
3.1.6 Installation, Calibration & Configuration

❖ Aguidancetosysteminstallationengineerswithreferencestosoftwareprogramming
instructions, configuration, calibration procedures and cross references to the
Maintenance chapter.
❖ Hands-on
3.1.7 Introduction to Maintenance Procedures
➢ Stand Set-up Procedures
➢ Corrective Maintenance
➢ Preventive Maintenance
➢ A Fault-Finding Guide/Trouble Shooting
➢ Hands on (actual maintenance procedures)
3.1.8 Spare Parts Demonstration
3.1.9 System Operation Overview
3.1.10 Safety Procedures

➢ Check of Access Right
➢ Abnormal display and guidance
➢ Discrepancies from the described docking routine
➢ Items to be checked during the docking procedure
3.1.11 Technical Description
➢ System Units
➢ Performance Characteristics
➢ Operation & Function
3.1.12Assumptions/Variables

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
342
➢ All the Personnel who will be nominated to this training plan, must
understand the prerequisites for the proposed training plan
➢ All the Personnel will be nominated to this training plan, should have a good
level understanding of English language, as all materials will be provided in
English.
➢ All provided duration is calculated based on regular full day working hours(8Hrs.)
excluding breaks.
3.1.13 Limitations
➢ This training is limited to training attendance and will not provide any
international certification exams
➢ This training plan is limited to be provided inside the kingdom.
3.2 Training resources
3.2.1 Aids &Materials

Each student will receive official training it including;
➢ Course hard copy material
➢ e-learning CD for the course material
➢ block note.
4. Categories of trainings
4.1 Overview
This training will be performed to give the reader an understanding of installation, operation
and maintenance procedures, with focus on safety and efficiency.
4.2 Classroom Related Categories
User\Operation Administration Hardware
X X X
4.3 Classroom Related Functionalities

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
343
Operations Maintenance
Train- the- Operations Operations Train-the- Maintenanc Maintenanc
Supervisor Team Trainer e e Team
Trainer
Supervisor
X X - X X -
8- Trainee pre-requisite skills and qualification

➢ All Personnel will be nominated to this training plan,
➢ QualifiedElectricians/TechniciansofadequateproficiencyandeducationlevelsBasiccomputerskills
9- Training Aids
Each student will get the following training aids with the training kits
➢ Manual
➢ Presentation Slides
➢ Operation and Maintenance Manual
10- Training Submittal

Submittal Items:
➢ Introduction and Objective
➢ Training and Work Plan
➢ Training Program
➢ Instructor’s credential and resumes
➢ Trainee pre-requisite skills and qualification
➢ Training Aids
➢ Training logistics
➢ Documentation
➢ Trainees Pre-Assessment.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
344
11- Training logistics

9.1 Training Facility
The Contractor will require one suitable classroom suitable classroom with digital projector,
screen and whiteboard to be provided by the Main Contractor.
12- Documentation:
The following documents will be provided to trainees: Training Manual/Course Material/Student

Guide Each trainee will receive a certificate of Attendance after the classes.
12.1 Training delivery evaluation
12.2 Trainees Pre-Assessment
Before attending the training, trainee will walk through certification/technology exam-related
questions that are randomly selected from an extensive set of skills-and ability-based questions.
At the end of the assessment, trainee will receive a score that will rate trainee readiness to take
either the certification itself or certification exam. This score sheet should be printed and
attached to his registration form

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
345
ENVIRONMENTAL PLAN
1. INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
The Environmental Management Plan, referred to as EMP, has been prepared by STL to
develop and fulfill the Project requirements:
Potential benefits associated with an effective EMP include:
• Waste minimization
• Conservation of resources
• Reduced environmental impacts
• Enhanced public perception.
2. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Waste management activities, as defined in this WMP, are the responsibility of all STL
employees. The Project Manager, assisted by the HSE Manager, will ensure that, on an on-
going basis, the requirements of this procedure are effectively communicated to the workforce
engaged in all work activities.
The Project Manager, with the assistance of HSE Manager will ensure the following.
• All STL employees and subcontractor personnel will be deemed to be the “holder” of all
wastes generated from the construction activities and will be responsible for the proper
management of the wastes in accordance with this Waste Management Program.
• All STL employees take all reasonablesteps to avoid waste generation and ensure that all the
wastes generated are identified, collected/transferred and stored for reuse, recovery,
recycling, treatment and disposal in an environmentally acceptable manner.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
346
• Overall responsibility for the implementation of the procedures contained herein in this EMP.
• Assist STL Construction Team and its subcontractors in compliance with the requirements and
procedures of this WMP and he will be responsible for the overall performance of this
WMP.
STL HSE Manager will ensure the following.
• STL establishes and reviews an annual Waste Minimization Program.
• Assist the Project Manager in implementing and maintaining this EMP, including
reporting requirements to CLIENT.
Detailed functions, roles and responsibilities of the HUTA HEGEREFLD Construction Team,
including the general workforce.
2.1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANS
Scope
Waste is defined as any refuse garbage, other discharged materials or wastes, including any
solids, semi-solids, or liquid material generated as a by-product from construction activities
and its plant and machinery, operation of offices and camps and kitchen.
This EMP addresses waste from the time and location of generation through to the final
disposal of the waste, including construction activities performed by STL. Waste management
will entail the following steps or procedures (refer to Appendix 1).
• Waste minimization.
• Classification and segregation of waste at source.
• Collection of waste in appropriate containers for daily pick-up, from designated
temporary storage areas at specific work sites, and disposed at proper designated
facilities.
• Storage of waste in the on-site purpose designed storage area.
• The transportation, off-site handling and tracking of waste to licensed treatment /
disposal facilities by an approved and licensed contractor.
Objectives
The Scope of Word describes only technical contents of the activities required for this project. It
must be read in conjunction with the drawings and other contract documents to obtain a
complete understanding of the full requirements of this Contract.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
347
2.2 Implementation and Operation

This EMP applies to the minimization, identification, classification, segregation, storage, handling,
transportation and disposal of the waste material in compliance with CLIENT’s requirements. STL
will contain any free liquids and shall not be disposed of to land farms.
3. Waste Minimization
The best way to reduce pollution is to prevent it in the first place. Pollution prevention techniques
improve efficiency, while at the same time minimizing environmental impacts. This can be done in
many ways, such as reducing material inputs, re-engineering processes to reuse by-products,
improving management practices, and employing substitution of toxic chemicals.
The Project Manager will ensure that STL establish and review an annual Waste Minimization
Program, which focuses on waste materials that are:
• Produced in significant quantities;
• Expensive to dispose of; and
• Pose a significant impact to the environment and / or human health.
This program will also establish:
• Objectives and targets for waste minimization and recycling;

• Actions plans, timeframes and responsibilities for achieving objectives and targets; and
• Arrangements for reporting progress to CLIENT.
The established objectives and targets will allow for performance to be measured including figures
quoted for the following:
• Waste generated (per waste stream), quoted in kg or liters/man hours worked.

• Waste reuse and recycling, quoted in % of waste generation (weight and volume) and kg or
liters/year.
• Waste minimization, quoted in % reduction in waste generation (weight and volume) and
reduction in kg or liters/year.
The Project Manager will ensure that an incentive scheme is established to encourage employees
to identify and report ideas for waste minimization, recycling and/or reuse. Positive ideas will be
reviewed and implemented, where appropriate, and reported to the Division Manager for
inclusion in internal communications.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
348
The Project Manager ensures that all STL employees, under his management control, are
trained in all aspects of waste management relevant to their work activities. The “3 R’s”
(Reduce, Reuse and Recycle) represent the minimization strategies that will be employed
in this WMP to minimize wastes requiring disposal.
• Use of recyclable materials when packing orders to increase recycling opportunities.

• Order chemicals in returnable drums.
• Seek "buy-back" arrangements with chemical suppliers for return of surplus chemicals.
• Procure non-hazardous products where possible.
• Substitute with less hazardous materials.
• Use of refillable containers for collection of waste fluids such as waste oil, hydraulic oil,
3.1.1 Waste Reduction
Waste reduction is the preferable option in order to produce as little waste as possible by
reducing waste at its source. It involves the generation of less waste through more efficient
practices, and in some cases the waste can be totally eliminated. Waste reduction
measures are often most effective during operational phases, however, the philosophy will
also be applied to the construction phase to optimize waste minimization objectives.
STL will train and instill in all its employees and subcontractor personnel the following
measures for reducing the generation of waste.
• Proper planning and ordering of what is needed for the project, not in excess, in order to
reduce wastage.
• Order materials in bulk to reduce packaging waste and the frequency of possible
spillage.
• Suppliers to minimally, but adequately, pack orders to reduce waste volume.
• Segregate process streams to minimize sludge or liquid production.

• Optimize changing of filter systems through regular cleaning and maintenance.
• Avoid ordering and using disposal materials such as batteries, plastic cups, etc. Instead, use
recyclable paper cups, rechargeable batteries, etc.
• Conserve paper by making double-sided copies, sharing of information via e-mail, and
avoidance of unnecessary printouts.
• Train personnel in waste reduction principles as above.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
349
3.1.2 Waste Reuse
Waste reuse refers to the practice of reusing materials in their original or part of their original
form. STL will look into every opportunity to reuse materials in order to minimize the amount of
waste generated. As such, the following measures will be considered during the construction
phase to reuse materials.
• Use of filters with interchangeable membrane. This will allow the filter body to be
reused.
• Wooden pallets and other packaging materials will be reused for: creating warning, hazard
and safety signage; provision of file, clothes and shoe storages / cabinets; and reuse as
furniture in rest areas.
• Reuse single sided paper by printing rough drafts on empty side and use them as note pad.
• Sending used oil to recycling company for filtering andreuse.
3.1.3 Waste Recycling
Waste recycling refers to the conversion of waste into another (different) usable material, such as
the processing of paper, timber, vegetation, batteries and plastics into new products. Wastes will
be segregated in order to facilitate their collection and recycling by licensed/approved recycling
subcontractors.
STL, through Waste Management Guidelines, has identified the following potential waste streams
for recycling.
• Plastic drums and empty plastic bottles.

• Metal drums.
• Batteries.
• Waste paper.
• Vegetation.
• Cooking oil.
• Timber.
• Waste oil.
All recyclable wastes will have a consignment note generated for each trip to the recycler.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
350
3.2 Solid Waste
STL will make every effort to reduce the construction materials used onsite and later disposed of
as waste, by Reducing, Reusing and Recycling.
STL will prepare a Solid Waste Management Plan based on the following guidelines.
Reduce:
3.2.1 Identify construction methods that result in less waste;
3.2.2 Identify specific practices that may generate unacceptable quantities of waste;
3.2.3 Try to purchase material with less packaging and other materials that will
contribute to the waste stream generated onsite;
3.2.4 Try to purchase materials with the dimensions required by the project, to
prevent unused construction materials from becoming waste;and
3.2.5 Avoid damage to construction materials that render them unfit for use by
storing them in protected areas.
3.2.6 Identify
R construction materials that may be re-used on site;
3.2.7 Separate
e materials that can be re-used onsite and store them in protected areas; and
3.2.8 Identify
: local markets for re-usable materials.
Recycle:
3.2.9 Identify construction waste that may be recycled and used on or offsite;
3.2.10 Separate materials that can be recycled and store them in protected areas;
3.2.11 Use recycled construction materials where feasible;
3.2.12 Comply with local government initiatives to prevent recyclables from entering the
waste stream; and identify local markets for recyclable materials.
Examples of salvageable construction materials include:
3.2.13 Dimensional lumber
3.2.14 Heating ducts
3.2.15 Heavy timbers
3.2.16 Electrical equipment
3.2.17 Steel beams and studs
3.2.18 Light fixtures

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
351
3.2.19 Insulation
3.2.20 Plumbing fitting, faucets
3.2.21 Siding
3.2.22 Interior doors and frames
Examples of recyclable construction materials include:

3.2.23 Aluminum siding
3.2.24 Electrical cable
3.2.25 Asphalt pavement
3.2.1 Gypsum wallboard
3.2.2 Cement based structure
3.2.3 Metal piping Cinder blocks
3.2.4 Metal window frames
3.2.5 Copper piping
3.2.6 Rebar
3.2.7 Dimensional lumber
Examples of hazardous materials and/or materials banned from regular disposal include:
3.2.8 Appliances
3.2.9 Gypsum wallboard
3.2.10 Asbestos
3.2.11 Lead
3.2.12 Cardboard
3.2.13 Oil filters
3.2.14 Electronic equipment
3.2.15 PCBs
3.2.16 Fluorescent tubes
3.2.17 Sod
3.2.18 Freon
3.2.19 Underground storage tanks
Liquids and sludges, pesticides, strong offensive smelling loads, hot loads (smoldering or burning)
and tight headed barrels (that cannot be opened) are also prohibited from selected disposal
facilities.
Table 1: Opportunities for reducing, reusing and recycling during clearing and construction
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
352
Retain Plant & other vegetation where possible

Minimize disruption to existing vegetation through
Reduce tree protection and,
Stockpile and protect stripped soil so it can be re-
used for final grading and landscaping
where feasible, the use of smaller machinery

near vegetated areas
Reuse Ensure site is replanted during the final
landscaping phase
Where feasible, mulch removed vegetation
and use it in the final landscaping phases
Send excess topsoil and fill to another
Recycle construction site where it can be used
3.2.1 Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metals
Metallic waste generally includes, but is not limited to, structural steel, steel studs and tacks, re-
bar, electrical and mechanical systems, flashing and aluminum siding. Recyclable metals can be
valuable and contractors are encouraged to identify metals recycling facilities that provide recycling
bins, haulage and separation of ferrous and nonferrous metals. A summary of metal waste
management strategies is provided in table below.
Table 2: Metal waste management strategies

Order materials efficiently to limit waste
Measure and cut accurately
Reduce
Maintain an inventory of surplus materials to reduce over- supply at
other sites
Store cuttings in designated area for reuse
Remove surplus materials and use them at other sites, where
Reuse feasible
Recycle Investigate pick up and hauling options for metals.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
353
3.2.2 Asphalt
Sources of asphalt include asphalt shingles, stripped road surface from parking areas and road
surfaces. Locally, recycled asphalt can be used in hot mix road construction projects. A summary of
Reduce, Reuse and Recycle strategies for asphalt from construction sites is provided in Table below.
Table 3: Asphalt management strategies
Inspect deliveries and return damaged material to the supplier

Reduce Minimize asphalt orders by carefully reviewing site plans and
ordering only what is needed
Limited opportunities for reuse, largely based on asphalt shingles

Reuse
Recovered and crushed pavement can be processed and used in road
base, unpaved parking areas, new pavement, and asphalt shingles.
Recycle
3.2.3 Corrugated Cardboard
4 Corrugated cardboard waste is generally derived from packaging, storing and transporting. Note
cardboard covered in wax, grease, oil or paint cannot be recycled and should be disposed off as waste.
A summary of reduce, reuse and recycle strategies for cardboard from construction sites is provided
in Table below.
5 Table 4: Corrugated cardboard management strategies
Buy materials in bulk to minimize packaging wastes

Have suppliers deliver materials with a minimum of packaging and
Reduce transporting cardboard
Try use suppliers that will retrieve packaging cardboard and other
materials
Use cardboard on site, where feasible, to protect and store tools and
Reuse
other small construction materials
Identify private cardboard recyclers to onsite management strategies and
pick and removal
Recycle Corrugated cardboard for gypsum wallboard liner, boxboard and
middle corrugating medium

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
354
5.2.1 Drywall and Gypsum
Sources of drywall waste include demolition of residential and industrial buildings. Guidelines for
managing drywall and gypsum in construction areas are provided in Table below.
Table 5: Drywall management strategies
Buy drywall in stock sizes consistent with required dimensions

Reduce
Small pieces of drywall can be used in the cavities of un-insulated
interior wall partitions
Reuse Review cutoff pile before cutting pieces for a new sheet of drywall, to limit
waste
Recycle Recycle drywall wherever feasible
5.2.2 Concrete
Concrete can be crushed and recycled as aggregate road base and as aggregate fill. Management
strategies for waste concrete are summarized in Table below.
Table 6: Concrete management strategies
Inspect deliveries and return damaged material to the supplier

Pay careful attention to quantities when ordering to eliminate waste
Where feasible, use alternatives to concrete blocks, such as lightweight
Reduce and mortarless blocks
Consult with a forming contractor to develop a forming plan that limits
waste wood
Store unused concrete blocks in protected areas for later reuse Use
Reuse
excess concrete as barriers (e.g. parking stops)
Recycle Separate re-bar from broken concrete for recycling; Recycle
drywall wherever feasible;

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
355
5.2.3 Masonry
Brick and block waste will also be generated from demolition, and can be used as landscaping fill
material, road base construction, landfill cover and land improvement. Bricks in good condition
and/or unique heritage characteristics can be sold to secondary users at used building material
suppliers. Below are the lists of management strategies for masonry products.
Table 7: Masonry management strategies

Measure and cut brick or block accurately
Use standard sizes to limit cutting
Reduce Maintain an inventory of surplus materials to reduce over- supply at
other sites
Unused brick and block should be set aside and stored in a protected area
Reuse for reuse on or offsite
Identify construction sites and dealers for brick and block
Recycle
5.2.4 Plastics and Vinyl
Plastics in construction areas are typically derived from packaging, polyethylene vapor barriers,
piping and siding and have limited potential for recycling because of adhesives and fluctuating
markets for plastics. Onsite plastics management programs are further complicated by the need to
segregate plastics by resin type (identified with the recycling number) as different plastics have
different recycling requirements.
Management strategies should therefore focus on reducing plastics onsite, as follows: Ask
suppliers to limit or take back their plastic packaging;
Design plumbing to reduce the amount of piping needed; and
Use standard dimensions to reduce the cutting of vinyl flooring and siding.
5.2.5 Wood
Wood waste includes pallets, buried wood uncovered through excavation and extra & unused
building materials. Wood waste can be used as feedstock for wood composite products like panel
board, building materials, like shingles and roof felt, pulp, processed and raw fuels, animal
bedding, mulch, soil amendments and landfill cover. Woody materials in good condition, like
beams, posts, and trusses can also be reused. A summary of wood waste management strategies
for construction sites is provided in Table below.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
356
Table 8: Wood management strategies
Identify opportunities for salvage during demolition

Provide contractors with detailed plans so accurate volumes of lumber are
ordered; where feasible, ensure studs and joints are pre- cut to limit onsite
wood waste
Use prefabricated wood, roof and floor systems that limit waste to a
Reduce central location, offsite
If kiln dried lumber is used, store in a protected area so warping and
shrinking are reduced and less waste is created
Limit wood cutting to a specific area onsite so cutoffs can be readily access
and reused where feasible
Relocate unused lumber, cutoffs etc. to other construction sites Reuse
Reuse salvageable timbers and other dimensional lumber from demolition
Set aside pallets for recycling
Separate wood waste based on type; recyclability

Recycle
Recycle wood waste wherever feasible;
Onsite Processing
Where feasible and consistent with environmental regulations, best management practices and
PME & municipal by laws, contractors may wish to consider processing materials for recycling or
disposal onsite. For example, mobile crushers, grinders and chippers can be used for concrete,
masonry supplies, wood and glass.
4.3 Waste Identification and Classification

Wastes that will be generated during the construction of the project will comprise one of the
following main groups of waste types.
• Non-Hazardous Waste
• Municipal Waste.
• Non-Hazardous Industrial Waste.
• Inert Waste.
• Hazardous Waste

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
357
A provisional waste inventory, with estimated waste quantities and disposal options, STL will
ensure the implementation of the inventory system, including:
• Waste streams and their sources;

• Description and classification of the waste streams e.g., hazardous, non-hazardous,
medical type, inert, etc.
• Verification of storage arrangements, if necessary;
• Verification of management options and contractors used; and
• Quantification of waste generated – on a quarterly basis.
When additional waste streams are identified, CLIENT will be consulted to ensure that
appropriate storage and disposal options are identified and implemented.
STL will be responsible for ensuring that the inventory records are retained, maintained and
updated on a quarterly basis or whenever a change occurs. A current copy of waste inventory will
be made available at STL HSE Team Office. When a new waste stream is identified, STL will liaise
with CLIENT to determine for handling, storage and disposal.
For the convenience of waste management, wastes are classified into the following categories.
4.3.1 Municipal Waste (Class 1)

Municipal wastes including garbage, refuse, office waste and other materials resulting from non-
construction operations. Recyclable municipal waste materials such as paper, glass, plastic and
metal will be segregated / sorted and sent to approve CLIENT recycling company. A waste
consignment note will be generated for each consignment of waste delivered to the recycler.
Municipal liquid waste such as sewage and wastewater will be collected.
4.3.2 Non-Hazardous Industrial Waste (Class 2)
Non-hazardous industrial waste can be liquid, semi-liquid and solid. Such waste will be collected at
the STL On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage Facility before being collected and
disposed to landfill by a licensed contractor. A waste consignment note will be generated for each
consignment of waste. STL will follow the CLIENT Environmental Monitoring Procedure, and will be
implemented during the entire work activities, and includes waste/effluent to be monitored and
the limitation of each parameter in accordance to the standards of CLIENT. Licensed contractors
will be engaged for the collection and disposal of non-hazardous industrial waste in either locally
available landfills.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
358
4.3.3 Inert Waste (Class 3)
Waste generated through construction activities, which is not biologically or chemically active in
the natural environment, is regarded as inert. Examples include concrete and brick materials,
broken clay, timber, and most plastics and manufactured rubber products. Inert waste also
includes excavated waste material and top soil. Construction inert waste will be carefully
segregated before collection and disposal. A copy of waste manifest / inventory will be recorded
and filed.
4.3.4 Hazardous Waste (Class 4)
Hazardous waste is defined by virtue of its concentration of constituents and characteristics such
as flammability, corrosiveness, reactivity, toxicity and radioactivity that could pose a hazard to
human or environment health and wellbeing if improperly managed.
“Cradle to grave” management refers to the complete “life cycle” management of a material,
particularly in regard to hazardous materials (HAZMAT). The effective management of hazardous
wastes forms an integral part of cradle to grave management
The life cycle begins with the testing and documentation of the substance and continues through
the handling, transportation and documentation of the material; including on-site storage and use.
The cradle to grave concept with respect to hazardous waste management dictates that generator
of waste “track” the movements of waste materials from the time and location of generation
through to the final disposition of the waste. Diligent handling and disposal of waste requires
maintenance of inventories, consignee / consignor numbers and manifesting to establish the
cradle to grave approach to waste management, as committed to by STL. Hazardous waste from
STL activities will be collected and stored in properly designed storage areas within the STL
construction work area until an approved hazardous waste contractor collects the wastes, or until
an alternative disposal option is identified. Licensed waste collectors will be engaged by STL to
collect and dispose such waste. A waste consignment note will be generated for each consignment
of waste.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
359
A detailed list of hazardous chemicals (materials and substances) will be maintained. The
hazardous chemical list/inventory will be updated on a regular basis during construction phase.
4.4 Management of Waste
The flow chart provided in Appendix 1 summarizes how STL will manage waste during the
construction phase.
The Project Manager will ensure that subcontractors take the following actions.
• All reasonable steps to avoid waste generation and to minimize both the quantities of waste
generated and the hazards of waste generated.
• All wastes generated are correctly identified and stored at the STL On-Site Waste Handling,
Segregation and Storage Area pending collection/transfer for reuse, recycling, treatment and/or
disposal.
• Engage only approved licensed contractors for the transport and disposal of waste.
• All wastes are correctly handled, treated and disposed of.
• The treatment / disposal facilities are appropriately permitted and/or licensed (as stated in this EMP),
and that they are designed, constructed and operated in accordance with City Government and CLIENT
rules and regulations. STL will ensure that wastes are managed according to the following methods.
• For reusable and recyclable wastes generated during construction, waste will be segregated at
the STL On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage area before collection by a designated
and approved waste recycling company.
• For the sewage wastes generated during construction, the sewage and wastewater will be
transported by tanker truck to the City Government’s approved Water Treatment facility.
• The inert waste generated during construction will be used for land reclamation or landfill. Other
reusable and recyclable inert waste will be collected and treated by a locally approved recycling
company. Timber waste will be reused (i.e. pallets reused for purpose) / recycled (workshop
supply) as much as possible onsite.
• The majority of the hazardous waste generated during the work activities will be stored,
transported and disposed properly. HSE Department will keep an updated register of all wastes
generated and disposed. A waste management report will be submitted to CLIENT on a periodic
basis

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
360
4.5 Waste Storage and Collection

Project Manager will ensure that the On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage Area is
appropriately operated and maintained. All wastes will be segregated in this designated storage
area.
• Accidental spillage or leakage.
• Loss of liquid wastes into underlying soil or groundwater.
• Loss of wastes due to removal by wind.
• Corrosion or wear of containers.
• Loss of integrity from accidental collisions or weathering.
• Theft.
• Scavenging by animals
Waste storage containers used will be appropriate in terms of volume, composition, shape, and
opening for the material that is being stored. Only containers in good condition will be utilized.
Bungs and lids will be securely fastened or other forms of covering will be provided. No containers
will be used that are susceptible to reaction with the wastes, which may lead to the release of
harmful substances. All hazardous wastes will be strictly segregated. Only one category of
hazardous waste may be placed in any one container. Solid and liquid wastes will not be mixed.
The Project Manager with the assistance of HSE Manager will ensure that spill response
equipment is available and maintained in areas where hazardous wastes may be spilt, and that an
appropriate number of personnel are trained in spill response techniques.
Temporary (daily) waste storage and collection areas will be located near to the kitchens, offices
and warehouses. Smaller bins of different colors, and including signage on the types of waste to
be disposed of, will be provided in the construction area. Such bins will be emptied and goes to
the On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage Facility on a daily basis. STL will ensure that
following procedures were being implemented.
• Each waste type will be segregated and collected in bins provided in the construction area.
These bins will be removed to the waste storage and collection center on a daily basis for
temporary storage until collection and transportation to the designated place.
• Suitable waste containers/bins will be provided at the places of waste generation to facilitate
safe and environmentally sound temporary storage. All containers/bins will be color-coded
and/or signposted to identify the types of waste they are intended to carry. Such bins will be
clearly marked, according to their intended purpose.
• The daily temporary waste storage areas and On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage
areas will contain bins and skips that are clearly marked as such, and the methods of work
activities and waste containment will ensure that waste is stored safely and not accessible to
vermin.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
361
• The On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage areas will have separate storage
containers/skips for prime recyclables (plastics, glass, ferrous metals and non-ferrous metals)
and separate containers for other wastes requiring segregation, including oils, chemicals and
batteries. Care will be taken to ensure that chemicals are kept in separate containers, in order
to avoid a chemical reaction.
4.5.1 Waste Storage
A proper storage/collection center, for both non-hazardous and hazardous waste generated
during the construction phase, will be provided within the construction site and temporary facility
area.
Storage/Collection Areas for Non-Hazardous Waste
• Temporary (daily) storage / collection points will be located away from main construction
activities and chemicals to prevent the ignition /fire.
• Water and lighting will be provided for the maintenance of the storage/collection center.
• Firefighting equipment will be provided in close proximity to the storage/collection center.
• Sufficient number of skips/plastics bags will be provided for at places of waste generation, to
facilitate safe and environmentally sound temporary storage prior to collection and transfer to
On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage area. All containers will be clearly marked,
according to contents.
• The waste center will be clearly marked as such, and the method of construction and waste
containment will ensure that waste is stored safely and not accessible tovermin.
• The storage area will be readily accessible to collection vehicles.
• The storage area will be of adequate size and capacity to accommodate the required
number of containers, consistent with the waste generation routine and collection
schedules.
• Containers and storage areas will be cleaned on a regularbasis.
• Waste material will be removed to the disposal site at the earliestopportunity.
• Waste collection frequency will be in line with the prevailing City Government &
CLIENT health and safety regulations.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
362
4.5.2 Storage/Collection Areas for Hazardous Waste
• Storage/Collection center will be located away from main construction activities to

prevent ignition / fire.
• Barricades will be constructed around the storage/collection center to prevent
unauthorized access.
• An impermeable dike (bund), with a volume of at least 110% of the largest tank or container
to be stored, will be constructed around the waste oil and chemical storage area to contain
leaks and spills.
• Hazardous waste storage areas will have spill containment systems, be protected to avoid
run-off to and from the storage area, and have facilities to monitor and pre-treat any run-
off.
• Water and lighting will be provided for the maintenance of the storage/collection center.
• Firefighting equipment will be provided in close proximity to the storage/collection center.
• Chemical and hydrocarbon absorbent materials will be provided to clean up spills and leaks.
• Sufficient number of skips will be provided for the collection of the different types of
waste identified.
• Containment curbs will be maintained around the loading and unloadingarea.
• Containers and storage tanks will be constructed from a suitable/compatible material, to
permanently contain the hazardous waste, and will have an identificationlabel.
• Storage facilities will be inspected regularly forleakage.
• Incompatible materials will not be stored or placed in either common containment areas or
containers.
• Where groundwater pollution potential exists, the monitoring will be carried out and
contingency plans will be established to deal with emergencies arising from the
accidental discharge of hazardous wastes.
• Storage areas will be marked and illuminated.
• Hazardous wastes will not be stored in the storage areas for more than 90 days. In the event
that this period is extended, then CLIENT permission will be sought prior to exceeding this
time.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
363
• At the expiry of the storage time limit, the material will be transported/removed to a
suitable a designated and approved area.
• Hazardous waste containers for transport will be appropriately marked and labeled.
• Handling, storage, and transport of hazardous waste will be tracked.
4.5.3 Waste Collection Skip and Bin/Container

Waste Collection Skip
Waste collection skips are generally large volume metal bins that may be loaded and unloaded
from the back of waste collection vehicles. Such skips are mainly used for the collection of solid
non-hazardous wastes that will include:
• Domestic wastes such as paper, drink cans and plastic bottles.

• Inert wastes such as vegetation, scrap metals, timbers and cement or concrete.
• Excavated soil / earth will be collected by an earth truck. Excavated soil / earth will be
transported to, and stored in designated area.
Waste collection skips of sufficient volume and numbers will be provided at the waste
storage/collection center and within the construction work areas.
Skips provided on site will be prominently color-coded and named/tagged, in both English
and Arabic, in accordance with the waste classification.
Waste Collection Bins/Containers/Areas
Waste collection bins/containers are generally plastic bins or metal containers smaller in
volume. Such bins and containers will be provided in sufficient quantities within the
construction work areas, including temporary facilities such as kitchen, camps, site offices,
medical center and workshops. Suitable and appropriate color-coded bins and containers
will be provided for the collection of:
• Organic or food waste from kitchen (will be provided with plastic lining and cover, signs with
green color background will posted).
• Medical waste from Clinic (bins with biohazard sign will be provided with sealable lid).
• Domestic waste from office or mixed waste such as paper, cartons, and plastics (will be
provided with plastic lining and cover, signs with black background will be posted).
• Wood waste (sign with blue color background will be posted)

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
364
• Metal wastes (containers will be provided; signs with gray color back ground will be
posted).
• Hazardous wastes such as used oil and chemicals (Containers with Hazardous Signs in
accordance with the CLIENT Chemical Management Procedure will be prominently
• labeled as to its content and hazardous properties and will be posted with a Warning Sign.
Also signs with orange color background will be posted).
• All waste will be kept segregated in accordance with the Waste Management Program and
MSDS.
• Non-compatible wastes will be stored in separate bins.
4.5.4 Sanitary Wastewater
Adequate septic tanks will be installed on the site to collect and treat all waste water from
washing room and toilet. Treated waste water will be further collected and stored in a large
waste water storage tank, from where it will be pumped and transported into public waste
water treatment plant for the final disposal or disposed off after treating to the permissible
levels of SAES-A-104 and SASC-S-02.
Adequate enough waste water treatment facilities will be built on site to collect and treat
the waste water from canteen. The treated water will be stored in a large waste water
storage tank, from where it will be pumped and transported into public waste water
treatment plant for further treatment.
4.6 Waste Handling
4.6.1 General Waste
The following measures outline the procedure for general waste handling from construction
activities.
• Waste will be segregated at the source, in accordance with the agreed classification
system, and collected on a daily basis.
• Waste will be collected in appropriate bins or containers for transport to the On-Site
Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage area. Waste bins or containers will be identified
by color, with signs / labels in English andArabic.
• Only locally approved waste collectors will be engaged to collect waste from the On-Site Waste
Handling, Segregation and Storage area for offsite transport to approved facilities.
Domestic waste will be removed to approved treatment facilities or landfills.

Organic waste such as food waste will be collected and disposed on a regular basis.
• Waste accumulated in On-Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage Facility will be
removed, collected and disposed of on a regularly basis, or within a period of not more than 7
days.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
365
• Waste collection vehicles and skips will be purpose designed to prevent waste being strewn
onto public roads and fluids flowing into open public drains.
• Sewage will be collected through underground pipes and a suction pump system within the
accommodation camp. Sewage from laydown area and construction site will be collected using
portable fit for purpose vacuum / suction trucks, with chemically treated tanks, on a regular
basis. Such wastes will be sent to the sewage treatment facilities for treatment prior to being
discharged or used for irrigation.
4.6.2 Hazardous Waste
Hazardous waste will be carefully handled from generation to disposal. The following
measures list out the steps in which hazardous waste from construction activities are
handled:
• The nature of the hazardous waste collected will be prominently indicated on the outside of its
container.
• All containers containing hazardous waste will be marked in accordance with the
approved labeling procedure.
• Medical waste will be sterile and collected in sealed containers with a biohazard sign.
Medical staff will keep a log of all medical wastes removed from the construction site.
• Waste collectors and workers handling hazardous waste, including chemicals, will be
adequately trained in the potential hazards.
• Hazardous waste, such as waste oil and chemicals, will be removed and collectedfrom the
construction site within a period of not more than 90 days from the last collection day.
• In addition to the above, bold warning signs in English and Arabic will be posted on the
container.
• HSE Manager will ensure that MSDSs are provided to the approved wastecontractor and
will brief collector/handlers on the potentialhazards.
• Waste collectors/handlers will wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), such as
face shields, impermeable clothing and gloves, and chemical resistant safety shoes, if required
due to the properties of the hazardous waste.
• Waste oil will be properly collected by an approved contractor for transport to a facility or
recovery in their crude oil stream / process.
4.6.3 Storage of Gasoline, Oil, Lubricants Etc.
The following practices will be implemented to minimize or prevent spills/releases of

gasoline, oil, lubricants, etc., (hazardous materials):

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
366
• Equipment will be mechanically sound with no oil or gas leaks; equipment will be
frequently inspected and leaks will be repaired immediately
• Fueling, storage, and servicing of vehicles and construction equipment will be conducted so
that hazardous materials cannot enter surface waters or areas with a high-water table
• Engineering controls (spill containment/clean-up materials) will be accessible and

maintained in the hazardous materials storage area
• All storage tanks or drums will be protected from collision damage and the tank or tank tower
and the impermeable pad/base upon which drums are placed encircled with a berm to
control the lateral spread of hazardous materials that may be released during a rupture;
fencing may also be used to secure these areas
• Fuel storage areas and transfer lines
• Will be clearly marked or barricaded to prevent damage (from vehicles, etc.)
• All spills will be cleaned up immediately and be reported accordingly.
4.7 Preparation of Waste Disposal/Transportation
4.7.1 Waste Labelling
The Project Manager with the assistance of HSE Manager will ensure that all waste
containers are clearly identified and that they accurately describe the type of waste. There
will be separate storage containers for prime recyclables (plastics, glass, ferrous metals and
non-ferrous metals) and separate containers for other wastes requiring segregation,
including oils, chemicals and batteries. Full descriptions of the waste are required to assist
both site and external personnel in handling the waste material safely. Any unidentified
wastes will be treated as hazardous.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
367
The information to be given on waste labels includes:
• Name of waste.
• Source of waste.
• Storage date.
• Type of waste (solid, liquid or sludge).
• Amount of waste.
• Known environmental, health and safety hazards.
• Personnel protection equipment (PPE) required.
• Storage location contact name and telephone number.
4.7.2 Waste Transfer Checklist

Wastes will be transferred daily from the place of waste generation/temporary storage to
On- Site Waste Handling, Segregation and Storage area using dedicated vehicles (i.e. waste
transportation). Collections will be scheduled as frequently as necessary to prevent over-
accumulation of wastes. Only approved / licensed transport will be used for waste
transport.
Prior to allowing the consignment of waste to leave the site, a Waste Transfer Checklist
such as that enclosed in Appendix 2 will be completed. The Project HSE Manager with the
assistance of HSE Manager will ensure that the checklist is completed to verify that the
waste containers are:
• Clearly labeled to describe the waste it contains – using the standard waste labels, which should
be completed in full – old labels should also have been removed to avoid confusion as to the
contents of the container
• In good condition and are not leaking
• Appropriate to the waste they contain
• Appropriately sealed e.g., with a lid or bung; and
• Not emitting any harmful gases or generating heat, which could be a sign that incompatible
wastes have been stored together resulting in an adverse chemical reaction.
If any of the above have not been carried out, or have been carried out to a poor standard,
the waste consignment will not be allowed to leave the site. If such a case is identified, the
HSE Manager will ensure that all necessary corrective action(s) are taken to rectify the
situation in order to allow the waste to leave the site.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
368
The Waste Transfer Checklist is to be retained at the site and will be available to CLIENT.
1. WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES
The Project Manager or his nominee will, on a semiannual basis, conduct an inspection of
all waste disposal sites used by the project to dispose of waste streams. A report detailing
the findings and recommendations of the inspection will be forwarded to CLIENT for
review. Waste containing free liquids will not be disposed of to any land farms.
The following materials shall not be used for landfill disposal:
• Waste for which a waste characterization has not been received and approved by
CLIENT.
• Wastes that have a flash point of less than 60 degrees centigrade
• Non-liquid waste that can cause fire through friction or chemical reaction.
• Strong oxidizers.
• Materials of pH less than 2 or greater than 12.
• Substances corrosive to steel at a rate greater than 6.35 millimeters per year.
• Explosives or pyrophoric.
• Materials that are defined to be toxic by US EPA’s Toxicity Characteristic
Leaching Procedure.
• Infectious medical wastes.
• Radioactive wastes with greater than 20,000 pCi/g of activity.
• Materials containing greater than 5 mg/kg total PCBs (polychlorinated bi-
phenols).
• Liquid wastes of any kind.
7. WASTE MANAGEMENT TRAINING AND COMMUNICATION
All STL employees will be provided with general knowledge on the execution of the WMP
during Site HSE Orientation and Refresher Training. Waste collection subcontractors and
their employees will also be trained specifically on the requirements of the WMP.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
369
The Project Manager with the assistance of HSE Manager will ensure that employees and
subcontractors are made aware of the potential impacts of their work activities with respect
to HSE issues.
Additionally, employees will be encouraged, by the HSE Manager to identify and report
any instances of improper waste storage and disposal, which may have an impact on either
the external environment or employee health. HSE Manager will then ensure that
appropriate corrective or
remedial action(s) are implemented, as soon as practicable.

General WMP training for employees will include at least the following.
• Roles and responsibilities of eachindividual.

• The principle of reduction, reuse, recycle, recovery and responsible disposal ofwaste
(including the specific measures to be taken for theproject).
• Identification and segregation of the different classes of waste atsource.
• Identification and understanding of hazardous waste, its properties and characteristics
through MSDS.
• Selection and use of appropriate PPE when handling waste.
8. WASTE INVENTORY AND RECORD KEEPING
The HSE Manager is responsible for ensuring the maintenance of the Waste Consignment
Master List. This master list summarizes relevant information for every waste consignment
transported from the site.
At the end of each quarter the master list is to be forwarded to Dolphin and a new master
list begun for the new period. Master lists are to be archived indefinitely.
The HSE Manager will ensure all subcontractors maintain a similar waste inventory
specific to each facility under his management control including:
• Waste streams and their sources;

• Description and classification of the waste streams e.g. hazardous, non- hazardous, medical
type, inert, etc.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
370
• Table 9: Waste movement register sample.
Site Waste Management Plan

Record of Waste Movement
Contract Name/No: Completed By:

Region/Division: Sign:
Contractor: Date:
Revision Date:
Waste Quantity
Waste Description Waste Carrier Management (include
Site estimate)
Date
Vehicle
Waste Waste Origin of
Name License Name m3
Type Category Waste
Number
Total

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
371
• Verification of temporary storage arrangements, if necessary;

• Verification of management options and contractors used; and
• Quantification of waste generated – on an annual, quarterly or monthly basis, as
appropriate.
When additional waste streams are identified, the HSE Manager will be consulted to ensure
appropriate storage and disposal options are identified and implemented.
The HSE Manager will be responsible for ensuring that the records of these inventories are
retained and maintained on a quarterly basis or whenever a change occurs.
Waste removed from the construction site during the construction phase will be controlled
by an inventory system and log, as in Waste Consignment Master List (Appendix 2). HSE
Manager, with the assistance from HSE Staff, will maintain the inventory system for all
waste generated from construction activities and report on a monthly basis to HSE Manager.
8.1 Inspection and Improvement Monitoring
HSE Manager with the assistance of his HSE Staff will perform daily site environmental inspection
of the construction site. Such inspection will include areas like waste storages/collection center,
waste skips and bins.
An inspection report will then be generated and submitted to the HSE Manager. The
Environmental Inspection Checklist for Storage is included as Appendix 4.
8.1.1 Environment Inspection and Audit
The HSE Manager, or his nominated representative, will, on a monthly basis, conduct an
inspection of all temporary waste storage areas and the On-Site Waste Handling,
Segregation and Storage Facility. A report detailing findings of the inspection and
recommendations will be forwarded to STL management for review.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
372
9. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION POLICY
This Environmental Protection Policy (EPP) outlines the standard measures that Huta will
implement at the site to prevent its works from causing any environmental impacts. Huta
believes that all environmental impacts are preventable, and it is dedicated to the goal of
preventing such impacts. In order to do so, all project personnel must assume
responsibility for environmental protection. To that end, all project personnel are
encouraged and authorized to: Conduct their activities in an environmentally-friendly
manner.
• Alert the appropriate personnel should any condition that threatens the wellbeing of the
environment be encountered
• Take corrective actions to ensure that work proceeds in an eco-friendly manner.
9.1 Definitions
Environmental Pollution: for the purpose of this plan, environmental pollution is defined presence of chemical,
physical, or biological elements or agents, which adversely affect the ecological b a l a n c e a t e a c h
c o n t r a c t s i t e and/or degrade its utility for aesthetic and/or recreational purposes.
Pollutants: for the purpose of this plan, pollutants include hazardous materials (including the oil that
smothered the intertidal habitats of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s (KSA's) east coast toward the end
of the 1991 Gulf War and persists within the substrate at each contract site), solid waste, dust, and
noise.
Receptors: for the purpose of this plan, receptors include water (surface water and
groundwater), land (soil and sediment), local fauna and flora, and air.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
373
9.2 EPP Goals
This EPP was developed specifically for the activities that STL will perform and
establishes the protocols necessary to ensure that these activities will minimize, with the
goal of eliminating:
Any impacts to receptors by pollutants, including: release of petroleum, including sheens
(surface water and groundwater), land (erosion of soils and sediments (land), trampling
(local fauna and flora), and generation of excessive dust and/or noise (air)
Violations of any existing environmental regulations
All STL personnel are to make a concerted effort to follow the guidance provided in the EPP and to:
• Create and maintain an eco-friendly work environment
• Have zero environmental impacts
• Provide management leadership for environmental protection by communicating performance
expectations, reviewing and tracking performance, and leading by example.
• Ensure effective implementation of this EPP through education/training, delegation, and team
work
• Ensure 100 percent participation in training programs and environmental protection
compliance
• Maintain open lines of communication
• Encourage personnel to make a personal commitment to environmental protection
• Continue personnel involvement initiatives
• Achieve environmental protection excellence
9.3 Applicability of this EPP and Induction/Orientation
All onsite management personnel (Project Manager, Foremen, etc.) will read this EPP and
acknowledge the review and receipt of this document. This EPP will be
maintained/archived onsite. HSE officer will be responsible for the induction/orientation
of the labor force to ensure that all works are implemented in an eco-friendly manner.
10. PHYSICAL SETTING OF THE GULF COAST OF KSA

The climate of Gulf coast of KSA is dry, with hot summers and mild winters. Air
temperatures average 37°C in August and 12°C in January. The average annual rainfall is
only 50 mm per year, evaporation rates are high (4 mm per day), and salinities typically
range from 38 to 41 ppt. Water temperatures range from 15 to 33°C.Winds are
predominantly out of the northwest and average 1 to 4 ms-1. In winter and summer, there
are strong wind events known as Shamal (Arabic word meaning north) that reach
sustained velocities of up to 15 ms-1.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
374
11. ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
11.1 Site Management Organization Char

The STL site management team will consist of the following Managers, Engineers,
technicians, and support staff (please note that not all of these individuals will necessarily
be working on the project [or be at the project site] at any given time). This list will be
revised, as necessary
12. AIR QUALITY
Dust generated from piling, material handling, excavation, filling, backfilling, road
construction and vehicle movements will be the sources of impact on air quality.
Construction activities such as earthworks, material handling, wind erosion of stockpiled
materials, and truck movement on the unpaved haul roads are the main dust generating
sources. The air quality issues are expected to be significant minimal.
Monitoring will consist of visual observations by the environmental staff. Any clear
violations will be subject to immediate shut-down of site operations in question, until the
air quality issues are brought under control.
In general, the site will be frequently cleaned and watered using water lorries to minimize
the fugitive dust emissions. The following specific mitigation measures and preventive
actions shall also be employed to avoid excessive dust generation on site:
Site Clearance
• The working area shall be sprayed with water immediately before, during
and immediately after the operation so as to maintain wet surface.
• All demolished items that may dislodge dust particles should be covered entirely by
impervious sheeting within a day of demolition, and disposed off site as soon as
possible.
Earthwork and Mechanical Breaking
• The amount of soil exposed in excavation area at any time shall be kept as
low as possible to minimize the dust generation potential and thus dust
emission.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
375
• The working area of any construction or earth moving operation shall be sprayed with water
immediately before, during and after the operation so as to maintain the wet surface.
• Construction or earthworks shall be completed as quickly as practicable and exposed earth

should be properly treated by compaction after last construction activity.
• Water should be regularly sprayed on the work surface where mechanical breaking
operation is in progress, as needed.
• Construction works and transfer of surface material should be minimized on windy days.
Dusty Materials Handling and Stockpile

• In the process of material handling, any material which has the potential to create dust shall
be treated with water.
• Any stockpile of dusty materials shall not extend beyond the pedestrian barriers, fencing or
traffic cones;
• Stockpile of dusty materials should be avoided. Any stockpile of dusty materials, where
possible.
13. HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

STL has adopted a philosophy for health and safety (H&S) excellence. The primary
driving force behind this commitment to H&S is simple: STL’s most important asset is its
personnel and its management values their health, safety, and wellbeing. In addition, STL
believes that all injuries are preventable. Its safety culture encourages all of its personnel
to accept ownership for safety and empowers them to take whatever actions are necessary
to prevent personal injuries. STL is committed to maintaining superior H&S standards
and performance and it understands that this behavior is a necessary element of overall
business success. STL is dedicated to the prevention of personal injuries, occupational
illnesses, and damage to equipment and property in all of its operations; to the protection
of the general public, whenever it comes in contact with its work; and to the prevention of
pollution and environmental degradation.
STL’s personnel plan safety into each work task in order to prevent occupational injuries
and illnesses. The ultimate success of its H&S program depends on the full cooperation
and participation of all of its personnel. STL management is fully committed to H&S
excellence. Commercial Registration - 1010136286
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
376
13 STL will ensure that its personnel comply with this H&S Plan (HASP) and the H&S
regulations/policies of the KSA.
13.1 H&S Goals
This HASP was developed specifically for the activities that STL will perform for the
DAREEN Port and establishes the protocols necessary to ensure that these activities
comply with applicable regulations and will minimize, with the goal of eliminating:
- Injuries or ill health to STL personnel or other persons;
- The exposure of STL personnel or other persons to health hazards above the
occupational/permissible limits allowed within theKSA;
- Significant releases of contaminants to the environment;and
- Violations of any existing health, safety, or environmental regulations.
All STL personnel are to make a concerted effort to meet the H&S goals outlined within
this HASP. In order to succeed, everyone must strive to accomplish these goals, which
will allow the project to stay focused on optimizing the H&S of all site personnel and,
therefore, ensure project success; these goals include:
- Create and maintain an injury-free environment;
- Have zero injuries or incidents;
- Provide management leadership for H&S by communicating performance expectations,

reviewing and tracking performance, and leading byexample;
- Ensure effective implementation of this HASP through education/training, delegation, and

team work;
- Ensure 100 % participation in training programs, Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

use, H&S compliance;
- Continuously improve the safety performance of all personnel associated with STL’s work;
- Maintain open lines of communication;
- Encourage personnel to make a personal commitment tosafety; Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd
- Focus safety improvements on high-risk groups or tasks; Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
377
- Continue personnel involvement initiatives; and
- Achieve H&S excellence.
The successful implementation of this safety plan relies on the following:

The technical know-how of project personnel in matters related to safety; and
The motivation of project personnel to act safely and maintain a high-level awareness of
safety matters.
14 HASP Applicability and Personnel Responsibilities
All onsite management/supervisory personnel (Project Manager, Site Safety Supervisor,

Site Manager, Foremen) will read and apply the HASP. It is then the responsibility of
management/supervisory personnel to ensure that all site personnel (including visitors)
become familiar with the HASP and that all activities comply with the document. The
responsibilities of managers, supervisors, and STL personnel, subcontracted personnel,
and visitors are outlined below.
14.1.1 Project Manager
STL Project Manager (PM) is responsible for providing adequate resources (budget and
staff) for project-specific implementation of the H&S management process. The PM has
overall management responsibility for the tasks listed below. The PM may explicitly
delegate specific tasks to other staff, as described in sections that follow, but retains
ultimate responsibility for completion of the following in accordance with this document:
- Ensure that acceptable certificates of insurance are secured as a condition of

subcontract award;
- Include H&S information in subcontract agreements, and ensure that appropriate site-specific safety
procedures and training records are reviewed and accepted prior to the start of subcontractor’s field
operations;
- Incorporate standard terms and conditions, and contract-specific H&S roles and
responsibilities in contract and subcontract agreements (including flow-down
requirements to lower-tier subcontractors);
- remains current and amended when project activities or conditions change; Any findings observed will
be rectified in a timely manner to allow for their implementation;
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
378
- Maintain copies of subcontracts and subcontractor certificates of insurance, bond,

contractor’s license, training and medical monitoring records, and site-specific safety
procedures in the project file accessible to site personnel; and
- Manage the site and interface with third parties in a manner consistent with contract and
subcontract agreements and the applicable standard of reasonable care.
14.1.2 Site Safety Supervisor (HS&E REPRESENTATIVE)

The Site Safety Supervisor (SSfS) is in charge of the onsite administration and
enforcement of the HASP. The SSfS has the full authority to stop any unsafe practices
immediately and is responsible for:
- Reviewing the HASP on a quarterly basis, to ensure that it is kept up to date; verifying that the HASP
Performing task specific training whereas identified and when required;
- Introducing and instructing all new project personnel; making sure that STL personnel and
subcontracted personnel receive a thorough induction regarding all of the site safety requirements
(contents of the HASP) and sign off on an induction form prior to commencing field/site activities;
providing all site visitors with an appropriate safety brief (induction), one scaled to their proposed site
activities
- Evaluating any risks to the workforce’s and other related or not related parties H&S from the proposed
site activities by performing custom made Risk Assessments (RAs). This process will take the form of a
systematic examination of the following work aspects;
What could cause injury or harm;

Whether the hazard could be eliminated; and if not
What preventive measures are, or should be in place to control the risks
- Assuring that the workforce is sufficiently trained and qualified to perform works- related tasks
(activities specified in the contract's scope of works) that they are assigned to; asking for diplomas and
certificates when new employees arrive on site;
- Assisting PM with making sure that the overall, job-specific health and safety goals are fully and
continuously achieved;
- Advising and supporting management and supervisory personnel on HS&E issues;
- Undertaking random spot-checks on the contract site to verify compliance with the
Project HS&E plan;

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
379
- Reporting and investigating any accidents, damages, losses and 'near misses';
- Sharing aforementioned investigation results with the organization and develop and
implement improvements or protection measures accordingly;
In co-operation with the PM, making sure that the contract site's HS&E organization
structure is clearly communicated/indicated and updated/revised, as necessary;
- Making sure that the HS&E functions of the employees on the project and the reporting lines are
clearly communicated/indicated and adhered to; and
- Keeping the emergency telephone list contained in Appendix 6 should be up-to-date and make sure
that employees on the project know the numbers, and routings, where specified. The list must be
distributed to strategic locations on the contract site.
All STL personnel, subcontracted personnel, and visitors are responsible for their H&S.
This concept is the foundation for involving all personnel in identifying hazards and
providing solutions. For any operation, individuals have full authority to stop work and
initiate immediate corrective action or control. In addition, each worker has a right and
responsibility to report unsafe conditions/practices. This right represents a significant facet
of worker empowerment and program ownership. Through shared values and a belief that
all accidents are preventable,
STL personnel (including subcontracted personnel) accept personal responsibility for working safely.
All personnel are responsible for the following performance objectives:
- Complete an H&S orientation (induction administered by the SSfS) prior to entering any of the contract
site work areas and beginning any work.
- Perform work in a safe manner and produce quality results;
- Perform work in accordance with company policies, and report injuries, illnesses, and unsafe
conditions;
- Complete work without injury, illness, or property damage;
- Report all incidents and/or hazardous conditions immediately to SSfS and
- Document all 'near misses' and report them to the SSfS for action.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
380
14.1.3 Site Visitors
All visitors are to report to the temporary office facilities compound upon arriving at
the site and ask to meet with the SSfS to inform the SSfS of its planned onsite
activities and receive an appropriate safety brief (induction).
13.3 Safe Work Practices (ACCIDENT PREVENTION)

13.3.1 General Site Rules
To achieve real improvements in safety and health on site STL proposes the following
rules to be adhered to at all times:
- All pertinent information relevant to the project is displayed on the project notice boards in front of
the main office;
- All access to the site areas must be coordinated with the Coast Guard, PM, SSfS, and other appropriate
authorities. Upon entering the site vehicles are to remain on access road/driveway network at all times;
this network will be clearly demarcated using ropes/flagging, cones, and directional/informational
signage. Persons not following this may be subject to disciplinary action;
- All site personnel are required to attend a site safety induction prior to undertaking any activities on
site. This includes supervision of works and site inspections; in addition, all site personnel are required to
participate in on-going onsite training exercises, and safety briefs/meetings.
- All visitors to site are required to sign the 'Visitors Log Book', which is maintained in the SSfS's office,
upon arrival and departure;

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
381
- All staff are required to sign the Staff Register upon arrival and departure;
The site boundaries are defined (staked out) and no activities shall occur and no
access shall be permitted to areas outside of (beyond) the site boundaries;
- Implementation of any works must comply with the HASP, Environmental Protection Plan (EPP),
- All site personnel are responsible for assessing the safety of their work environment.
- Should you not be able to get to your workplace safely or undertake your work safely, this
should immediately be brought to the attention of the SSfS (or its duly authorized agent),
foreman or any other member of staff;
-
- The minimum PPE requirements are as described in Section 14.2 of this report;
- All domestic waste is to be disposed in the bins provided;
- No burning of any material is permitted on site (refer to the EPP, which is provided under
separate cover)
- Eating, drinking, smoking, and use of tobacco products is prohibited while working
(carrying out tasks). Smoking will only be permitted onsite in designated areas. When
offsite, personnel must abide by posted smoking regulations. Adequate quantities of
water and/or sports-type drinks will be available and personnel have been instructed
on the importance of staying sufficiently hydrated;
- The 'Accident Log Book' is maintained by the SSfS office. All accidents and
'near misses' are to be reported however minor they seem;
- Should emergency services be required on site, the first aiders (namely the SSfS) will co-
ordinate the emergency services. (See Appendix 6 of this report);
- All containers of fuel and chemicals are to be stored in the bunded area (refer to the
EPP, which is provided under separate cover);

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
382
- A spill kit is provided for spillages of fuels and chemicals. It is located adjacent to the
sheet containers. The spill kit coordinator is the SSfS. Only designated spill kit
operatives are authorized to use the spill kits (refer to the EPP, which is provided under
separate cover);
- Prior to using substances that are potentially hazardous to health, the recipient will be given
an induction by the SSfS to advise of the following:
The hazards present;

• Protective measures (PPE); and
• Emergency procedures (where required).
13.4 Safety Training

13.4.1 STL Personnel Training Requirements
All project personnel will receive H&S training. Select personnel will receive first aid
and cardio pulmonary resuscitation training. STL a will document all training. All
training completion certificates will be maintained onsite.
13.4.2 Project Personnel Orientation
- Personnel expecting to access the site are required to have STL’s project personnel
- orientation. The training provided to the personnel in this orientation shall include:
- Review the HASP;
- Present an overall site safety briefing (general site safety);
- Review personnel responsibilities;
- Review emergency procedures and evacuation plan;
- Review injury and incident reporting procedures; and
- Review reporting procedures for hazardous conditions and/or hazardous activities.
13.4.3
Safe Work Practices (ACCIDENT PREVENTION)
GENERAL SITE RULES

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
383
- All visitors to site are required to sign the 'Visitors Log Book', which is maintained in the SSfS's
office, upon arrival and departure;
To achieve real improvements in safety and health on site STL proposes the following
rules to be adhered to at all times:
- All pertinent information relevant to the project is displayed on the project notice boards in front
of the main office;
- All access to the site areas must be coordinated with the Coast Guard, PM, SSfS, and other appropriate
authorities. Upon entering the site vehicles are to remain on access road/driveway network at all times;
this network will be clearly demarcated using ropes/flagging, cones, and directional/informational
signage. Persons not following this may be subject to disciplinary action;
- All site personnel are required to attend a site safety induction prior to undertaking any activities on
site. This includes supervision of works and site inspections; in addition, all site personnel are required to
participate in on-going onsite training exercises, and safety briefs/meetings
- All staff are required to sign the Staff Register upon arrival and departure.
- The site boundaries are defined (staked out) and no activities shall occur and no access shall be
permitted to areas outside of (beyond) the site boundaries;
- All domestic waste is to be disposed in the bins provided;
Eating, drinking, smoking, and use of tobacco products is prohibited while working (carrying
out tasks). Smoking will only be permitted onsite in designated areas. When offsite,
personnel must abide by posted smoking regulations. Adequate quantities of
water and/or sports-type drinks will be available and personnel have been instructed
on the importance of staying sufficiently hydrated;

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
384
Safety Meetings (MASS SAFETY/'TOOLBOX MEETINGS')
Safety meetings provide a method for maintaining safety awareness and providing
safety related information and training to personnel.
Mass safety meetings will be held once a month and are project wide; mass safety
meetings provide a forum for all personnel on the project to have an understanding of
project wide performance and accomplishments. These group meetings should foster a
consistent approach to safety. Minutes must be recorded at each meeting and
maintained in the project files.
14 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION
This document states the minimum requirements for personal protective equipment
(PPE) for all personnel working on Dareen Port.
Persons shall wear the PPE outlined in Table 11.

Operational Personnel1 Visitors
High visibility long sleeve shirt with retro- Long sleeved shirt (high visibility with retro-
reflective strips (AS 4602.1.2011 Class N reflective strips or vest with same that meets
garment) Class N garment)
Long pants with retro-reflective strips on the Long pants
leg (AS 4602.1.2011 Class N garment)
Safety footwear -steel toe or composite) Fully Enclosed Flat Footwear or
Safety footwear if entering workshops or
operational elements of the bulk handling
facility.
Safety glasses Safety glasses

Helmet (with retro-reflective strips if Helmet (with retro-reflective strips if working in
working in hours of darkness) hours of darkness)
Gloves (task appropriate) are to be carried at
all times

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
385
14.1 Responsibilities
Issuers of PPE must instruct the person who is receiving it in the correct fitting, use,
selection, testing, maintenance, storage and limitations of the PPE.
Managers, supervisors and team leaders must ensure for those employees under their
control that clothing and equipment is maintained in good working order and is
replaced when it no longer provides the level of protection required, it’s safe working
life has expired or when it is damaged and cannot be repaired.
Employees must:
• Use PPE as instructed.

• Not misuse or damage PPE.
• Inform their supervisor if they are unsure of the correct selection, fitting, use,
maintenance and storage of particular PPE; and
• Report any damage, malfunction or need for cleaning as soon as practicable.
Loose clothing, personal adornments and hair must be confined so as to prevent

entanglement with any machinery, electrical equipment or other device. For
operational personnel, shirts need to be tucked in so they are not ‘loose’.
14.2 Requirements for PPE

Safety Helmets
• Helmets will comply with AS 1801:1997 Occupational Protective Helmets and -must be replaced
a minimum of two years from the date of issue (issue date should be recorded on the sticker
inside the helmet). Helmets will be Type 1 Industrial Safety Helmet.
• MWPA will supply its employees with chinstraps, these -may - be used during windy
conditions or where helmets can inadvertently fall off.
Eye Protection
• Eye protection equipment will comply with AS 1337.1.2010 Personal eye protection – Eye
and face protectors for occupational applications and as a minimum, meet the ‘medium
impact’ performance criteria of that standard.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
386
• For prescription safety glasses, frames and lenses must comply with a medium impact rating
in accordance with AS1337.6.2012 Personal eye protection – prescription eye protections
against low and medium impact. Fit over safety glasses shall be worn over non-safety
prescription glasses.
• Double eye protection is required when completing grinding, cutting, welding and
sandblasting operations.
• Glasses are to be worn when on verandahs where signage states this requirement.
Safety Footwear
Safety footwear must be toe re-enforced or composite, fully enclosed (ankle height
boots recommended), have a non-slip sole; and be chemical and oil resistant.
Safety footwear must be kept in good condition. Replacement of boots shall occur at
any signs of metal/composite toe protection coming through the leather of the boot,
broken zips or shoe lace eyelets, cracked, badly worn or damaged soles or any other
fair wear and tear.
Hand protection
Glove clips will be issued to operational staff to assist with the mandatory glove requirement.
ADDITIONAL PPE
• Hearing protection shall be worn where signed asmandatory.
• Hardhat brims or neck shades and gloves are strongly recommended when working in the
sun.
• Sun screen (SPF30 or higher) is available throughout the site and personal tubes can be
requested through HSEQ.
• Respiratory protective equipment is required if there is a risk of exceeding occupational

exposure standards or where a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) recommends.
• Personal flotation devices (PFD) must be worn if required over or Near Water.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
387
15. RESPIRATOR USE
15.1 General use

An appointed medical staff of STL will use the respirators as required by this project
and in accordance with the training they receive.
STL medical staff must conduct user seal checks each time that they wear their
respirators. Employees must use either the positive or negative pressure check
(depending on which test works best for them).
STL medical staff will be permitted to leave their work areas to clean their respirators,
to change filters or cartridges, replace parts, or to inspect respirators if they stop
functioning. STL medical staff should notify a supervisor before leaving a work area.
STL medical staff is not permitted to wear tight-fitting respirators if they have
conditions such as facial scars, facial hair, or missing dentures that prevent them from
achieving a good seal. Facial hair must not contact sealing surfaces or interfere with
the valve function.
STL medical staff is not permitted to wear headphones, jewelry, or other articles that
may interfere with the facepiece-to-face seal.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
388
15.2 Voluntary use

Dust masks:
Employees who voluntarily wear dust masks are not subject to the medical evaluation,
cleaning, storage, and maintenance provisions of this program.
• The program administrator will authorize voluntary use of respirators as requested by all other
employees on a case-by-case basis, depending on workplace conditions and medical evaluation
results.
15.3 Escape respirator

Escape respirators are for emergencies only and must be inspected before being
carried into the workplace. When the emergency alarm sounds, employees on working
must immediately don emergency escape respirators, shut down equipment, and
evacuate to designated safe areas.
15.4 Respirator malfunction
Respirators that are defective or that have defective parts must be removed from
service immediately. An employee who discovers a defect in a respirator must inform
his or her supervisor who will give the respirators to the program administrator. The
program administrator will decide whether to take the respirator out of service, fix it
on the spot, or dispose of it.
The employee must discontinue use and inform his or her supervisor that the
respirator is not working correctly. The supervisor must ensure that the employee
receives parts to repair the respirator or receives another respirator. Locations
immediately dangerous to life or health (IDHL)
The program administrator has identified the following locations as immediately
dangerous to life or health (IDLH):
At least one person must stay immediately outside the IDLH atmosphere to respond to
emergencies.
The person entering the IDLH atmosphere and the person outside the IDLH
atmosphere must maintain visual, voice, or signal contact.
The person outside the IDLH atmosphere must be trained and equipped to respond to
the emergency.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
389
The person outside the IDLH atmosphere must use a positive- pressure SCBA or
positive- pressure supplied-air respirator with auxiliary SCBA and appropriate rescue
retrieval equipment. The program administrator or another designated person must be
notified before an emergency responder enters the IDLH atmosphere.
16. Cleaning, maintenance, change schedules and storage
15.5.1 Cleaning
Respirators must be regularly cleaned and disinfected at the respirator cleaning station.
Respirators must be cleaned as often as necessary to keep them sanitary.
Atmosphere supplying and emergency use respirators must be cleaned and disinfected
after each use.
The following procedure must be used for cleaning and disinfecting respirators:
• Disassemble respirator. Remove filters, canisters, or cartridges.

• Wash the face piece and parts in warm water with a mild detergent. Do not use organic
solvents.
• Rinse completely in clean warm water.
• Wipe the respirator with disinfectant wipes.
• Air dry the respirator in a clean area.
• Reassemble the respirator, inspect it, and replace defective parts.
• Put the respirator in a clean, dry, plastic bag or other air-tight container.
The program administrator will ensure an adequate supply of appropriate cleaning and disinfection
materials at the cleaning station. Employees should contact their supervisor or the program
administrator when supplies are low.
Maintenance
Respirators must be properly maintained to ensure that they work properly.
Maintenance involves a thorough visual inspection for cleanliness and defects. Worn or
deteriorated parts must be replaced. No components will be replaced or repairs made
except those recommended by the manufacturer. The manufacturer must repair the
regulators or alarms of atmosphere- supplying respirators.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
390
Table 12: The following checklist must be used to ensure respirators are properly inspected:
Respirator inspection checklist
Facepiece No cracks, tears, or holes
No facemask distortion
No cracked or loose lenses or face shields
Head straps No breaks or tears
No broken
buckles
Valves No residue or dirt, cracks, or tears in valve material
Filters and cartridges NIOSH approved
Gaskets seat
properly
No cracks or dents in housing
Proper cartridge for hazards
Air supply systems Breathing-quality air is used Supply
hoses are in good condition Hoses
are properly connected
Settings on regulators and valves are correct
Employees are permitted to leave their work to maintain their respirators in a

designated safe area under the following circumstances:
To wash their own faces and the respirators’ facepieces to prevent eye or skin irritation
To replace filters, cartridges, or canisters
When they detect vapor or gas breakthrough or leakage in the facepiece or detect other
damage to the respirator or its components
Change Schedules
Air-purifying particulate filters, cartridges, or filtering facepieces must be replaced

when breathing resistance increases, the cartridge surface is contaminated, or when the
filter is damaged.
Note to users of this program. Gases and vapors, odor and irritation are not considered
adequate warnings. Because end-of-service-life indicators (ESLI) are available for a
limited number of chemicals, employers must develop change-out schedules for
cartridges and canisters used with air-purifying respirators for protection against gases
and vapors.
Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
391
APPENDIX 1: Waste Management Flow Chart

Collect and store
until future transport
by an approved
Hazardous Waste
Segregate and Store or

Waste? Collection by
Recycling
Contractor
Collect and dispose by

approved Waste
Contractor
Collect and Recycle in

Approved Recycling
Company
Collect by approved
Sewage Treatment
CollectContractor
by Recycling
Recyclable Company
Waste?
Yes Yes
No Collect and
dispose
b
y approved Waste
Reuse / Recycling
Asphalt on Site and/or Saudi
Aramco Landfill Site
Reuse / Recycling on
Concrete & Excavated Site and/or Saudi
Materials Aramco Landfill
Site
Stockpile Site
Topsoil (Rehabilitation)
Reuse /
Timber Recycling
o
n site

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
392
15.5.1 Respirator storage
Respirators must be stored in a clean, dry area in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Employees must clean and inspect their air-purifying respirators in accordance with the
provisions of this program and store them in a plastic bag in their own lockers. Each
employee’s name must be on the bag and the bag must be used only to store the respirator.
APPENDIX 2: Waste Transfer Checklist
The purpose of this Waste Transfer Checklist is to verify that waste management practices
at the facilities are operating effectively and that they are consistent with the EMP.
Where deficiencies are observed, the appropriate corrective action should be initiated,
which should be documented using the reporting form given in Accident/Incident
Investigation and Reporting Procedure and Corrective/Preventive Action Procedure.

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
393
Item Yes No N/A
Monthly Checks:
Are all wastes clearly labeled?
Are all wastes stored in clearly marked and dedicated waste storage areas
with secondary containment?
Are all wastes segregated, as necessary?
Quarterly Checks:
Have responsibilities for waste management been clearly defined,

documented and communicated?
Is there an up-to-date waste inventory?
Have any objectives and targets been established to minimize and recycle
wastes?
Is progress towards achieving these objectives and targets being monitored?
Is there a Waste Minimization and Recycling Program?
Has training in waste management been provided to relevant

personnel?
Are all documents and records associated with waste management readily
available e.g., training records, transfer notes, inspection reports?

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
394
APPENDIX 3: Waste Consignment Master List
Consignment Date & Time Contractor / Type & Quantity Destination Completed Transfer
Reference of Collection Transporter of Waste of Waste (Y/N & Date)
Number Used Collected

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
395
Appendix 4: Environmental Inspection Checklist for Storages
S/No Checklist YES NO If No, State Location and

Mitigation Measures
1 Skips ad Bins are not overloaded?
2 No spillage from Skips and Bins?
3 Bins with proper and effective covers?
4 Bins lined with plastic lining?
5 Skips and Bins clean and tidy without odor?
6 Waste Storages properly maintain and clean?
7 Perimeter drains surroundings storages clean

and not chokes?
8 Waste Collection Vehicles/Skips installed with
effective cover/shield?
9 No open burning of construction waste within
site?
10 Hazardous waste containers prominently
identified?
11 Hazardous waste effectively stored within
impermeable dike?
12 Hazardous waste storage properly maintains
and cleans?
13 Workers handling waste wearing proper and
appropriate PPE?
14 Oil storages properly maintain and clean?
15 Oil tanks, drums and containers not leaking?
16 Provision of serviceable firefighting and spill

cleaning equipment?
Name of Inspector: Date & Time of Inspection:
Company: Signature:

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
396
Appendix 5: Color Cod

Phone: +966 11 2065474
Fax: +966 11 2605473
397

Project Methodology For Ceer Cars Factory Project

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Methodology For Ceer Cars Factory Project

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Construction Methodology

AL FAWZAN INDUSTRIAL CITY, RIYADH

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

GENRAL SITE LAYOUT

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

Subject: Project Construction Methodology

Prepared By Reviewed By Verified By Date

Quality Manager Construction Manager Project Manager Status

Reviewed By Verified By Approved By

Quality Representative Project Engineer Project Manager

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

Staff organization chart…….……………………………….

Projects Milestones & Constrains……...……………….…..

Scope of MEP Work ……………….…….…….…...………

Installation Execution Methodologies…….…….…...………

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

❖ X-1: - Method Statement for civil works:

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

❖ X-27: - Method Statement for Fire Hose Cabinets:

Project Control Methodology ……...…….…….…......……………

Project Planning Schedule…… ………………………………. ….

Progress Measurement Procedure……………….………………….

Mobilization Plan and Project site preparation….…………....…….

Design Management plan…………………………………….…......

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

• References & Applicable codes and standards

1- Project Specification Division

2- IEC International Electro-Technical Commission.

3- DIN 1999 and EN858 Standard Oil /Water separator.

4- ANSI American National Standards Institute.

5- SEC-ERB Saudi Electricity Company - Eastern Region Branch.

6- SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.

7- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

8- NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

9- NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

10- UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.

11- EHS Environmental Health and safety.

12- CSA Canadian Standard Association

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

13- COCHH Control of substance Hazardous to health regulation

14- CIBSE Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers

15- CDM The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations

16- BSRIA The Building Services Research and Information Association

17- BS British Standard

18- AWWA American Water Works Association

19- ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

20- ASPE American Institute Plumbing Engineers

21- ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

23- SECO Saudi Electrical Company.

24- SASO Saudi Arabian Standard Organization.

25- AWS Structure Welding Code.

26- EJMA Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association.

27- NETA International Electrical Testing Association.

28- IET Institution of Engineering and Technology.

29- BASEC British Approvals Service for Electric Cables.

Saudi Technical Contracting Co. Ltd

30- ICEL The Industry Committee for Emergency Lighting.

31- ICC International Code Council.

32- IBC International Building Code.

33- ISO International Organization for Standardization.

34- IET Institution of Engineering and Technology.

35- AMCD Applicable Municipality Civil Defense.